LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


LIBflAR' 


— — ——^XA^-———— 

:^^^§H^4<k^"  5 


RARY    OF   THE   UNIVERSITY   OF   CALIFORNIA 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

PRESENTED  BY 

PROF.  CHARLES  A.  KOFOID  AND 
MRS.  PRUDENCE  W.  KOFOID 


i  I          -'Ira 


WOODBRIDGE'S  GEOGRAPHY:. 

PUBLISHERS'   NOTICE. 

To  show  in  some  degree,  the  fstimalio?i  in  which  the  fullow? 
ing  work  is  held  by  littrary  gtnll'-men  of  the  first  rt*jitctubilit$ 
in  our  country,  the  publishers  think  proper  to  .slate,  that  they 
hare  in  their  possession  ample  recommendations  of  the  plan  and 
execution  of  the  icork  from  the  following  persons. 

Reverend  Ashbel  Green,  D.D,  President  of  Prince- 
ton College — Reverend  Philip  Lindsley,  Vice  Presi- 
dent of  Princeton  College — Reverend  Daniel  Hascall^ 
Professor  in  the  Baptist  Literary  and  Theological  Se- 
minary, Hamilton,  New-York — Simeon  De  Witt,Esq* 
Surveyor  General  of  the  State  of  New- York — Rever 
rend  Thomas  C.  Brownell,  Bishop  of  Connecticut — 
Reverend  Zephaniah  Swift  Moore,  President  of  the 
Collegiate  Institution  at  Amherst,  Mass. — Reverend 
Abel  Flint,  D.  D. — Mr.  James  L.  Kingsley,  Profess- 
or of  Languages  in  Yale  College — Reverend  Chaun- 
cey  A.  Goodrich,  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Oratory 
in  Yale  College — Rev.  Thomas  H.  Gallaudet,  Princi- 
pal of  the  American  Asylum. 


RECENTLY    PUBLISHED, 

A    SYSTEM    OF  UNIVERSAL    GEOGRAPHY* 

ANCIENT  AND  MODERN: 

ON  THE  PLAN  OF  THE  "  RUDIMENTS  OF  GEOGRAPHY.'" 

Modern  Geography  by  WM.  C.  WOODBRIDGE. 

Ancient  Geography,  by  EMMA  WILLARD. 

Accompanied  by  an  Atlas  on  an  improved  plan,  ernbrac 

ing  eight  Maps,  two  Charts,  and  ten  quarto 

pages   of  Tables,  Questions,  #c. 

The  above  work,  designed  for  the  use  of  the  higher  cla?se* 
in  A(ademies  aud  Schools,  comprises  454  large  duodecimo 
pages,  and  by  an  unusual  compression,  embraces,  (including 
the  letter-press  of  the  Atlas,)  more  than  double  the  quantity 
of  matter  found  in  any  other  School  Geography  now  ia  use. 
By  means  of  this  compression,  the  comparative  expense  of  tho 
book  has  been  greatly  reduced,  and  a  complete  system  of 
Universal  Geography,  embracing  .ill  the  subjects  properly 
belongingto  ihesrienoe,  has  been  brought  within  the  means  oi' 
every  individual,  and  at  a  much  less  expense  than  heretofore 


Comparative  Heights  of  Mountains, 


a    ti  gbe-:  flisht  of »  ball-joa.    4    The  bisbeit  *pot  »isited  b»  aaan.    c. 
e«t  oow  inhabited.  AnU«««»      d.  H«h««  '"r.it  of  r»»e*  »'  **e  V.qa**°r. 
ofcwV;     /    St    P#t-r'-'    chor«h  at  Rome      The  Hi;- l»od«  are  in  New- 
Mt.  Holroke  In  Ma»«»c^n'e!ii.     Montdnock  ia  New-Hampihire. 


RUDIMENTS 

OF 

GEOGRAPHY, 

ON  A  NEW  PLAN. 

DESIGNED  TO  ASSIST   THE   MEMORY   BY 

COMPARISON  AND  CLASSIFICATION; 

WITH  NUMEROUS  ENGRAVINGS  OF 

MANNERS,  CUSTOMS  dJYD  CURIOSITIES. 

ACCOMPANIED   WITH    AW 

ATLAS, 

EXHIBITING    THE 

PREVAILING    RELIGIONS,    FORMS    OF    GOVERNMENT, 
DEGREES    OF    CIVILIZATION, 

AND   THE    COMPARATIVE    SIZE    OF 

TOWNS,  RIVERS  AND  MOUNTAINS 


BY  WILLIAM  C.  IWOODBRIDGE,  A.  M. 

Author  of  a  System  of~TTnfvei  raphy. 


SIXTH  EDITION. 

FROM    THE    THIRD    IMPROVED    EDITIOK. 

•*&fttes~ 

HARTFORD : 

OLIVER  D.  COOKE  &  CO. 
1826. 


Wg 


r>i  STRICT  OF  CONNECTICUT. 

BE  IT  REMEMBKRED,  That  on  the  fi'stday  of  May, 
L.  S.  in  the  forty  s;xth  year  of  the  Independence  of  tiie 
United  States  of  America,  WU.I.IAM  <"'.  \VOOD- 
BRIDGE,  of  the  said  District,  and  EMMA  WILI.ARI>,  of  tb«  dis- 
trict ol  New-Yi  -k,  have  deposited  111  this  Office,  the  t.tle  of 
a  Book,  the  ri<nt  whereof  they  claim  as  authors  and  pro- 
prietors, in  the  words  following,  to  wit : 

"  Rud;meuU  ot  Geography,  on  a  :;ew  flan,  designed  to 
<;  a«ist  the  memory  l-y  comparison  and  cla?sification  :  with 
*»  numerous  engravings  of  manner;,  customs,  and  ruriosities  ; 
"  accompanied  with  an  Atlas,  exhibiting;  the  prevailing  reli- 
"  |pO"i,  forms  of  goTcrnment,  degrees  of  civilization,  and  the 
"com.arat  ve  size  of  town?,  rivers,  and  mountains  By ' 
n  William  C.  Woo-lbridge,  A.  M." 

In  conformity  to  the  Act  of  the  Congress  of  the  United 
State*,  entitled,  "  A:i  Act  for  the  encouragement  of  learning, 
'*  by  seruring  the  copies  of  Maps,  Charts,  and  Books,  tf>  the 
**  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies,  during  the  times 
"  therein  mentioned.'' — And  also  to  an  act,  entitled,  "  An  act 
"  supplementary  to  an  act  entitled  an  act  for  the  enrour- 
"  agement  of  lear'iing,  by  securing  the  copies  of  Maps, 
*'  Charts  and  Books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such 
«' copies  duri:g  the  time?  therei-i  mentioned,  and  extetiJingr 
*•  the  benefits  thereof  to  the  arts  of  designing,  engraving,  and 
"  etching  historv-al  and  other  prints.'' 

CHARLES  A.  INGERSOLL, 

Chrk  of  the  District  of  Connfttievi. 
A  true  copy  of  Record,  examined  and  sealed  by  me, 
"  CHARLES  A.  INGERSOLL. 

Cltrk  of  tht  Dittriet  of  Connecticut. 


PREFACE 

TO  THE  THIRD  EDITION. 

IT  is  by  comparing  facts  of  the  same  kind,  by  arranging 
them  in  classes,  and  reducing  them  to  general  principles,  that 
so  much  simplicity  and  beauty  have  been  given  to  modern 
works  of  science.  We  are  not  now  compelled  to  learn  every 
fact  in  philosophy  by  itself;  but  a  single  statement  or  prin- 
ciple is  given  which  includes  a  thousand  particulars,  and  ena- 
bles us  to  judge  correctly  in  many  cases  where  we  have  rio 
other  means  of  information. 

This  valuable  method  of  instruction  has  not  been  genft- 
rally  adopted  in  systems  of  Geography.  Most  works  on  this 
science  are  arranged  in  a  manner  which  seems  only  adapted 
to  a  gazetteer,  or  a  book  of  reference.  Every  variety  of  in- 
formation, in  politics,  history,  topography  and  natural  sci- 
ence, is  collected  under  the  head  of  <mch  country,  and  facts 
of  the  same  kind  are  usually  scattered  under  so  many  differ- 
ent heads,  that  it  is  a  laborious  task  to  form  correct  views 
of  any  single  subject.  The  hope  of  applying  the  principles 
so  much  valued  in  other  sciences  to  Geography,  induced 
the  author  to  undertake  the  present  work.  The  merit 
of  some  already  published  would  otherwise  have  rendered 
it  unnecessary.  That  the  execution  is  imperfect,  is  almost 
a  matter  of  course  in  a  first  essay.  The  narrow  limits  also 
to  which  he  was  confined,  and  the  danger  of  encroaching 
too  much  at  once  on  established  methods,  prevented  the 
full  execution  of  his  plan.  In  a  larger  work,  which  is  now  in 
press,  the  system  has  been  rendered  more  complete  and  ex- 
tensive. 

The  importance  of  gaining  general  views  on  every  subject 
which  the  mind  can  comprehend,  is  generally  acknowledged. 
The  traveller  who  ascends  an  eminence  from  which  he 
can  overlook  a  great  city  at  a  single  glance,  with  an  expe- 
rienced guide  to  point  out  the  most  prominent  buildings  and 
remarkable  objects,  is  prepared  to  examine  every  part  with 
more  interest,  and  will  gain  a  more  distinct  conception  of 
the  whole,  than  he  could  ever  attain  by  wandering  from  one 
street  to  another.  The  painter  observe?  the  outlines  'of 
a  landscape  before -he  attends  to  the  smaller  objects.  The 
anatomist  studies  the  skeleton  of  the  human  frame,  before 
he  examines  its  minute  organs.  On  the  same  principle?, 
the  student  in  Geography  should  fix  the  great  outlines  oi" 
the  subject  in  his  mind,  before  he  attempts  to  learn  those 
minute  particulars  which  form  only  the  "  filling  up"  of  the 
picture.  Indeed,  this  method  of  study  is  peculiarly  applica- 
ble to  this  subject.  Climate,  production,,  religion,  and  civ* 


V1U  PREFACE. 

ilizatioo  have  their  own  limits,  which  are  not  dependent  oo 
the  will  of  kings,  or  the  changnig  boundaries  of  st_ 

In  the  present  work,  every  subject  of  this  kind,  is  consider- 
ed as  belonging  to  General  Geography.  A  chapter  is  de- 
voted to  each  subject,  that  the  pupil  may  receive  deep  and 
distinct  impressions  before  another  is  introduced ;  and  gene- 
ral statements  are  made  which  include  the  most  important 
fects  on  this  subject  in  every  part  of  the  world.  In  the  =ame 
manner,  those  characteristics  of  a  great  division  of  the  earth, 
which  are  similar  in  all  its  countries,  are  described  by  a 
single  remark,  and  the  pupil  ia  referred  U»  this,  instead  of  re- 
peating it  for  each  country.  Thus,  when  it  is  stated  'that 
savage  nations  "  have  little  knowledge  of  agriculture  and  the 
mechanic  arts,"  (p  48,)  the  pupil  knows  of  course,  after  exa- 
mining the  state  of  nations  on  his  chart,  that  this  is  true  of  the 
Siberians,  the  Indians,  Ace.  When  he  is  told  that  the  coun- 
tries of  the  Torrid  Zone  produce  the  u  finest  fruits,  and  the  most 
beautiful  vegetables,"  (p.  33,)  the  mere  inspection  of  his  map 
win  show  him  that  this  is  the  fact  in  Hindoostan,  Guinea, 
&c.  In  the  same  manner,  when  he  learns  that  the  Nor- 
thern Countries  of  Europe,  u  have  neither  spring  nor  au- 
tumn," like  ours,  (p.  107,)  he  need  not  be  told  again  that  this 
is  the  case  in  Sweden,  Norway,  and  Lapland.  By  this 
method,  the  time  and  space,  and  effort  of  memory,  which 
would  be  necessary  in  repeating  the  statement  under  each  coun- 
try, are  saved,  and  the  comparison  renders  the  idea  more  valua- 
ble to  the  learner. 

In  acquiring  a  knowledge  of  Physical  Geography,  this  me- 
thod is  particularly  useful.  When  subjects  so  unchanging  as 
the  climate  and  productions  of  the  earth,  are  associated  with 
its  political  divisions,  the  pupil  is  not  only  liable  to  great  inac- 
curacy in  his  view?,  but  will  often  find  his  ideas  thrown  into 
confusion,  by  the  frequent  changes  in  the  names,  extent  and 
boundaries  of  states.  But  on  the  plan  proposed,  some  decree 
of  permanency  is  given  to  our  knowledge,  and  much  of  this  in- 
convenience is  avoided.  The  natural  features  of  every  por- 
tion of  the  globe  remain  the  same,  whatever  name*  or  states 
may  be  found  within  it  In  addition  to  this,  we  can  often  judge 
with  correctness  of  countries  unexplored  by  travellers,  by 
knowing  the  region  in  which  they  lie.  To  supply  the  defi- 
ciencies of  general  views,  it  is  only  necessary  to  state  under  the 
bead  of  each  country,  the  important  peculiarities  which  distin- 
guish it  from  others  in  the  same  region,  or  in  a  similar  state  of 
society. 

In  this   work   the   principle   of   comparison   h  »l-o    ap- ' 


PREFACE.  IX 

plied  to  tiie  difficult  subject  of  numbers ;  and  mountains,  ri- 
vers, cities,  &c.  are  arranged  in  classes,  according  to  their  size. 
This  method  not  only  "  relieves  the  memory  from  a  fruitless 
burthen,  by  substituting  a  few  numbers  for  many,"  but  it  leads 
to  those  comparisons  of  known  with  unknown  objects,  without 
which  numbers  are  of  little  value. 

In  every  part  of  the  work,  the  author  has  also  kept  the 
principle  in  view,  that  no  language  can  impress  ideas  so  deep- 
ly on  the  mind  as  information  addressed  to  the  eye.  It 
is  .peculiarly  important  to  adopt  this  method  in  a  science 
that  treats  chiefly  of  visible  objects,  of  which  it  is  impossible 
to  gain  a  complete  idea  without  inspection  or  delineations. 
A  description  cannot  give  so  distinct  views  of  the  geography 
of  a  country  as  a  map;  and  no  words  can  so  fully  convey 
the  idea  of  a  remarkable  custom  or  curiosity  as  a  drawing  or 
engraving. 

On  these  principles  is  founded  the  plan  which  forms  the 
basis  of  the  following  work,  of  obliging  the  pupil,  by  means 
of  questions,  to  acquire  his  knowledge  of  natural  geography 
almost  entirely  from  an  nthts.  In  order  to  furnish  a  more  com- 
plete delineation  of  countries,  the  class  of  each  object  is  mark- 
ed upon  it  in  the  maps  of  this  work ;  and  by  means  of  distinct 
numbers  and  characters,  they  exhibit,  not  only  the  place  of 
rivers,  mountains  and  cities,  but  their  size,  the  capitals  of 
countries  and  the  seats  of  universities.  In  the  Chart  of  the  in- 
habited world,  not  only  the  situation  and  outlines  of  countries 
are  shown,  but  their  i>ojmlalion,  government,  religion,  and  state 
of  civilization.  In  the  View  of  Regions  and  Climates,  the  same 
countries  are  exhibited  with  lines  which  mark  their  climate, 
and  point  out  in  the  list  of  animals  and  vegetables,  such  as 
are  usually  found  in  them.  With  the  same  objects  in  view, 
a  scries  of  engravings  have  been  selected  from  the  works  of 
distinguished  travellers  and  other  authors,  many  of  which  will 
be  found  to  <-onvey  ideas  which  no  description  could  have  fur- 
nished 

It  has  been  proved  by  experience  that  the  various  me- 
thods described,  not  only  oblige  the  pupil  to  understand 
what  he  is  learning,  but  increase  his  interest  in  the  study. 
They  are  also  fitted  to  improve  his  mind,  to  give  him  the 
habit  of  arranging  his  knowledge,  and  to  assist  him  in 
forming  those  general  views  which  are  so  important  to  the 
correctness  of  his  judgment  on  all  subjects.  To  aid  still 
farther  in  the  same  object,  the  travels  on  the  map  are  in- 
troduced, and  many  questions  are  asked,  which  require  the 
pupil  to  apply  his  knowledge  in  a  manner  calculated  to  ex- 


X  PREPACK.  ?'  w 

ercise  his  reason  as  well  as  his  memory.  It  has  also  been  the 
author's  aim  throughout  the  work,  to  lose  uo  opportunity  of 
cultivating  the  moral  feelings  as  well  as  the  intellectual  pow- 
ers of  those  who  may  study  it,  and  to  teach  them  how  to  value 
the  privileges  of  a  free,  enlightened,  and  Christian  country. 

THE  plan  of  teaching  Geography  from  the  map?,  and  the 
"interrogative  system,"  usually  ascribed  to  Guy  and  Gold- 
tmith,  were  used  in  this  country  before  the  introduction  of 
their  works,  by  the  Rec.  William  Woodbridge,  formerly  of 
Newark,  New-Jersey,  and  adopted  in  books  prepared  for  his 
pupfls.  The  plan  of  this  work  was  formed  by  the  author  in 
1813,  and  some  materials  collected;  but  from  the  pressure 
of  other  avocations  and  ill  health,  it  was  not  executed 
until  1821.  After  the  printing  of  the  first  edition  was  com- 
menced, the  author  learned  with  surprise,  that  Mrs.  Willard, 
Principal  of  the  Female  Seminary  at  Troy,  in  the  State  of 
New- York,  had  begun  to  prepare,  and  designed  to  publish,  a 
system  of  geography  on  a  plan  of  classification  and  arrange- 
ment corresponding,  in  some  respects  with  singular  exactness, 
to  that  of  the  present  work,  but  not  including  the  views  of 
moral  and  physical  geography  found  on  the  charts,  or  the  en- 
gravings illustrating  customs  and  curiosities.  It  was  thought 
desirable  that  both  should  unite  in  the  support  of  one  work, 
composed  of  the  Modern  Geography  then  prepared  by  the  au- 
thor, and  a  system  of  Ancient  Geography  which  had  been 
used  by  Mr$.  Willard  in  the  instruction  of  her  pupils.  The 
Ancient  Geography  has  been  recently  published,  and  from 
the  opinion  of  competent  judges,  it  is  hoped  will  be  found  a  va- 
luable acquisition  to  schools,  both  for  the  simplicity  and  ex- 
cellence of  its  plan. 

The  author  has  availed  himself  of  the  suggestions  of  Jfrs. 
Willard  in  improving  the  arrangement  of  the  tables,  and  a 
few  other  parts  of  this  work,  and  adding  some  questions ;  but 
in  all  other  respects  it  remains  as  prepared  by  himself. 
The  coincidence  of  th*  plan  with  that  of  Mrs.  Willard,  and 
the  result  of  long  experience  in  its  use  in  the  well  known 
Seminary  at  Troy,  will  be  seen  in  the  following  extracts  from 
her  preface,  which  will  be  found  at  length  in  the  first  edition, 
and  to  which  the  author  takes  pleasure  in  referring  as  an  in- 
teresting exhibition  of  the  principles  on  which  this  work  is 
founded. 

"  Although  this  system  has  never  before  been  published, 
yet  it  has  been  brought  to  the  full  test  of  experiment. 
It  is  nearly  eight  years  since  I  began  to  teach  geography  in 


PREFACE.  XI 

the  method  here  recommended.  Intending  to  publish  my  plan 
of  instruction,  I  carefully  watched  its  operation  on  the  minds 
of  my  pupils ;  which  at  the  same  time,  I  studied  in  reference  to 
it,  the  most  approved  systems  of  the  philosophy  of  the  mind. 
My  success  in  teaching  from  it,  far  surpassed  my  own  expecta- 
tions, and  I  have  often  said,  that  if  I  had  acquired  any  reputa- 
tion as  a  teacher,  I  owed  it  as  much  to  my  method  of  instruc- 
tion in  geography  as  to  any  one  circumstance.  The  system  of 
modern  geography  here  presented  to  the  public  contains  that 
method,  yet  strange  as  it  may  appear,  Mr.  rl  oodbridge  origi- 
nated and  wrote  it." 

— u  Of  all  the  branches  of  study  which  my  pupils  learn, 
geography  taught  in  this  manner  is  that  which  they  most 
easily  call  to  recollection ;  and  this  is  the  case,  whether  the 
examination  takes  place  after  the  lapse  of  a  few  months,  or  a 
few  years." 

A  second  edition  of  this  work  was  required  within  six 
weeks  after  the  publication  of  the  first,  and  no  time  was-  al- 
lowed for  discovering  defects,  by  its  use.  The  unexpected 
demand  for  a  third  edition  before  the  expiration  of  a  year, 
calls  for  the  gratitude  of  the  author  to  those  who  have  fa- 
voured him  with  their  countenance  and  remarks.  He  has 
endeavoured  to  make  the  only  return  in  his  power,  by 
correcting  the  defects  discovered  by  the  aid  of  their  ex- 
perience and  observation,  and  hopes  the  work  will  better 
desprve  the  approbation  it  has  received.  He  has  been  care- 
ful, however,  to  make  such  altrrnlions  only  as  an  experienced 
teacher  believed  would  produce  no  serious  incon\enience  to 
schools,  and  to  preserve  the  same  paping,  except  in  a  few 
cases  where  an  alteration  was  indisp.  nsible.  The  whole 
work  is  numbered  on  the  plan  of  Blair,  and  the  more  dif- 
ficult parts  are  printed  in  a  smaller  type.  Comparative 
views  of  cities  have  been  annexed  to  each  quarter  of  the 
"World.  A  new  and  more  full  account  of  climates,  animals, 
and  vegetables,  is  given ;  and  an  enlarged  table  or  chart, 
exhibiting  their  geographical  situation,  is  affixed  to  the  At- 
las The  hothermallin.es,  or  boundaries  of  various  climates, 
are  markod  from  a  careful  exanr'nation  of  the  productions  of 
ev.  *y  portjon  of  the  world,  compared  with  the  mean  annual 
temperature  of  places,  as  ascertained  by  Baron  Humboldt. 
In  order  to  furnish  this  chart,  it  was  necessary  to  reduce 
the  size  and  expense  of  the  former  map  and  chart  of  the 
world ;  but  the  amount  of  information  they  contain  is  the  same 
n«  before. 


XII  REMARKS    TO    INSTRUCTORS. 

Remarks  on  the  method  of  using  the  work. 

Iw  the  use  of  this  work  it  is  intended  that  the  pupil  should 
derive  most  of  his  information  from  a  careful  examination  of  the 
maps  and  chart,  as  the  only  substantial  basis  of  a  knowledge 
of  geography.  No  pains  should  be  spared  to  render  this  part 
of  the  subject  familiar  to  his  mind.  To  effect  this  object,  the 
questions  have  been  made  as  numerous  and  particular  as  the 
limits  of  such  a  work  will  allow,  and  it  is  not  designed  to  give 
him  any  information  in  words,  which  he  can  obtain  from  the 
maps. 

It  is  particularly  important  that  the  pupil  should  early  be 
made  familiar  with  the  point*  of  the  compass  in  the  place  where 
he  is,  and  on  the  map,  and  with  the  divisions  of  a  country 
founded  on  them,  as  exhibited  in  the  figure,  page  1 8.  This  is 
necessary,  that  he  may  be  able  to  describe  without  hesitation, 
the  source  and  course  of  rivers,  the  situation  of  places,  &c.  To 
aid  in  this,  he  should  be  accustomed  to  place  the  upper  part  of 
the  map  towards  the  North. 

At  first  he  should  be  required  to  answer  the  questions  con- 
cerning boundaries,  rivers,  &c.  with  the  map  before  him,  and 
to  point  to  the  part  he  is  describing,  that  the  instructor  may  be 
assured  that  he  understands  what  he  is  repeating.  But  he 
should  be  taught,  as  soon  as  possible,  to  fix  the  image  of  the  map 
in  his  mind,  and  repeat  from  this  entirely.  When  this  is  ef- 
fected, with  the  maps  and  chart  of  the  present  work,  it  is  evi- 
dent that  the  great  difficulties  of  the  study  will  be  overcome, 
and  the  most  important  facts  of  natural  and  political  geography 
will  be  impressed  on  his  memory,  in  such  a  manner  as  not  to  be 
easily  forgotten. 

The  author  knows  no  method  of  study  so  well  fitted  to  ac- 
complish this  object,  as  that  of  drawing  maps  by  thf  ey'.  After 
the  pupil  has  become  familiar  with  a  map,  let  him  draw  on  a 
slate  the  outline  of  one  country  at  a  time,  commencing  with  the 
lines  of  latitude  and  longitude,  and  usiner  these  as  guides. 
He  should  do  this  at  first  perhaps,  by  some  easy  mode  of  mea- 
suring, but  ultimately,  6y  the  eye  alunr.  Let  him  repeat  this 
until  he  is  able  to  draw  the  same  outline  from  memory.  Let 
him  proceed  by  the  same  steps  to  draw  sketches,  including  the 
mountains  and  rivers,  with  their  names,  and  those  of  the  coun- 
tries or  ? ea=  around,  and  afterwards  to  mark  the  places  of  the 
principal  cities. 

After  a  cla??  have  had  some  practice  in  this  exercise,  their 
knowledge  may  be  easily  tested,  and  the  countries  t!i*?y  have 
»one  over  reviewed,  by  an  application  of  the  Lancastrian 


REMARKS    TO    INSTRUCTORS.  Xlll 

method  of  instruction,  which  the  celebrated  author  of  that  sys- 
tem does  not  appear  to  have  made. 

Let  the  pupils  be  seated  at  a  desk,  before  the  instructor,  each 
with  a  small  slate,  and  a  set  of  directions  like  the  following  be 
given  them. 

Draw  the  outlines  of  England. —  Write  the  names  of  the  seas 
and  countries  around  it. — Draw  the  river  Thames — the  Se- 
vern, &c. — Mark  (he place  of  London — of  Liverpool,  &c. 

Let  each  direction  be  executed  by  all  at  once,  in  silence,  and 
their  slates  then  exhibited  to  the  instructor  for  correction.  It 
is  believed  that  no  method  of  examination  will  be  more  rapid, 
or  more  decisive  as  to  the  knowledge  of  the  pupils,  and  that 
none  will  excite  more  interest  in  their  minds.  The  same  me- 
thod may  be  applied  to  the  Chart  also. 

The  work  is  intended  to  comprise  all  that  is  necessary  for 
those  who  wish  to  acquire  the  rudiments  of  the  science.  In 
the  present  edition,  the  more  difficult  parts  are  put  in  a  small 
type,  to  be  reserved  for  a  revisal,  or  for  the  use  of  older  pu- 
pils, and  questions  of  a  similar  kind  are  marked  (//.)  But 
so  great  a  variety  is  found  in  the  capacity  of  different  pupils 
at  the  same  age,  that  the  judgment  of  the  instructor  only 
can  decide  in  a  particular  case,  what  portions  should  be 
learned  at  first.  In  studying  it  for  the  first  time  it  is  not  ne- 
cessary, and  will  not  usually  be  advisable,  that  the  pupil 
should  be  required  to  recollect  the  classes  of  cities,  rivers, 
&c.  In  examining  the  maps,  the  numbers  which  indicate 
them  will  scarcely  tail  to  make  an  impression  on  his  memory, 
and  he  will  be  better  prepared  to  attend  to  these,  and  to  the 
"  General  Views,"  after  he  has  gained  some  familiarity  with 
the  subject. 

The  questions  are  more  numerous  than  in  other  school 
geographies,  in  order  to  direct  the  pupil  to  every  thing  which 
is  essential  for  him  to  learn,  (except  in  some  parts  to  be 
committed  to  memory,)  and  to  furnish  in  this  way,  not  so 
much  a  system  of  geography,  as  a  course  of  geographical  in- 
struction. But  it  will  contribute  much  to  his  improvement, 
if,  as  he  advances,  the  instructor  will  vary  and  multiply  his 
inquiries,  particularly  with  reference  to  latitudes  and  longi- 
tudes, and  the  distances  and  bearings  of  places  and  countries 
from  each  other.  In  the  present  edition,  where  any  perplexity 
may  occur  in  finding  the  answer  to  a  question,  a  reference 
is  made  to  the  map,  or  the  section  of  the  work  which  contains 
it. 

It  is  advised  'by  some  instructors,  that  even  in  commenc- 
ing this  study,  the  natural  geography  of  all  the  great  por- 


XIV  REMARKS     TO    INSTRUCTORS. 

tions  of  the  world  should  be  learned,  before  any  attention  is 
paid  to  the  description  of  any  particular  countries.  Where  this 
method  is  preferred,  the  necessary  questions  will  be  found  fol- 
lowing the  account  of  each  quarter  of  the  world. 

It  is  particularly  recommended,  that  the  pupil  be  early 
taught  the  correct  pronunciation  of  names,  by  reading  a 
portion  in  the  accented  tables,  at  the  end  of  this  work,  every 
day 

The  plan  of  the  present  work  is  to  embrace  every  thing  as 
much  as  possible  in  general  descriptions,  to  be  applied  to  par- 
ticular countries  included  in  them.  In  order  to  gain  the  full 
advantage  of  the  system,  it  is  important  often  to  call  up  the 
pupil's  attention  and  refresh  his  memory,  by  questions  refer- 
ring to  these  descriptions.  The  following  questions  furnish  an 
example  of  this  mode  of  examination.  They  may  be  used  for 
a  general  review  of  the  book,  and  made  more  or  less  minute, 
according  to  the  views  of  the  instructor,  and  the  capacity  of  the 
pupil. 

QUESTIONS  FOR  REVIEWING. 
Tn  be  answered  for  tach  country. 

In  what  Zone  and  in  what  part  of  it  is  -  ?*  What  ra 
the  general  climate  of  that  part  of  the  Earth  :  (See  descrip- 
tion of  Zones  and  Climnlts.)  What  is  the  state  of  civiliza- 
tion ?  (See  Chart.)  Describe  that  state.  (See  article  (  .'irili- 
sation.)  What  is  the  government  ?  (See  Chart.)  Describe 
that  government.  (Sf-e  arlicit  Gorfrnmtnl.)  What  is  the 
religion?  (See  Chart.)  Describe  this  religion.  (See  article 


To  which  division  of  --  1  does  --  *  belong  ?  What 
is  the  general  climate  of  these  countries,  and  of  that  part  of 
--  *  in  the  same  latitude  '.  What  are  generally  their  ex- 
ports? What  is  the  character  of  the  people?  (See  dt  strip  • 
linn,  uf  the  country,  and  of  that  division  nf  .America,  Europe, 
.3xia  or  Afrca  to  which  it  belongs.)  What  is  the  population, 
and  how  does  it  compare  with  the  United  .States  ?  (See  Chart.) 

In  what  region  as  to  climate  is  it  situated?  (See  table  of 
Climata  )  What  vegetables  may  you  expect  in  it.  (See 
Tublf.)  What  animals?  What  is  the  state  of  its  manufac- 
tures? (See.  article  Manufacture*.)  What  can  you  say  of  its 
commerce?  (See  Commerce.)  What  is  the  state  of  literature 
and  education?  (See  Literature.) 

*  Here  insert  the  name  of  the  country. 

t  Here  insert  the  name  of  the  quarter  of  the  globe  to  which 

>ngs. 


RUDIMENTS  OF  GEOGRAPHY. 


INTRODUCTION. 

GEOGRAPHY  re  a  description  of  the  Earth. 

1.  It  has  been  found  by  sailing  round  the  Earth,  that 
it  is  a  vast  globe  or  ball. 

This  is  also  proved  by  the  circular  shadow  of  the 
Earth  on  the  Moon  in  an  eclipse,  and  by  the  appear- 
ance of  a  ship  at  sea,  where  the  highest  part  is  always 
seen  first. 

2.  The  Earth  is  inhabited  on  all  sides,  by  men  and 
animals,  and  covered  with  trees  and  vegetables,  which 
are  kept  on  it  by  the  attraction  of  Gravitation. 

ASTRONOMY. 

3.  The  Earth  is  one  of  the  planets,  or  moving  stars, 
which  revolve  round  the  Sun,  described  in  the  science 
ef  Astronomy. 

4.  There  are  seven  primary  planets  in  our  system, 
revolving  round  the  Sun  in  the  following  order  :  begin- 
ning at  the  Sun.      1.  Mercury;  2.  Venus;     3.  the 
Earth  :  4.  Mars  ;  5.  Jupiter  ;  6.  Saturn ;  7.  Herschel, 
or  the  Georgium   Sidus.     The  paths  of  these  planets 
round  the  Sun  are  called  their  orbits,  and  are  represent- 
ed in  the  figure  on  the  following  page. 

5.  There  are  18  secondary  planets,  or  moons,  re- 
Tolving  round  these  primaries,  of  which  the  Earth  has 
1,  Jupiter  4,  Saturn  7,  and  Herschel  6. 

6.  Four  very  small  planets,  called  asteroids — Cere?, 
Pallas,  Juno  and  Vesta,  have  been  discovered,  revolv- 
ing between  the  orbits  of  Mars  and  Jupiter. 

7.  Besides  these,  more  than  400  comets,  or  stars  with 
bright  trains,  have  been  seen  revolving  round  the  Sun, 

8.  All  these  bodies  form  the  Solar  System,  and  re- 
•reivf  their  light  and  heat  from  the  Sun  in  the  centro 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Solar  System. 


9.  The  Swn  is  an  immense  body,  a  million  times  lar- 
ger than  the  Earth,  and  95  millions  of  mdes  from  us. 
It  is  883,000  miles  in  diameter,  and  turns  on  its  own 
axis  in  25  days. 

10.  Mercury  is  a  small  planet,  so  near  the  Sun  that 
it  is  seldom  spen. 

Venus  is  a  bright  star,  nearly  as  large  as  the  Earth. 
When  it  rises  a  short  time  before  the  Sun,  it  is  called 
the  Morning  Star  ;  when  it  sets  soon  after  the  Sun, 
the  Evening  Star. 

The  Earth  is  nearly  8000  miles  in  diameter,  mov- 
ing round  the  Sun  in  one  year,  or  365  days,  6  hours, 
at  the  rate  of  68.00w  miles  an  hour. 


INTRODUCTION. 


17 


Mars  is  a  planet  much  smaller  than  the  Earth,  of  a 
red,  fiery  colour. 

Jupiter  is  nearly  1500  times  larger  than  the  Earth, 
and  the  largest  of  all  the  planets. 

Saturn  is  1000  times  larger  than  the  Earth,  sur- 
rounded by  a  broad,  flat  ring. 

Hcrsckel,  the  most  distant  of  the  planets,  is  90  times 
as  large  as  the  Earth,  but  is  seldom  seen  without  a 
telescope. 

11.  The  Moon  is  only  2180  miles  in  diameter.     It 
is  240,000  miles  from  the  Earth,  and  revolves  round 
it  in  27£  days. 

12.  The  revolution  of  the  Earth  round  the  Sun  is 
called  the  annual  or  yearly  revolution,  and  cause?  the 
changes  of  the  seasons. 

13.  Besides  this  revolution,  the  Earth  turns,  like  a 
wheel,  on  its  own  axis,  once  in  24  hours  ;  and  as  the 
Sun  enlightens  only  one  half  the  globe  at  once,  each 
part  is  alternately  in  the  light  and  shade. 

This  motion  causes  day  and  night,  and  is  called  the 
diurnal  or  daily  revolution. 

14.  The  other  planets  have  similar  revolutions, 
but  in  various  times. 

The  diameter,  distance,  and  motions  of  the  planets  are  de- 
scribed in  the  following  table. 


Mercury 

Venus 
Earth 
Mars 
Jupiter 
Saturn 
Hi-4-schel 

Diam- 
eter in 
miles. 

3,000 

7,6-)0 
7,900 
4,200 
89,000 
79,000 
35,000 

Distance 
from  the  sun, 
in  miles. 

Day,  or 

revolution 
on  axis. 

Year,  or 

revolution 
round  sun. 

Hourly 
motion 
in    orbit. 

36  millions. 

68     do. 
95     do. 
144  do. 
491  do. 
901  do. 
1800  do. 

•mknown 
hrs.  min. 
23  20 
23  56 
24  39 
9  55 
10  16 
unknown. 

3  months 

7     do. 
12     do. 
»3     do. 
1  2     years 

J9  l-\  do. 
R3  1-2  do. 

111,000 

81.000 
68.000 
56.000 
30.000 
22,000 
15.000 

IXTROIfft  TIO.N. 

15.  The  comet*  move  irregularly,  sometimes  com- 
ing vory  near  the  Sun,  and  then  flying  offJueyond  the 

:i«tarjt  planet. 

Only  a  k-w  have  been  known  to  return,  and  at  in- 
tervals of  75,  100  or  200  years. 

16.  The  remaining  stars  are  called  fixed  stars,  be- 
cause they  keep  nearly  the  same  place  in  the  heavens 
from  age   to  age.     They  may  be  distinguished  from 
th-^  planet?  by  their  twinkling  light. 

About  1000  may  be  seen  in  a  clear  night  by  the 
but  from  the  examinations  made  with  telescope?, 
it  is  probable  that  there  are  many  millions. 

They  are  at  an  immense  distance  from  us,  and  are 
supposed  by  many,  to  be  suns  in  other  systems,  like 
our  solar  system. 

Quti/io/u.— /.  What  is  Geography?  What  is  the  figure 
of  the  Earth  ?  How  is  it  known  ?  How  many  planets  are 
there  ?  How  many  moons  or  secondary  planets  ?  How  many 
asteroids  and  comets :  What  system  do  these  bodies  form  ? 
.he  Mercury— Venus— the  Earth — Mars — Jupiter — Sa- 
turn—Herschel— the  Moon. 

What  is  the  revolution  of  the  Earth  round  the  Sun  call- 
ed, and  what  does  it  cause ?  What  other  motion  has  the  Earth, 
ar.J  what  does  it  cause?  Hare  the  other  planets  the  same 
motion ? 

Learc  questions  markfd  (11.^  for  Reriev. 

II.  Mention  the  diameters  of  the  planets  in  order.  (See 
the  Table.)  What  is  the  distance  of  each  planet  from  the 
Sun  ?  What  is  the  day  of  each  of  the  planets?  What  is  the 
year  of  each?  How  many  miles  do  they  move  in  an  hour? 
Describe  the  comets.  How  many  comet?  ha"e  been  known 
to  return  ?  What  are  the  remaining  stars  called,  and  why  ? 
How  many  fixed  stars  can  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  and 
how  many  are  there  supposed  to  be?  What  are  they  suppos- 
ed to  be: 

EXPLANATK 
Preparatory  to  the  use  of  the  Maps 

17.  The  most  correct  representation  of  the  En- 
surface,  with  the  proper  distance  and  size  of  its  parts. 
fs  an  artificial  globe*. 


INTRODUCTION. 


19 


18.  A  Map  is  a  picture  ofthe  surface  of  the  Earth,  as 
it  would  appear  to  a  person  at  some  distance  above  it. 

19.  A  Chart  is  a  representation  ofthe  surface  ofthe 
Earth,  as  if  it  were  spread  out  on  a  plane  or  level, 
used  chiefly  by  mariners. 

20.  There  are  four  cardinal  points  ofthe  compass, 
North,  South,  East  and  West ;  marked  N. — S.— E. 
— W. 

East,  that  part  of  the  heavens  in  which  the  Sun 
rises,  and  West,  that  part  in  which  it  sets.  When  we 
stand  with  our  right  hand  to  the  East,  the  West  is  on 
our  left.  North  before  us,  and  South  behind  us. 

21.  On  a  Map  or  Chart,  the  upper  partis  always 
North,  the  bottom  South,  the  right  hand  East,  and  the 
left  hand  West,  as  represented  in  the  following  figure. 


Points  of  the  Compass. 

22.  Between  the  cardinal  points,  are  marked  four 
others,  North-East,  South-East,   North-West,  South- 
West.  These  are  marked  N.E.—  S.E.—  N.W.—  S.W. 

23.  The  course  of  a  river  is  that  point  of  the  com- 
pass towards  which  the  river  run?.     The  course  or 
direction  of  one  place  from  another  is  that  point  ofthe 
e'ompass  towards  which  it  lies. 

2* 


INTRODUCTION. 


24.  The  various  part?  of  a  country,  or  portions  of 
the  earth,  are  also  named  according  to  the  points  of 
the  compass,  the  middle  being  called  the  interior,  as 
in  the  figure  below. 


North-west- 
ern part 

Northern 
part 

North-east- 
ern part 

Western 
part 

Interior  or 
Central  part 

Eastern 
part 

South-west- 
ern part 

Southern 
part 

South-east- 
ern part 

Parts  of  a  Country. 

Questions. — What  is  the  mest  correct  representation  of 
the  Earth?  What  is  a  Map,  and  what  a  chart?  What 
are  the  four  cardinal  points '.  Which  point  of  the  Compass 
is  East?  How  do  you  find  the  rest  after  knowing  this? 
Where  are  these  points  on  Maps  and  Charts  ?  What  points 
are  there  between  the  four  pr  ncipal  points  ?  What  is  the 
course  of  a  river?  What  is  the  direction  of  one  place 
from  anothpr?  How  are  the  different  parts  of  a  country 
sometimes  named  ? 

In  foviing  the  pointt  of  the  compass  on  the  Map,  the 
pupil  must  alicays  jememi/tr.  that  as  the  Map  it  a  picture  of 
a  Glvbr,  the  lints  draicn  JW/A  a/< d  South,  and  East  and 
West,  are  not  generally  straight,  but  curved  to  rtprtscnt  cir- 
cles ;  he  must  therefore  trace  tht  points  of  the  compass  accord- 
ing to  these  lines. 

Thus  on  a  JHap  of  ihf   World,  the  Azores  are  South  from 

•i,    though    thty    appear   to    bt  *(>uth-east;   and  A'tic- 

foundland  is  Soitth-iftst     t!fugh  it  appears  !     i,f  South.     So 

Iceland   is  teat  from  JVvncai,;   though  it  sums  to  be  fourth- 


NATURAL  DIVISIONS  OF  THE   EARTH.  2i 

Questions. — What  is  East  of  Greenland?  What  is  South 
of  Iceland?  What  is  East  of  Iceland?  What  is  West  of  the 
Azores  ?  What  is  South-west  of  these  Islands  ?  In  what 
direction  is  Spitzbergen  from  Greenland  ?  Greenland  from 
Spitsbergen  ?  The  West  Indies  from  the  Azores  ?  What 
places  do  you  find  South  of  Spitsbergen,  down  to  the  South 
pole  ?  In  what  direction  is  Kamschatka  from  Iceland  ?  Ice- 
land from  Kamschatka  ? 

NATURAL  DIVISIONS  OF  THE  EARTH. 
With  Questions  on  the  Map  of  the  World. 

25.  When  we  look  on  a  map  of  the  world,  we  see 
that  a  greater  part  of  the  surface  of  the  earth  is  cover- 
ed with  a  vast  collection  of  water.     It  is  divided  by 
geographers  into  five  principal  parts,  called  oceans — 
the  Atlantic,  the  Pacific,  the  Indian,  the  Northern  and 
the  Southern  Oceans. 

26.  Oceans  are  the  habitation  of  innumerable  fish, 
which  furnish  food  to  a  large  part  of  mankind. 

27.  The  waters  of  the  ocean  purify  the  nir  by  their 
incessant  motion  ;  and  the  vapours  which  rise  from 
them,  fall  in  rain  and  snow,  to  water  the  earth. 

28.  They  are  always  nearly  of  the  same  tempera- 
ture ;  and  the  winds  which  blew  from  them,  cool  the 
earth  in  summer,  and  warm  it  in  winter. 

They  are  perpetually  circulating  in  currents,  which 
carry  the  warm  water  of  hot  countries  to  colder  ones 
and  bring  back  cold  water  to  cool  the  warmer  regions. 

29.  Oceans  also  serve  as  the  highway  from  one  part 
of  the  globe  to  another ;  and  make   it  easy  to  obtain, 
by  commerce,  the  valuable  productions  of  all  climates, 
and  the  u-seful  knowledge  of  all  nations. 

Questions. — How  much  of  the  surface  of  the  Earth  is 
covered  with  water  ?  How  are  its  waters  divided  ? 

How  are  oceans  useful  in  furnishing  us  food  ?  What  effect 
have  they  on  the  air,  and  what  benefit  do  we  receive  from 
their  vapours  ?  What  currents  have  they?  Are  they  of  any 
use  in  commerce  ? 


22  GENERAL    6EOGRAPHV. 

30.  In  the  midst  of  the  waters  which  surround  the 
globe,  ere  two  large  portions  of  land  not  divided  by 
water,  which  are  called  Continents.     They  are  called 
the  Eastern  and  Western  Continents,  because  one  is 
found  in  each  hemisphere. 

31.  The  land  on  the  globe  is  also  divided  by  geo- 
raphers  into  four  smaller  portions,  called  quarters — 
Europe,  Asia  and  Africa,  on  the  Eastern  Continent ; 
and  America   on  the  Western,  including  North  and 
South  America. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  islands  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  divided  into  Australasia  and  Polynesia. 

32.  The  quarters  of  the  globe  are  divided  into  smal- 
ler portions,  called  countries,  each  of  which  usually 
contains  men  of  one  nation,  speakingthe  same  language. 

Countries  are  divided  into  states  or  provinces,  con-* 
tailing  rifies,  to^ns  and  Tillages.  An  empire  is  com- 
posed of  many  countries  united  under  one  government. 

Q;/«/tort5 — What  large  portions  of  land  do  we  find  on  the 
globe  ?  What  are  they  called  ?  How  is  the  Eastern  Conti- 
nent bounded,  or  what  ocean  is  on  the  N.  and  what  on  the 
E.  S.  and  W.  ?  (See  I  fie  map  of  (he  World  for  these  quetlions 
and  others.}  How  is  the  Western  Continent  hounded  ;  What 
other  divisions  of  the  land  are  there  ?  What  ocean  must  we 
cross  in  groing  from  Europe  to  America  ?  What  one  in  going 
from  Asia  to  America? 

la  what  direction  is  Europe  from  America?  In  what  di- 
rection from  Europe  are  Asia  and  Africa  ?  How  is  North 
America  Hounded?  South  America:  Europe?  Asia?  Af- 
rica? Where  are  Australasia  and  Polynesia?  How  are 
these  great  portions  of  the  globe  divided  ?  Hew  are  coun- 
tries divided?  What  is  an  empire? 

33.  When  a  part  of  the  ocean  is  almost  surrounded 
by  land,  it  is  called  a  sea.     A  salt  lake  is  also  called  a 
sea,  as  the  Caspian  Sea,  and  Sea  of  Aral,  in  Asia. 

Qu«/ion5. — What  is  a  sea?  What  seas  separate  Europe 
from  Asia  and  Africa?  What  seas  are  there  E.  of  A-'a,  <<ud 
what  S.  of  it?  What  sea  is  between  Ainca  and  Asia? 


NATURAL  DIVISIONS  OF  THE  EARTH.  23 

Where  is  the  North  Sea  ?     What  sea  is  N.  of  South  America  ? 
What  lakes  are  called  seas,  and  where  are  they  ? 

34.  The  narrow  passage  of  water  into  a  sea,  or  be- 
tween two  portions  ofland,  is  called  a  strait. 

A  wider  p;iss;ige  is  called  a  channel. 
A  sound  is  a  channel  or  strait  which  may  be  sound- 
ed, or  fvhj|se  depth  may  he  measured  with  a  line. 

Questions. — What  is  a  strait  ?  What  are  the  straits  of 
the  Mediterranean  and  Red  Seas  ?  What  straits  connect  the 
Pacific  and  Arctic  Oceans  ?  What  straits  south  of  South 
America  ?  What  is  a  channel  ?  What  channel  between 
Africa  and  Madagascar  ?  What  is  a  sound? 

35.  When  a  part  of  the  ocean  runs  up  into  the  land, 
with  a  broad  opening,  it  is  called  a  gulf  or  bay. 

A  harbour  is  a  small  bay,  where  ships  may  anchor. 
A  road  is  a  part  of  the  sea  near  a  coast,  where  ships 
may  ride  or  lie  at  anchor. 

Questions.  -  What  is  a  gulf  or  bay?  What  gn  If  is  S.  of  N. 
America?  What  W.  of  Africa?  WhXt  bay  S.  of  Asia? 
What  is  a  harbour  ?  A  road  ? 

36.  An  island   is   a   tract  of  land,  smaller  than  a 
continent,  entirely  surrounded  by  water. 

<  Questions. — What  is  an  island  ?  WThat  very  large  island 
lie-  S.  E.  from  Asia  ?  What  others  near  it  ?  What  one  F.  of 
Africa  ?  What  islands  W.  of  Europe  ?  What  between  North 
and  South  America?  What  are  some  of  those  in  the  Pacific 
Ocean  ?  What  is  the  largest  island  on  the  globe  ? 

37.  That  part  of  the  continent,  or  main  land,  which 
lies  next  to  the  sea,  is  called  the  shore  or  coast. 

Questions. — What  is  a  coast  ?  What  countries  are  on  the 
western  coast  of  Africa  ?  What  on  the  eastern  coast  of  North 
America?  What  on  the  western  ? 

38.  When  a  point  of  land  on  the  coast  projects  into 
the  sea,  it  is  called  a  cape.     A  high  cape  is  cailed  a 

promontory. 

Questions. — What  is  the  southern  cape  of  America  ?  What 
:- :that  of  Africa?  What  of  Hindoostan  ?  What  is  the  most 
western  cape  of  Africa  ?  The  most  eastern  of  S.  America  ? 


-1  GENERAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

What  is  the  northern  cape  of  Europe'  Of  North  America  '. 
The  southern  of  Greenland :  What  is  a  promont' 

39.  When  a  portion  of  land  runs  out  into  the  sea, 
joined  to  the  continent  only  by  a  narrow  strip  or  neck 
of  land,  it  is  called  a  peninsula. 

South  America  and  Africa  are  the  largest  peninsulas. 

Quti/Mmx.--VVhat  is  a  peninsular  3!eution  some  on  the 
globe.  What  peninsulas  in  Asia  ?  Vi  hat  in  Europe  ? 

43.  The  neck  of  land  which  joins  a  peninsula  to 
the  main  land,  i*  called  an  isthmus. 

Questions. — What  isthmus  joins  S.  America  to  N.  America  .x 
What  one  joins  Africa  to  Asia? 

DESERTS. 

41.  Deserts  are  immense  tracts  of  land,  usually  level, 
on  which  no  water  is  found,  and  plants  cannot  grow. 

42.  The  most  remarkable  desert  known  is  the  Sa- 
hara of  Africa,  avast  plain  of  burning  sand,  2000  or 
3000  miles  long,  with  fertile  spots  scattered  here  and 
there  in  it,  like  islands  in  the  ocean. 

QuecfMMt. —  What  are  deserts  ?  Which  i;  the  most  remarkable? 
Younger  pupilt  should  oinit  all  that  is  printed  in  small  type, 
(marked  with   Roman  numerals,  as  XLIII)   until  they  rtntu 
the  book. 

XLIII. 

a.  Other  parts  of  Africa,  and  «ome  parts  of  Arabia  and  Per- 
sia, are  covered  with  similar  deserts. 

i  he  desert  of  Gobi  or  Shamo,  in  Asia,  is  a  lofty,  cold  re- 
i  500  miles  long. 

c.  A  large  part  of  Siberia,  and  the  northern  parts  of  North 
America  are  made  almost  deserts  by  perpetual  frost. 

d.  Sometimes  immense  plains  are  found  covered  with  grass, 
— In  Aria  called  tltppes,  iu  South  America,  pampas,  and  in  the 
United  States,  prairies. 

Questions.--ln  what  other  countries  are  there  deserts?     De- 
scribe that  of  Gobi.     What  is  the  state  of  Siberia,  and  parts  of 
..erica  :     What  plains  are  sometimes  found? 

MOUNTAINS. 

44.  Mountains  are  vast  prominences  on  the  surface 
ef  the  earth.     Some  which  send  forth  fire  and  smoke 

.1  their  tops  are  called  wlcanees. 


NATURAL    DIVISIONS    OF    THE    EARTH.  26 

45.  The  tops  of  the  loftiest  mountains  are  about  five 
miles  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

They  appear  vast  to  us  ;  but  they  are  no  more  when 
compared  to  the  earth,  than  a  grain  of  sand  on  a  com- 
mon globe. 

46.  Mountains  sometimes  occur  single,  but  general- 
ly united,  forming  chains  or  ridges,  of  various  lengths 
and  heights. 

Questions. — What  are  mountains?  Howhigh  are  the  lofti- 
est mountains  ?  What  is  the  diameter  of  the  earth  ?  (6'ee  As- 
tronomy.) How  do  these  mountains  compare  with  the  earth  ? 
Are  mountains  generally  found  single?  What  are  the  prin- 
cipal chains  of  mountains  in  America?  (See  map  of  the 
World.)  What  iu  Europe  ?  What  in  Asia  and  Africa  ? 

XLVII.     (For  the  Review.') 

a.  Mountains  may  be  arranged  in  12  classes,  according  to 
their  height. 

Let  the  pupil  here  examine  the  view  of  mountains  in  the 
frontispiece  and  learn  the  classes  from  it. 

b.  The  loftiest  mountains  yet  discovered,  are  the  Himma- 
leh,  or  Himlaya  Mountains,  north  of  Hindoostan,  in  Asia. 

c.  The  Andes,  of  South  America,  are  the  grandest   chain 
of  mountains  on  the  globe,  extending  about  4000  miles,  with 
numerous  peaks,  four  miles  high.     The  most  celebrated  peak 
is  Chimborazo,  and  the  loftiest  volcano  is  Cotopaxi. 

d  The  Himmaleh  mountains,  and  the  Andes  are  so  lofty, 
that  although  they  are  situated  in  very  hot  countries,  the  tops 
are  covered  with  perpetual  snow. 

Iu  ascending  these  mountains,  you  will  find  every  climate. 
The  foot  is  burning  with  heat,  the  middle  is  temperate  and  de- 
lightful, and  the  top  always  frozen. 

e.  The  Cordillera  of  Mexico  is  next  in  height,  containing 
several  peaks  about  3  1-2  miles  high,  of  which  the  most  re- 
markable is  the  volcano  of  Poporatapetl.  The  city  of  Riobam- 
ba  was  at  this  height.  (Rees'1  Cyclopedia.) 

These  with  the  Rocky  Mountains,  which  are  not  so  high, 
geem  to  be  a  continuation  of  the  Andes,  and  make  the  whole 
American  chain  10,000  or  11,000  miles  long. 

/.  The  aext  chain  of  mountains  in  height  is  that  of  the  Alps 
in  Europe,  some  of  whose  peaks,  as  Mont  Blanc,  are  three 
miles  high,     (See  map  of  Europe.) 


26  GENERAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

g.  At  this  height  perpetual  snow  is  usually  found  in  the 
warmert  parts  of  the  earth,  and  at  half  this  height  in  our 
country. 

h.  The  Peak  of  Tenerifle,  on  one  of  the  Islands  of  Africa,  is 
an  example  of  the  fifth  cla-s. 

•lount  Etna,  in  Sicily,  the  Altaian  chain  in  Asia,  and  the 
Pyrenees  of  Spain,  are  of  the  sixth  class,  corresponding  in  height 
to  the  city  of  Quito,  in  South  America. 

j.  In  the  seventh  class  are  the  White  Mountains  of  New- 
Hampshire,  which  are  nearly  of  the  same  height  with  the  city 
of  .Mexico  and  the  plain  around  it. 

k.  Mount  Hecla,  in  Iceland,  the  Green  Mountains  of  Ver- 
mont, and  Ben  .xevis.  in  Scotland,  are  of  the  Hth  class. 

/.  Mt.  Vesuvius,  in  Italy,  of  the  ninth  class,  is  nearly  of  the 
same  hei?ht  with  the  Catskill  Mountains  of  New-York. 

in  The  Cheviot  Hill?  of  England,  are  of  the  tenth  class.  The 
Allegany  fountains  of  the  United  States  are  generally  of  the 
same  class,  though  in  *ome  part?  nearly  a  mile  high 

n.  Mt.  Tom  is  an  example  of  the  eleventh  class,  and  Mt.  Hoi- 
yoke  of  the  twelfth,  both  in  Massachusetts. 

o.  Mountains  are  very  useful  in  supplying  springs  and 
streams,  from  the  snow  and  vapours  which  collect  on  them  at  all 
seasons. 

p.  They  serve  also  to  moderate  the  heat,  so  that  without 
them  many  parts  of  the  earth  would  become  barren  and  burnt, 
like  the  deserts  of  Africa. 

In  describing  a  mountain,  mention  ttherc  it  it,  tell  its  class, 
and  htishl ;  and  if  a  chain  of  mountains,  mention  its  course 
and  length. 

q.  The  following  taHe  shows  the  length  of  the  principal 
chains  of  Mountains,  according  to  the  best  accounts. 

Xi  Miles. 

The  Andes,  4500  Dofrafield  Mts.    ) 

Mex  can  and  Rocky  Mts.  7000  Olonetz  Mts.        \ 
Whole  \merican  chain,  11.500  Allegany  Mts.  900 

Altaian  Mts.  5000  The  "Alps,  )  600 

Mts.  of  the  Moon,  The  Appenines,  \  to  700 

probably  2000  Carpathian  Mts.  500 

Ural  Mts.    )  .^  Green  Mts.  350 

Mt.  Atlas,   $  U  The  Pyrenees,  200 

Qufttiont. — What  are  the  loftiest  mountains  yet  dis- 
covered, or  those  of  the  1st  class :  How  high  are  they  ? 
What  are  the  neart,  »r  those  *f  the  2-.1  clas??  How  high 


.NATURAL    DIVISIONS    OF    THE    EARTH.  27 

and  long  are  these  mountains  ?  What  is  the  principal  peak  ? 
How  are  the  tops  of  these  mountains  covered  ?  What  differ- 
ence of  temperature  is  perceived  in  ascending  them  ?  What 
mountains  are  of  the  3d  cla??,  and  what  is  their  height?  What 
chain  do  they  seem  to  belong  to  ?  What  mountains  are  of  the 
4th  class,  and  how-  high  ?  At  what  height  does  perpetual  snow 
begin  ? 

What  is  an  example  of  the  5th  class,  and  what  is  the  height? 
What  of  the  6th  ?  What  of  the  7th,  and  what  city  do  you 
find  at  this  height?  What  mountains  of  the  8th,  9th  and  10th 
classes,  and  of  what  height?  What  of  the  11th  and  12th? 
Of  what  important  use  are  mountains  ?  WTiat  other  use  ?  How 
do  you  describe  a  mountain  ?  What  is  the  length  of  the  prin- 
cipal chains  of  mountains  in  the  world  ?  What  mountains  are 
you  acquainted  with,  and  what  is  their  height  and  class  ?*  Is 
any  mountain  mentioned  of  the  same  height  ?  How  much  high- 
er  are  the  Andes  ? 

VOLCANOES. 


Crater  of  the  Volcano  Vesuvius. 
48.  Volcanoes  are  burning  mountains  with  an  open- 
ing called  a  crater,  from  which  fire  or  smoke  continu- 
ally rises. 

*  The  instructor  should  direct  the  pupil  in  his  answer?,  im 
this  instance,  and  other  similar  ones  hereafter,  and  extend  the 
questrons  as  circumstances  require. 
3 


28  UK.VERAL     GEOGRAPHY. 

49.  D'iring  the  eruptions  of  volcanoes,  they  throw 
out  melterl  stones  or  fara,  which  flows  in  a  terrible 
stream  of  tire,  destroying  every  thing  in  its  way. 

Questions. — \\h\\.  are  volcanoes?  What  takes  place  dur- 
ing the  eruptions  of  volcanoes  ? 

L.     (For  the  Review) 

a.  Sometimes  villages  and  whole  cities  have  been  buried 
in  the  ashes  and  lava  thrown  out  from  volcanoes,  as  Herco- 
laneum  and  Pompeii,  near  Vesuvius. 

b.  The  oldest  volcanoes  known,  are  Vesuvius  in  Italy, 
(who?e  crater  is  represented  in  the  cut)  and  Etna  in  Sicily. 
(See  map  of  Europe.) 

c.  There  is  a  volcano  in  the  Lipari  Islands,  called  Stromboli, 
which  blazes  continually,  and  gives  light  to  mariners  at  night. 

d.  Among  the  Andes  there  are  many  volcanoes,  and  the 
loftiest  in  the  world  are  those  of  Cotopaxi  and  Popocatapetl, 
in  America,  which  rise  three  and  a  halt  miles  above  the  level 
of  the  s<^i. 

e.  The  Peak  of  Teneriffe,  and  some  mountains  among  the 
Andes,  which  were  once  volcanoes,  hnve  ceased  to  burn. 

/  It  is  estimated  lhat  there  are  -JOO  volcanoes  in  the  world 
of  which  13  are  HI  Europe,  66  in  Asia,  and  118  in  America, 
including  the  islands  of  each  quarter. 

g.  Earthquakes  are  sudden  motions  in  some  part  of  the 
earth,  which  often  overthrow  houses  and  cities,  and  some- 
times csuse  the  ground  to  open  and  swallow  them  up. 

h.  Volcanoes  are  useful  in  giving  vent  to  the  internal  fires 
of  the  earth,  which  misht  otherwise  cause  such  earthquakes 
as  to  destroy  whole  countries. 

Questions. — What  dreadful  effects  have  sometimes  been 
produced  hy  the  ashes  and  l-.iva  of  volcanoes?  What  are 
the  oldest  volcanoes  known  ?  What  remarkable  one  is  there 
in  the  Lipari  Islands?  What  oiher  volcanoes  o:.n  you  men- 
tion, aud  what  are  the  loftiest  iu  the  world?  Are  th«ie  any 
volcanoes  which  have  ceased  to  burn?  How  many  volcanoes 
are  there? 

RIVERS. 

31.  The  vapours  which  rise  from  the  ocean  and  the 
land,  fall  again  in  dew,  rain  and  snow,  producing 
springs  and  small  streams. 

">2.  Many  small  streams  running  from  the  mountains 
unite  to  form  large  stream*,  or  rhrr*.  which  carry 


NATURAL    DIVISIONS    OF  THE  EARTH.  2& 

back  the  water  to  the  sea,  and  thus  keep  it  in  perpetu 
al  circulation. 

53.  The  place  from  which  a  river  runs  is  called  its 
source  ;  the  pkoe  where  it  empties  is  called  its  mouth  ; 
the  small  streams  which  run  into  it  are  called  branches. 

54.  Rivers,  and  their  branches,  are  represented  on 
a  map  by  small  black  lines,  smallest  at  their  source, 
which  is  generally  among  the  mountains,  or   in  the 
higher  parts  of  a  country. 

55.  Rivers  usually  overflow  their  banks  during  the 
season  of  hesvy  rain,  making  the  land  near  them  very 
fertile.     Some  countries,  like  Egypt,  which  have  no 
rain,  are  watered  only  by  their  rivers. 

56.  Rivers  are  also  useful,  in  furnishing  an  abundance 
of  fresh  water,  and  in  forming  a  highway  to  the  ocean. 

QtM*fi0n«. — What  becomes  of  the  vapour?  from  the  ocean? 
\Vhai  do  the  small  stream;  form?  V\  hat  do  you  mean  by 
the  source,  mouth,  and  branches  of  a  river  ?  Where  do  ri- 
vers usually  rise  ?  What  are  the  chief  rivers  of  Europe  ?  (See 
mop  of  the  World)  What  are  those  of  Asia?  What  of  Afri- 
ca? What  of  N.  America?  What  of  S.  America?  How  do 
rivers  fertilize  the  Earth  ?  How  else  are  they  useful  ? 
LVH.  {For  the  R'-rinr.} 

a.  The  numerous  rivers  of  the  earth  may  be  divided  into 
classes,  according  to  their  length. 

6.  1st  Class.  The  Amazou,  of  South  America,  is  the  first 
river  in  the  world  considering  its  length  and  great  size.  It  is 
more  than  4,000  miles  long,  1 80  miles  wide  at  its  mouth,  and 
is  navigable  3,000  miles  for  large  ship?. 

c.  The  Mississippi,*  of  the  United  States,  is  an  example 
of  the  first  class  of  rivers,  but  is  only  navigable  900  miles  for 
ships. 

rf.  2d  Class.  The  Nile  of  Africa,  and  the  Arkansaw,  of  the 
United  States,  are  from  2,000  to  3,000  miles  loiig,  and  are  ex- 
amples of  the  second 'class. 

t.  The  La  Plata  of  Paraguay,  is  of  this  class.  It  is  150 
miles  broad  at  its  mouth,  and  is  navigable  1,000  miles  for 
ships. 

/.  3d  Class.  The  Orinoco,  of  South  America,  is  the  lar- 
gest of  the  kl  Class.  It  is  30  miles  wide  at  its  mouth,  and  i* 
navigable  700,  " 


30  GENERAL     GEOGRAPHY. 

g.  In  the  following;  table  will  be  found  the  length  of  each 
class  of  rivers,  with  example;. 


Class. 
L 
11. 
III. 
IV. 
V. 
VI. 
VII. 

vni. 

IX. 
X. 
XL 
Xil. 

Length.                Examples. 
3000  to  4000  miles.  Amazon.  (>.  A.) 
2000/03000    •*    Nile,  (Afr.) 
1500/02000    ••     Orinoco,^ 
1000  to  1500    "     Ohio.  (1    - 
800  to  1000    "     Tigris,  (Asia.) 
SOO/o    800    "     Potomac.  (U.  S.) 
500/0    600     "     James,  (U.S.) 
400  to    500    "•     Connecticut,  (U.  S.) 
300  to    400    "     Hudson,  (U.  S.) 
200/0    300    «     Shenandoah.  (U.  S.) 
100  to    200    «    SchuylMll.  (U.  S.) 
below  100     "•     Lebigh,  (U.  S.) 

/n  describing  a  n'rer,  /ftf  u-/i€re  i/  rises — what  count  it  runs 
— and  through  what  country — ichere  it  empties — and  what  is 
its  class  and  size. 

To  describe  the  Jftle,for  example ;  say,  the  J\'Ue  rises  in  the 
mountains  of  tht  .Voon,  runs  n^rth  through  .-ibyssinia,  Nubia, 
and  Egypt,  and  tmpties  into  the  Mediterranean  S'a,  It  is  of 
th,  second  class,  from  2000  to  3000  mile*  long.  (See  map  of 
Africa.}  Then  describe  tht  branches  on  each  side,  beginning  at 
the  mouth. 

Qutslions. — How  may  rivers  be  divided?  What  is  the 
largest  river  in  the  world?  What  is  its  length,  and  how  far  is 
it  navigable?  What  other  example  of  the  1st  class?  Whati? 
-ai  J  of  the  La  Plata  ?  What  is  the  largest  river  of  the  3d  class  "'. 
What  is  the  length  of  this  class  '•:  Give  the  length  and  an  ex- 
ample of  the  4th  class ;  of  the  5 tit,  6th,  7th,  ^th,  'Jth,  1  Oth,  1 1  th, 
12th.  How  do  you  describe  a  river?  How  do  you  describe 
the  Nile?  Amazon?  Describe  the  Elbe  in  Europe;  The 
Ebro ;  The  Rhone.  W_hat  river  are  you  acquainted  with, 
and  what  is  its  length  and  c:  I 

FALLS  OR  CATARACTS. 

58.  The  navigation  of  rivers  is  often  interrupted  by 
rapids  and  falls,  which  are  sometimes  remarkable  for 
beauty  or  sublimity. 

59.  The  Falls  of  Niagara  have  been  considered  the 
grandest  in  the  world,  being  one  hundred  anil  fifty  feet 
high,  and  three  quarters  of  a  mile  acu 


NATURAL    DIVISIONS    OF    THE    EARTH.  3"! 

Questions. — How  is  the  navigation  of  rivers  interrupted  ? 
What  are  probably  the  most  remarkable  falls  in  the  world  ? 
LX.    (For  the  Review.') 

a>  The  cataracts  ot  the  Nile  in  Nubia,  and  of  the  Rhine 
in  Switzerland,  are  also  very  grand. 

6.  The  river  Funza,  near  Santa  Fe  de  Bogota  in  South 
America,  falls  six  hundred  feet  into  a  dreadful  chasm  ;  but 
the  stream  is  small. 

c.  There  are  many  interesting  falls  in  the  rivers  of  the 
United  States,  of  which  the  most  celebrated  are  those  of  the 
Passaick,  a  small  river  at  Patterson,  in  New  Jersey. 

Questions. — Are  there  any  cataracts  in  the  Nile  and  the 
Rhine?  What  can  you  say  of  the  falls  of  the  Funza?  What 
falls  iu  the  United  States,  besides  those  of  Niagara  ? 

LAKES. 
6 1 .  Lakes  are  large  bodies  of  wuter,surroundedby  hind. 

62.  The  largest  hikes  in  the  world  are  found  in 
North  America.  Lake  Superior,  the  largest  of  these, 
is  400  miles  long,  and  60  broad. 

Questions. —  What  are  lakes?  Where  are  the  largest  in 
the  world  ?  Which  is  the  largest  of  these  ? 

LXIII.     (For  the  Recitic.) 

a.  The  other  large  lakes  of  North  America  ane  from  200 
to  300  miles  long,  50  or  60  broad. 

b.  The  Lakes  of  Onega  and  Ladoga,  the  largest  in  Europe, 
are  only  150  miles  long,  and  from  30  to  75  broad. 

c.  Lakes  Wennen  and  Wetter  in  Sweden,  are  only  70  or 
80  miles  long.     They  are  about  as  large  as  the  Lake  of  the 
Woods  in  North  America.     The  lakes  of  Constaiice  and  Ge- 
neva, in  Switzerland,  are  about  40  miles  long. 

d.  Rivers  sometimes  pass  through  lakes,    as    the   Rhine 
through  Lake  Constance,  and  the  Rhone  through  the  Lake 
of  Geneva. 

e.  The  Caspian  Sea  is  a  salt  lake,  650  miles  long,  and  260 
broad,  which  receives  many  large  rivers,  but  has  no  outlet. 
The  Sea  of  Aral,  and  I>ake  Baikal  in  Asia,  are  about  the  t;ze 
of  our  large  lakes.     (See  map  of  Asia.} 

Questions. — What  is  the  size  of  the  largest  lakes  of  Ame- 
rica? Of  Europe?  What  is  the  size  of  Lakes  Wenuer  and 
Wetter  ?  What  of  Constance  and  Geneva  ?  Do  rivers  ever 
run  through  lak^s ?  How  large  is  the  Caspian  Sea  ?  What 
is  the  size  of  Aral  and  Baikal  ? 
3  * 


32  CLASSIFICATION  OF  CITIES. 

CLASSIFICATION  OF  CITIES. 

64.  The  numerous  cities  found  upon  the  globe  may 
Ue  divided  into  1 2  classes,  according  to  their  population. 

65.  Those  of  the  first  six  classes  contain  from  one 
million,  to  100,000  people. 

Those  of  the  last  six  classes  contain  from  100,000 
to  10,000. 

66.  Towns  which  contain  more  than  5000  people 
are  called  large  to&ns  ;  those  which  contain  less  than 
5000,  small  towns* 

Questions.  —  How  may  cities  be  divided?  What  is  the 
population  of  the  first  six  classes  ?  What  of  the  last  six  ? 
What  is  the  population  of  large  and  small  town?  • 

LXVII.     (For  the  Rtritu-') 

a.  Those    cities    which   contain    a  million  of  inhab 
or  more,  may  be  ranked  in  the  nr«t  cla--. 

The  chief  cities  of  this  cla5=,  are  Pekin  aj.d  Nankin,  in 
China,  which  are  said  to  contain  two  or  three  milli 

London  is  the  only  city  of  this  class,  betides  those  of 
China  and  Japan,  containing  as  many  people  as  the  state  of 
Pennsylvania. 

b.  Paris,  Constantinople  and  Calcutta,  are  the  chief  cities  of 
the  second  class,  containing  500,00d  or  000,000  inhabitants,  a 
number  equal  to  that  of  the  state  of  Massachusetts. 

c.  Naples  and  Petersburg  are  examples  of  the  third  • 
containing  about  300,000  inhabitants  each,   or  more  than  the 
state  of  Connecticut. 

d.  Vienna  is  of  the  fourth  class,  containing  as  many  people 
as  the  state  of  Vermont. 


*  In  the  maps  belonging  to  this  work,  cities,  rivers   and 
mountains    are    numbered   according    to  their  classes,    and 
from  these  numbers  their  comparative  size  may  be  learned. 
Cities   are  represented  by  a  circle  containing  a  figure  to  de- 
note their  class.     Large   towns    and  small  towns  are  indicat- 
small    circles,    as  explained    on  the  map.     A  square 
•  >  a   capita!   city,  or  seat   of  government.     An  a- 
>nnected  with  a  town,  denote:  that  it  contains  a  college 
or  university. 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  CITIES. 


33 


e.  Berlin  is  of  the  fifth  class,  containing  more  than 
150,000  people,  or  twice  the  number  in  the  state  of  Rhode- 
Island. 

/.  The  cities  of  the  sixth  class  contain  more  people  than 
Rhode-Island,  and  those  of  the  seventh,  about  the  same  num- 
ber as  that  state. 

g.  In  the  following  table  will  be  found  the  population  of 
each  class  of  cities,  with  examples.  The  same  classes  are  used 
for  the  population  of  islands  ulsu. 


Class.            Population. 

Example. 

I.       1,000,000  and  above, 

London.     (Eur.) 

II.         500,000  to  1,000,000 

Paris.     (Eur.) 

III.         300,000  to    500,000 

Naples.     (Eur.) 

IV.         200,000  to    300,000 

Amsterdam.     (Eur.) 

V.          150,000  to    200,000 

Berlin.     (Eur.) 

VI.          100,000  to     150,000 

(  Philadelphia  &   New- 
}              York.     (U.  S.) 

VII.           70,000  to      80,000 
Mil.           50,000  to      70,000 

Bourdeaux.     (Eur.) 
Baltimore.     (U.  S.) 

IX.           40,000  to      50,000 

Boston.     (U.  S.) 

X.            30,000  to      40,000 

Aberdeen.     (Eur.) 

XI.           i>0,000  to      30,000 

Charleston.     (U.  £.) 

XII.            10,000  to      20,000 

Providence.     (U.  S.) 

LARUE  TOWNS,    above      5000 

Hartford.     (U.  S.) 

SMALL  TOWNS,     under      5000 

In  describing  a  city,  tell  in  what  country  it  is — vn  what 
sea,  lake  or  river,  or  whether  it  is  inland — what  is  its 
'ia*s  and  what  its  comparative  population,  as  mentioned  in  the 
table.  ' 

Questions. — /.  What  i- the  population  of  the  1st  class  of 
cities?  What  are  the  chief  cities  in  this  class?  What  can  you 
say  of'  London  ?  What  are  the  chief  cities  of  the  2d  class 
and  their  population?  What  account  can  you  give  of  the  3d 
fl;i^?  of  the  4th?  of  the  5th  ?  of  the  6th  and  7th  ?  What  is 
the  population  of  large  and  small  towns  ?  Repeat  the  popula- 
tion of  each  class,  with  an  example  from  the  table.  What 
is  the  population  of  the  place  in  which  you  live,  and  what  i* 


34  GE3KK.4I.    ...EOGRAPHV. 

THE  8EA=0 


The  Earth  in  i.s  orbit. 

CC.  The  ends  of  the  ;:xi>  of  the  earth,  or  line  on 
which  it  is  supposed  to  turn,  are  called  the  \orth  and 
South  Poles.  (They  are  $hex:n  in  the  figure  at  JV.  <$•  S.} 

69.  *t  equal  distance  from  the  two  poL 
circle  is  supposed  to  be  drawn,  (at  E.  in  the  figure,) 
which  is  called  the  Equator.  It  divides  the  Earth  into 
two  equal  hemispheres,  or  half  globes  :  The  North- 
ern Hemisphere,  in  which  we  live,  and  the  Southern. 
(See  this  circle,  and  others  mentioned  hereafter ,  repre- 
sented on  the  borders  of  the  map  of  the  World.} 

The  Northern  Hemisphere  is  represented  by 
thn-e  p.ms  of  the  imp  above  the  Equator,  and  the 
Southern,  by  those  parts  below  it. 

71.  The  orbit  of  the  Earth,  or  its  path  round  the 
Sun,  in  which  the  Sun  appears  to  move,  is  called  the 
Ediptir.     The  circle  crosses  the  Equator. 

72.  The  North  Pol"  of  the  Earth  always  points  to- 

North  St-trin  the  heavens,   and  its  ax;>  is 
to  the  Ecliptic,  as  represented  in  the  figure- 


SEASONS,  CLIMATES,  &C.  35 

Hence,  as  the  Earth  moves  round  the  Sun,  the 
North  pole  is  sometimes  towards  the  Sun,  and  some- 
times turned  from  it. 

73.  The  Sun  heats  those  parts  of  the  Earth  most, 
which  are  most  directly  exposed  to  its  rays,  as  a  fire 
heats  those  things  most,  which  are  directly  before  it. 

The  countries  distant  from  these  receive  but  a 
small  portion  of  its  heat.  This  causes  a  variety  of 
seasons  in  different  portions  of  the  Earth. 

74.  During  one  half  the  year,  from  the  20tb  of 
March  to  the  23d  of  September,  the  North  Pole  is  to- 
wards the  Sun,  and  the  South  Pole  is  turned  from  it. 

Of  course  the  Sun  is  then  most  directly  over  the 
Northern  Hemisphere,  and  it  is  summer  there,  while 
it  is  winter,  in  the  Southern  Hemisphere.  (See  the 
Jigure  of  the  earth  in  its  orbit,  -where  the  place  of  our 
country  in  North  America,  is  shown  by  the  letters,  ff.  .#.) 

75.  During  the  other  half  of  the  year,  from  the  23d 
of  September  to  the  20th  of  March,  the  Southern  He- 
misphere is  towards  the  Sun,  and  it  is  summer  there, 
while  it  is  winter  va.  the  Northern  Hemisphere. 

76.  Hence  the  Northern  and  Southern  Hemispheres 
have  always  opposite  seasons. 

Questions. — What  are  the  poles?  What  circle  is  drawn 
between  them  ?  How  does  it  divide  the  earth  ?  Over  what 
countries  and  places  does  the  Equator  pass  ?  How  do  you  find 
the  hemispheres  on  the  map  ? 

What  is  the  orbit  of  the  earth  called  ?  How  does  the  North 
Pole  always  point?  What  parts  of  the  Earth  are  most 
heated  by  the  Sun  ?  What  is  the  effect  of  this  ?  VV  hich 
pole  is  towards  the  Sun  from  March  to  September  ? 
VVhit  is  the  consequence  ?  How  is  it  from  September  to 
March,  and  what  is  the  effect  of  this  ?  Are  the  seasons  the 
?ame  in  the  two  hemispheres  ?  See  the  map,  and  mention 
what  are  the  principal  countries  in  the  Northern  Hemis- 
phere or  north  of  the  Equator.  ^Vliat  season  is  it  in  South 
America  when  it  is  summer  in  North  America  ?  What  season 


GEOGRAPH\. 

i*  it  in  Europe   when  it  is  summer  in  New  Holland?     (Othtr 
questions  tike  thfst  may  be  added  by  the  instructor.) 

LATITUDE. 

77.  Latitudt  i»  distance  from  the  Equator,   and  is 
North  latitude  or  South  latitude,  according  as  it 

is  North  or  South  of  this  circle. 

78.  The  circle?   which   are   drawn  from   East  to 
round  the  globe,  are  represented  by  line*  r 

th    map,  are  called  pa.ra.Hel>  of  latitude.     (See  Map 
of  the  World.} 

79.  The  lines  driwn  from  the  top  to  the  bottom  of 
tne  map,  or  North  and   South,  are  called  meridians. 

These  lines  are  curved  on  maps,  because  they  rep- 
resent circles  on  the  Earth. 

80.  Every  circle  is  divided  into  360  degrees,  (nr-rk- 
ed  °) — every  degree  into  60  geographical  mile?,  or 
minutes,  (marked ') — and  every  minute  into  60  seconds, 
(marked  ".) 

81.  A  degree  on  a  great  circle,  such  as  the  Equator 
fo  ,i  meridian,  which  divides  the  earth  into  two  equal 
p  ;rt>,  is  about  69  English  or  common  milt-?. 

82.  Latitude  is  measured  on  the  meridian  in  de- 
grees, minutes  and  seconds,  and  marked  on  the  sides  of 
the  mnp. 

•he  Equator  the  latitude  is  nothing  :  at  the  poles 
it  is  90  degrees,  and  can  never  be  more  than  90. 

Questions. — What  is  latitude:  \Miat  are  parallels  of  lati- 
tnde?  \Vhataremeridians?  Why  are  these  lines  curved? 
How  are  great  circles  divided :  How  many  common  miles  to 
a  dejjree :  How  is  latitude  measured  and  marked :  What  is 
the  latitude  at  the  Equator  and  the  poles? 


PROBLEM, 

To  find  the  Lalitude  of  a  pi, 
83.  Trace  a  line  from  the  place  of  which  the  La 
tude  is  required  to  one  side  of  the  map,  following 


ati-  I 

a 


SEASONS,  CLIMATES,  &C.,  •  3 J 

course  of  the  parallels  of  latitude;  the  latitude  will 
then  be  found  marked  in  degrees. 

The  pupil  must  be  careful  to  follow  the  rune  of  the  parallels 
of  lulitudf,  as  directed,  p.  20,  or  tit  will  often,  mistake.  Thus 
the  latitude  of  Newfoundland  would  seem  to  be  but  40°,  while  it 
is  50°,  and  that  of  Greenland  but  50°,  although  it  is  60°. 

Questions.--  How  do  you  find  latitudes  ?  What  is  the  lati- 
tude of  Newfoundland?  Of  Cuba?  Of  Cape  Horn?  OX 
Great  Britain  ?  Of  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  ? 

The  teacher  may  increase  the  number  of  examples)  at  hcfindt 
necessary  ta  make  the  subject  understood. 

CIRCLES,  ZONES  AND  CLIMATES. 
THE  TROPICS  AND  TORRID  ZONE. 

84.  The  Sun  is  never  vertical,  (immediately  oven;- 
head,}  to  any  places  which  are  more  than  23°   28' 
North  or  South  of  the  Equator. 

85.  Two  circles  are  therefore  drawn  at  this  distance 
on  each  side  of  the  Equator,  called  tropics  ;  the  north- 
ern, the' Tropic  of  Cancer,  and  the  Southern,  the  Tra- 
pic  of  Capricorn.      ^ 

86.  The  Sun  is  vertical  to  every  place  between  the 
tropics   twice   ever^t  year,    so  that  this  part  of  the 
Earth  is  most  exposed  to  its  heat.     Hence  this  zone  or 
belt  is  the  hottest  part  of  the  Earth,  and  is  called  the 
burning  or  Turrit!  Z<ne. 

87.  The    Torrid  Zone,  generally,  has  only    two 
seasons  ;  the  wet  in  winter,  when  the  rains  are  con- 
stant, and  the  dry  in  summer,  when  rain  is  unknown. 
Some  parts,  however,  have  two  of  each,  in  a  year. 

88.  During  some  parts  of  the  year,  the  climate  is 
the  most  delightful  on  earth  :  at  other  seasons   the 
heat  is  distressing,  and  water  often  scarce. 

89.  The  Torrid  Zone  is  also  subject  to  the  roost 
violent  diseases  ;  and  to  storms  and  hurricanes,  which 
destroy  almost  every  thing  within  their  reach. 


38  GENERAL    GEOGRAPHl. 

90.  In  this  region  are  found  the  finest  fruits,  the 
most  beautiful  vegetables,  and  the  largest  and  loftiest 
trees  covered  with  perpetual  verdure. 

Its  most  remarkable  productions  are  spices,  gums, 
and  aromatic  plants  with  coffee,  tea,  the  sugar-cane, 
breid-fruit.&c. 

91.  It  produces  the  largest  and  most  beautiful,  as 
well  as  the  fiercest  and  most  dangerous  animals. 

In  this  zone  are  found  the  elephant,  the  lion,  the 
tiger,  the  bird  of  paradise,  and  the  largest  and  most 
Tenomous  serpents  and  insects. 

92.  The  natives  of  the  Torrid  Zone  are  chiefly 
black  or  dark  coloured. 

They  are  generally  indolent  and  effeminate.  They 
have  strong  passions,  but  are  seldom  distinguished  for 
enterprize  or  learning. 

Questions . — At  what  places  on  the  earth  is  the  Sun  never 
Vertical  ?  What  circles  are  drawn  to  point  them  out  ?  Over 
what  places  do  the  Tropics  of  Cancer  and  Capricorn  pass  ? 
(See  map  of  tlie  World.)  How  often  is  the  Sun  vertical  to 
places  within  the  tropics,  and  what  effect  does  this  produce  ? 
What  is  the  name  of  the  zone  within  the  tropics  ?  What  is  the 
climate  in  this  zone  ?  To  what  evils  is  it  most  subject  ?  What 
may  be  said  of  vegetables  and  tree*  in  the  Torrid  Zone  ? 
What  are  the  most  remarkable  productions ?  What  i?  observ- 
ed of  the  animals  ?  Mention  some  particularly.  What  is  the 
colour  of  the  natives  of  the  Torrid  Zone  ?  What  is  their  cha- 
racter? What  countries  in  N.  America  lie  in  the  Torrid 
Zone  ?  (See  map  )  What  islands  ?  What  countries  in  South 
America?  What  islands  in  the  Pacific  Ocean ?  What  coun- 
tries in  Africa  and  Asia  ?  Is  any  part  of  Europe  in  the  Torrid 
Zone? 

THE  POLAR  CIRCLES  AND   FRIGID  ZONES. 

9§.  On  that  day  when  the  Sun  is  vertical  (or  di- 
rectly overhead")  to  places  under  the  Tropics,  it  shines 
23°  28'  beyond  one  pole,  causing  24  hours  day  to  all 
phms  within  that  distance  from  the  pole.  (Seethe 
figure  cfthe  Earth  in  itt  orbit.) 


SEASONS,    CLIMATES,    &.C. 

At  the  same  time,  the  Sun  leaves  all  places  within 
23°  28'  of  the  other  pole,  24  hours  in  darkness. 

94.  Circles  are  therefore  drawn  23°  28'  from  each 
pole,  (or  in  latitude  66  1-2)  called  polar  circles. 

The  northern  is  called  the  Arctic  Circle,  and  the 
southern,  the  Antarctic  Circle. 

95.  The  rays  of  the  Sun  fall  most  obliquely  on  those 
parts  of  the  earth  which  lie  within  these  circles,  and 
the  nights   of  winter  are  there  from  24  hours  to  six 
months  in  length. 

96.  Hence  the  regions  within  the  polar  circles  are 
the  coldest  parts  of  the  Earth,  and  are  called  the  two 

frozen  or  Frigid  Zones. 

97.  The  Frigid  Zones  are  chiefly  covered  with  ice. 
They  have  but  two  seasons,  a  long  winter  of  extreme 
cold,  and  a  very  short  summer  of  great  heat,  without 
spring  or  autumn. 

98.  In  the  greater  part  of  these  zones  there  are  no 
fruits,  or  large  trees ;  and  few  plants  fit  for  food,  except 
some  kinds  of  moss.     None  but  the  most  hardy  ani- 
mals, as  the  bear,  rein-deer,  &c.  can  live  in  them. 

99.  The  few  inhabitants  are  dwarfish,  with  dark 
complexions,  and  little  intelligence. 

Questions. — At  the  time  when  the  Sun  is  vertical  to  the 
tropic,  what  is  the  length  of  the  day  at  the  pole  ?  What  is  the 
length  "of  the  night  at  the  same  time  at  the  opposite  pole? 
What  circles  are  drawn  in  consequence  of  these  facts?  In 
what  latitude  are  the  polar  circles  ?  By  what  names  are  they 
distinguished  ?  Over  what  places  do  the  polar  circles  pass  ? 
(See  the  map.)  How  does  the  Sun  shine  on  this  part  of  the 
Earth,  and  what  is  the  length  of  the  nights  ?  What  is  the  con- 
sequence ? 

What  is  the  state  of  the  Frigid  Zones  in  respect  to  climate  ? 
How  many  seasons  have  they,  and  what  are  they  ?  What  is 
said  of  the  trees  and  plants  of  the  Frigid  Zones?  What  ani- 
mals live  in  these  zones?  Describe  the  inhabitants.  What 
countries  lie  in  the  northern  Frigid  Zone  ?  What  in  the  sfruth- 
«rn  ?  (See  mtfp  of  the  World.) 

4 


I1"'  t.ENF.RAf.     OKOGIIAI'HV. 

THE  TEMPERATE  ZONE-. 

100.  The  two  Temperate  Zones  are  those  which  lie 
between  the  tropics  and  polar  circles,  or  between  the 
Torrid  and  the  two  Frigid  Zones. 

101.  The   Temperate   Zones  have  four   seasons, 
spring,  summer,  autumn  and  winter. 

102.  The   Temperate  Zones,   generally,  are  free 
from   the   distressing  extremes  of  heat  and  cold,  and 
enjoy  a  more  pleasant  and  healthful  climate  than  any 
other  parts  of  the  earth. 

103.  Those   parts  which  border  on  the  Torrid  and 
Frigid  Zones,  are  similar  to  those  zones  in  climate  and 
productions. 

104.  The  warmest  parts  of  these  zones  produce 
wheat,  rice   and  the  finer  grains,  with  cotton,  vine?, 
olives,  oranges,  figs  and  many  other  fine  fruits,  and 
aromatic  plants. 

105.  The  colder  parts  produce  apples,  pears,  nuts 
and  similar  fruits,  with  wheat,  vegetables   and  the 
coarser  grains,  and  fine  forest  trees. 

106.  Kardy   and  useful   animals    abound  in  these 
zones,  much  more  than  those  which  are  venomous  and 
dangerous. 

107.  The  inhabitants  of  the  Temperate  Zones  are 
generally  white,  or  have  light  complexions. 

They  have  generally  more  strength  of  body  and 
mind  than  those  of  the  Torrid  or  Frigid  Zones,  and 
have  been  more  distinguished  for  industry,  enterprise 
and  learning. 

Questions.*— What  zones  are  those  which  lie  between  the 
Torrid  and  Frigid  ?  How  many  seasons  have  the  Temperate 
Zones?  What  is  the  climate  generally  in  the  Temperate 
Zones  ?  What  is  it  on  the  borders  of  the  Torrid  and  Frigid 
Zones  f  What  are  the  productions  of  the  warmest  parts  of 
these  zones  ?  What  of  the  colder  parts  ?  What  animals  chiefly 


SEASONS,     CLIMATES,    &.C.  41 

abound  in  the  Temperate  Zones  ?  What  is  the  colour  ofjthe 
inhabitants  ?  What  is  their  character  ?  What  countries  are 
found  in  the  northern  Temperate  Zone?  (See  map  of  the 
World.)  What  parts  of  Africa,  S.  America,  and  New-Holland 
are  in  the  southern  Temperate  Zone?  What  islands  are  in  this 
zone  ? 

OBSERVATIONS  ON  CLIMATES. 

108.  From  the   account  of  zones   we  see  that  the 
parts  of  the  earth  around  the  poles  are  the  coldest,  and 
those  near  the  Equator  the  warmest. 

109.  The  cold  generally  increases  as  the  latitude, 
or  distance  from  the  Equator,  increases  ;  and  the  heat 
is  greater,  as  the  latitude  is  less. 

1 10.  Places  between  the  Equator  and  25°  of  lati- 
tude have  generally  very  hot  climates  ;  and  those  be- 
tween 25°  and  35°  have  warm  climates. 

111.  Those  countries  which  lie  between  35°  anil 
45°  have  generally  the  most  pleasant  climates  in  the 
world. 

112.  The  countries  which  lie  between  45°  and  65" 
of  latitude  have  much  more  cold  than  heat ;  and  those 
between  65°  and  90°  are  frozen  most  of  the  year. 

113.  As  we  rise  above  the  level  of  the  sea  the  cold 
increases  :  so  that  at  the  height  of  3  miles,  snow  and 
ice  never  melt,  even  under  the  Equator.     In  45°  of 
latitude,  perpetual  snow  begins  at  the  height  of  a  mile 
and  a  half. 

Hence  the  high  and  mountainous  parts  of  the  earth 
are  always  cool,  even  in  hot  regions. 

114.  The  heat  or  cold  of  the  sea  is  never  so  great 
as  that  of  the  land. 

Hence  islands,  and  most  countries  near  the  sea,  are 
cooler  in  summer,  and  warmer  in  winter,  than  places 
inland,  in  the  same  latitude. 


•:RAL  GEOGRAPHY. 

115.  Countries  covered  with  woods  or  forests  are 
usually  much  cooler  in  summer,  than  those  which  are 
open  and  cultivated. 

Questions. — /.  What  parts  of  the  earth  are  coldest,  and  what 
are  warmest?  How  is  the  heat  and  cold  proportioned  to  the 
latitude  ?  What  is  generally  the  climate  of  places  between  the 
Equator  and  25  degrees  of  latitude,  and  what  between  23  and 
Jo  degrees  ?  How  between  35  and  45  degrees  ?  What  are 
the  climates  between  45°  and  65°,  and  what  between  65  D  and 
90°  ?  What  change  is  there  in  rising  above  the  level  of  the  sea, 
and  at  what  heights  do  we  find  perpetual  snow  f  What  follows 
from  these  facts  :  What  is  the  general  temperati.re  of  the  sea, 
compared  with  that  of  the  land?  What  is  that  of  islands  and 
places  near  the  sea  f  What  effect  have  woods  and  forests  on 
climates? 

Leave  questions  marked  (//.)  for  Review. 

II.  What  are  some  of  the  coldest  places  ami  countries  on  the 
Earth .'  (See  map  of  the  world.)  What  are  some  of  the  warm- 
est? What  countries  have  the  most  pleasant  climate?  Observe 
the  map  of  Europe,  and  consider  which  is  probably  the  cv.lu.rt, 
France  or  Switzerland.  Which  is  probably  the  warmest, 
England  or  Poland  ? 

CXVI.  WIND?.  (For  the  Review.) 

a.  Wind  is  air  put  in  motion,  and  is  caused  by  the  different 
degrees  of  heat  in  various  parts  of  the  earth. 

The  air  always  rises  when  it  is  heated  ;  and  the  air  from  the 
colder  parts  rushes  in  to  supply  its  place. 

b.  la  islands,  and  places  near  the  sea,  in  warm  climates, 
there  is  usually  a  wind  from  the  land  in  the  morning,  and  from 
the  sea  in  the  afternoon,  called  land  and  tea  breezes. 

c.  In  the  Torrid  Zone,  as  the  parts  under  the  sun  are  hottest, 
and  as  the  earth  turns  from  West  to  East,  the  air  moves  in  an 
opposite  direction  following  the  sun.     This  forms  continual 
winds,  from  the  East,  called  trade  winds. 

North  and  South  of  the  Equator  the  trade  winds  become 
N.  E.  and  S.  E. 

d.  In  the   Indian  Ocean   there  are  winds  called  monsoons, 
which  blow  half  the  year  N.  E.  and  the  other  half  S.  W. 

e.  Hurricanes  are  violent  storms,  generally  occurring  in  hot 
countries,  in  which  the  wind  changes  in  a  short  time  to  every 
point  of  the  compass,  destroying  almost  every  thin?  within  its 
reach. 


SEASONS^    CLIMATES,   &C.  43 

In  a  gentle  breeze  the  air  moves  from  5  to  10  miles  an  hour ; 
in  a  storm  60  miles ;  and  in  a  hurricane,  100. 

/.  Whirlwinds  are  formed  by-opposite  winds  meeting  and 
moving  swiftly  in  a  circle,  raising  sand  and  light  bodies  into 
the  air. 

In  the  deserts  of  Africa,  they  sometimes  draw  up  the  sand 
into  a  moving  pillar,  which  buries  all  in  its  way. 

When  whirlwinds  appear  on  the  ocean,  they  draw  up  the 
water,  and  produce  water-spouts. 

g.  In  the  deserts  of  Africa  -and  Arabia,  a  hot  wind  prevails, 
called  the  samitl  or  simoom,  which  is  said  sometimes  to  pro- 
duce instant  death.  It  can  be  avoided  only  by  falling  prostrate 
on  the  ground. 

h.  In  the  southern  countries  of  Europe,  a  warm  wind  blows 
from  Africa,  called  the  sirocco,  which  produces  great  uneasi- 
ness and  weakness. 

Questions. — What  is  wind?  How  is  it  produced?  What 
are  land  and  sea  breezes  ?  Where  do  the  trade  winds  blow, 
and  how  are  they  produced  ?  What  are  the  monsoons  ?  What 
are  hurricanes?  How  fast  does  the  wind  move?  What  are 
whirlwinds  ?  What  do  whirlwinds  cause  in  the  deserts  ?  What 
in  the  sen  ?  What  is  the  samiel  or  simoom,  and  how  is  it  to  be 
avoided  ?  What  is  the  sirocco  ? 

CXVII.  TIDES.  (For  the  Review.1) 

a.  As  the  moon  moves  round  the  earth,  the  waters  of  the 
ocean  or  of  seas,  immediately  under  the  moon,  are  raised 
above  the  common  level,  by  its  attraction.  This  is  called  a 
tide. 

The  tide  rises  and  falls  twice  every  day, 

Jls  the  moon  rises  the  tide  begins ;  when  it  is  on  the  meridian 
the  tide  is  high,  and  gradually  sinks  until  the  moon  sets,  when  it 
is  low  tide.  The  tide  is  high  again,  when  the  moon  is  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  Earth,  and  low  when  it  rises ;  thus  rising 
and  falling  regularly  every  six  hours.  The  time  is  often  chang- 
ed by  the  situation  of  places,  currents,  &c. 

In  inland  seas,  as  in  the  Mediterranean,  there  are  no  sensi- 
ble tides. 

Questions. — What  is  caused  by  the  attraction  of  the  moon  on 
the  ocean  and  sea  ?  How  often  does  the  tide  rise  and  fall  ?   Are 
there  any  tides  in  inland  seas  ? 
4* 


F.RAL    GEOGRAPHT. 

CXVIII.     DAYS  AND  NIGHTS.     (For  Ou  Rt 

a.  As  the  Earth  turns  on  its  axis  in  twenty-four  hours,  all 
parts  of  the  Earth  hare  alternately  day  and  night,  but  not  of 
equal  length. 

b.  At  places  under  the  Equator,  the  days  are  always  equal, 
or  twelve  hours  each,  and  the  Sun  rises  and  seta  at  6  o'clock 
the  whole  year  round. 

c.  On  the  20th  of  March  and  the  23d  of  September,  when 
the  sun  is  directly  over  the  Equator,  it  enlightens  half  of  each 
hemisphere,  and  the  days  and  nights  are  equal  in  all  parts  of 
the  world.     These  periods  are,  therefore,   called  equvwzes. 
(See  thefigurt,  p.  34.) 

d.  From  the  20th  of  March  to  the  23d  of  September,  or  in 
our  summer,  the  Sun  shines  continually  as  far  as  the  North 
Pole,  causing  six  months  day  at  that  pole,  and  leaves  the  South 
Pole  six  months  in  darkness. 

At  the  same  time  it  enlightens  more  than  half  the  Northern 
Hemisphere,  and  less  than  half  the  Southern. 

e.  In  consequence  of  this,  every  place  in  the  Northern  Hem- 
isphere is  more  than  twelve  hours  in  the  light,  during  our  sum- 
mer ;  and  every  place  in  the  Southern  Hemisphere,  less  than 
twelve  hours. 

'~.  From  September  to  March,  or  in  our  winter,  the  North 
Pole  has  continual  night,  and  the  South  Pole  continual  day. 
At  the  same  time  the  Southern  Hemisphere  has  days  of  more 
than  twelve  hours,  while  our  days  are  less. 

It  is  in  this  way  that  the  long  days  of  summer,  and  the  short 
days  of  winter  are  caused. 

:.  From  the  Equator  to  the  polar  circles,  the  days  increase 
as  (he  latitude  increases.  At  those  circles,  the  longest  day  is 
•24  hours,  the  longest  night  the  same. 

h.  From  the  polar  circles  to  the  poles,  the  days  lengthen  in  to 
weeks  and  months,  so  that  at  the  poles  there  k  but  one  day 
and  one  night  in  the  year.  In  latitude  67°,  the  longest  day  is 
one  month  ;  in  70°,  two  months ;  in  80°,  four  months,  and  at 
the  poles  six  months. 

Questions. — Have  all  parts  of  the  Earth  equal  days  and 
nights ?  What  is  the  length  of  the  days  at  the  Equator?  Are 
they  ever  equal  in  other  parts  of  the  Earth  ?  What  are  these 
periods  called?  On  which  pole  does  the  Sun  shine  in 
summer  ?  What  effect  has  this  on  the  length  of  days  ?  Which 
pole  is  enlightened  in  oar  winter?  What  is  the  length  of  the 
day  then,  in  each  hemisphere  ?  What  is  the  length  of  days 
'.he  equator  to  the  polar  circle. .-  What  is  it  at  the  po- 


SEASON'S,  CLIMATES,    &C=  45 

lar  circles  ?  From  the  polar  circles  to  the  poles  ?  In  what 
places  are  the  longest  days  four  months,  in  what  two,  and  in 
what  one  month  ? 

PROBLEM. 
To  find  the  length  of  the  longest  day  in  any  place. 

On  the  Chart  of  the  World  look  at  the  latitude  of  the 
place  on  the  left  hand  side  of  the  map,  and  in  the  column  of 
the  longest  days,  the  nearest  figures  will  show  you  nearly  the 
length  of  the  longest  day  or  night.  Subtract  this  from  24  hours, 
and  you  have  the  length  of  the  shortest  day  or  night. 

Questions. — How  do  you  find  the  length  of  the  longest  day 
in  any  place  ?  What  is  the  longest  day  at  the  North  Cape  ? 
In  Gibraltar  ?  At  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  ?  At  Cape  Horn  ? 
In  Mexico?  What  is  the  length  of  the  longest  night  in  Washing- 
ton ?  In  Canada  ?  In  Greenland  ? 

CXIX.  (For  the  Review.) 

LONGITUDE  AND  DIFFERENCE  OF  TIME. 

«.  If  a  line  be  drawn  North  and  South  through  any  place 
on  the  Globe,  the  Sun  will  be  always  over  that  line  at  noon 
or  mid-day. 

Such  a  line  is  therefore  called  a  meridian,  or  noon-line. 

b.  If  this  line  be  extended  to  the  poles,  all  places   under  it 
(that  is  all  places  exactly  north  and  south  of  each  other)  will 
have  noon  at  the  same  moment. 

If  this  line  be  carried  round  the  earth  on  the  opposite  side, 
it  will  pass  through  the  places  which  have  midnight  at  that 
time. 

c.  As  the  earth  turns  from  West  to  East,  the  Sun  appears  to 
move  round  it  from  East  to  West. 

d.  Therefore,  if  a  number  of  meridians  be  drawn  on  the 
Earth,  the  Sun   will  first  pass   over  those  nearest  to  it,  or 
most    eastern,    and    afterward    over    those   which  are  more 
western. 

Thus  it  is  noon  in  Europe,  after  it  is  noon  in  Jlsia,  and  before 
it  is  noon  in  America. 

Of  course  when  it  is  noon  in  Europe,  it  is  afternoon  in  Asia, 
and  forenoon  in  America. 

To  illustrate  this,  let  the  pupil  place  his  finger,  to  represent 
the  Sun,  over  the  map  of  the  World,  and  draw  the  map  from 
West  to  East  as  the  Earth  moves.  He  will  then  see  that  the 
Sun  will  first  pass  over  places  to  the  eastward,  as  Asia,  and 
afterward  over  those  at  the  West,  as  Europe  and  .America. 


40  GENERAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

*e.  Only  a  few  meridians  are  drawn  upon  maps  ;  but  every 
place  on  the  earth,  however  small,  has  its  own  mer- 
idian. 

/.  Distance  East  or  West,  frojn  any  Meridian,  has  been  called 
longitude,  because  the  ancients  supposed  the  Earth  to  be  longest 
from  East  to  West. 

g.  Longitude  is  generally  reckoned  from  the  meridian  of 
Greenwich,  or  London,  and  is  counted  180°,  or  half  round  the 
globe  each  way. 

Of  course  the  longitude  of  a  place  cannot  be  more  than  180 
degrees. 

h.  All  places  in  the  same  longitude,  are  under  the  same  mer-. 
idian,  and  therefore  have  noon  at  the  same  time. 

When  it  is  noon  at  any  place,  it  is  midnight  at  all  places 
ISO0  from  its  meridian,  because  they  are  under  the  opposite 
meridian. 

t.  As  the  sun  appears  to  move  round  the  earth,  or  360  degree* 
in  twenty-four  hours,  every  15  degrees  East  or  West  will  make 
one  hour's  difference  in  the  time  of  places. 

j.  Longitude  is  marked  in  maps  on  the  Equator,  or  at  the  top 
and  bottom  of  the  map. 

TTie  meridians,  as  well  as  parallels  of  latitude,  are  generally 
drawn  for  every  10  degrees.  Sometimes  they  are  drawn  for  every 
15  degrees,  for  convenience  in  finding  th*  difference  of  time,  as 
on  the  Chart. 

k.  The  degrees  *of  longitude  at  the  Equator  are  69  miles 
each,  but  they  grow  less  as  you  go  towards  the  poles,  where 
the  meridians  all  meet.  (See  map  of  the  world.) 

Questions, — How  must  a  line  be  drawn  so  that  the  sun  will 
be  over  it  at  noon  ?  What  is  such  a  line  called  ?  If  this  line  be 
extended  to  the  poles,  when  will  it  be  noon  to  those  places  un- 
der it.'  If  it  be  carried  round  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  globe, 
what  time  will  it  be  to  places  under  it  there  ? 

How  does  the  Sun  appear  to  move  ?  What  follows  from 
this?  What  time  is  it  noon  in  Europe,  compared  with  other 
parts  of  the  world  ?  What  time  is  it  in  other  parts  of  the 
world  when  it  is  noon  in  Europe  ?  What  is  distance  E.  or  W. 
called,  and  why?  How  is  longitude  measured?  How  many 
degrees  can  it  be  ?  In  what  places  do  they  have  noon  at  the 
same  time  ?  When  it  is  noon  at  any  given  place,  how  many 
degrees  from  that  place  is  it  midnight  ?  How  many  degrees  of 
longitude  make  one  hour's  difference  in  time  ?  Where  is  it 
marked  on  the  map  ?  How  many  miles  in  a  degree  of  longi- 
tude? 


RACES  OF  MEN.  47 

PROBLEMS. 

I.  To  find  the  longitude  of  a  place. 

Look  to  the  top  or  bottom  of  the  map,  or  on  the  Equator, 
and  find  the  degree  opposite  the  given  place,  taking  care  to 
follow  the  course  of  the  meridians. 

Questions. — What  is  the  longitude  from  London,  of  Phila- 
delphia ?  What  is  that  of  Mexico  from  the  same  place  ?  Of  the 
Sandwich  Islands  ?  Of  China  ? 

II.  To  find  the  difference  of  time  brtween  any  two  places. 

On  the  Chart  of  the  World,  (where  the  meridians  are 
drawn  every  15  degrees,)  count  the  number  of  meridians  from 
one  place  to  the  other,  and  you  will  have  the  number  of  hours 
difference  in  their  time. 

If  the  place  is  East  of  the  place  given,  the  time  of  that  place 
is  so  many  hours  earlier  than  that  of  the  place  given  ;  If  West, 
so  many  hour-  later  than  that  of  the  place  given. 

Questions. — What  is  the  difference  of  time  between  Phila- 
delphia and  Mexico  '"  What  between  Philadelphia  and  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  and  China?  What  is  the  difference  of  time 
between  London  and  Philadelphia?  What  between  London 
and  China  ?  What  between  London  and  Egypt  ? 
RACES  OF  MEN. 

120.  There  are  five  races   of  men  on  the  earth, 
distinguished  from  each  other  by  their  features  and 
colour. 

121.  1st.  The  European  race,  with  features  like 
ours  ;  which  includes  Europeans  and  their  descend- 
ants, with  the  Moors  of  Africa,  and   the  people  of 
western  Asia  and  Persia. 

In  cool  climates  they  have  light  complexions  :  but 
in  the  warm  climates  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  the  south  of 
Europe,  they  are  swarthy,  or  brown. 

122.  2d.  The  Asiatic  or  Mongolian  race,  of  a  deep 
yellow,  extending  over  the   eastern   parts   of   Asia. 
They  have  straight  black  hair,  small  eyes  set  obliquely, 
and  projecting  cheek  bones. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  Frigid  Zone  are  like  the 
Mongolians,  except  that  they  are  dwarfish. 


48  uEXERAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

123.  3d.  The   American  or   Indian  race,  who  are 
chiefly  found  in    America,  of  a  copper  colour,  with 
straight  black  hair,  and  high  cheek  bones. 

124.  4th.  The  Malay    race,  found  in  Malacca  and 
some  of  the    Asiatic  Islands,  of  a  deep  brown  colour, 
with  black  curled  hair,  and  broad  mouths  and  noses, 
but  otherwise  with  regular  forms  nnd  features. 

125.  5th.   The  African,   or   black  race,  with  flat 
noses,  woolly    hair,  and  thick  lips,  who   are  found 
chiefly  in  Africa  and  Australasia. 

*126.  The  scriptures  inform  us,  that  all  these  races 
are  brethren  of  the  same  family  ;  the  children  of  the 
same  first  parents. 

*  1 27.    The  great  difference  between  them  has  been 
in  part  produced  by  the  difference  of  climate,  food, 
dress,  and  modes  of  living  ;  and  in  part  by  other  cau-  . 
«es  which  we  do  not  fully  understand. 

Questions. — How  many  races  of  men  are  there  ?  What  is  j 
the  first  race  mentioned,  and  who  belong  to  it  ?  What  is  their  I 
complexion?    What  is  the  second  race?  What  are  the  pecu-  , 
liar   features  of  the  Mongolian  race  ?  What  are  the  people  of  I 
the   Frigid  Zone?:  Where   is  the  Indian  race  found,  and  what  < 
are   their   peculiarities?  Describe  the  Malay  race.     What  is  I 
the  fifth  race  ?  To  which  race  do  we  belong  ?  Are  these  races 
from  the  same  first  parents :  What  has  produced  the  differ- 
ence ? 

CIVILIZATION. 

128.  Men  are  found  in  five  different  states  of  socie- 
ty ;  the  savage,  barbarous,  half-civilized,  civilized,  and 
enlightened. 

-9.  The  state  of  society  depends  on  the  know- 
ledge of  the  people,  their  skill  in  the  mechanic  arts, 
such  as  building  weaving,  working  in  iron,  &c.  and 
their  manners  arm  customs. 

130.    1st.    The  savnge   state   is  that  in  which  : 
gain  their  support  chiefly  by  hunting,  fishing,  or  robbe- 
ry; dress  in   skins,  and  generally   live  in  the 


b  TAXES     OF    SOCIETY.  49 

air,  or  in  miserable  huts.  (See  the  engravings  for  the 
NORTH  WESTERN  TERRITORY,  SIBERIA,  AUSTRALASIA.) 
They  have  little  knowledge  of  agriculture  or  the 
mechanic  arts,  and  no  division  of  lands,  or  system  of 
laws.  They  seldom  collect  in  towns  or  villages. 

131.  2d.    The   barbarous  state  is  that  in  which  na- 
tions subsist  by  agriculture,  or  the  pasturage  of  cattle 
and  sheep,  with  some  knowledge  of  the  mechanic  arts. 
(See  the  engravings  for  CIRCASSIA,  TARTARY,  ARABIA, 
and   SOUTH  AFRICA.) 

Barbarous  nations  collect  in  villages,  and  have  some 
regular  forms  of  government  and  religion  ;  but  they 
have  no  written  language  or  books. 

Savages  and  barbarians  are  usually  cruel  and  re- 
vengeful, and  oblige  their  women  to  labour  like  slaves. 

132.  3d.  The  half  civilized  state  is  like  thr.t  of  the 
Chinese,   and  other  nations  in  the  south  of  Asia,  who 
understand  agriculture  and  many  of  the  arts  very  well, 
and   have   some  books  and  learning,  with  established 
laws  and  religion. 

Still  they  treat  their  -women  as  slaves,  and  have  many 
other  customs  like  those  of  barbarous  nations. 

133.  4th.   In  the   civilized  state,  which  is  found  in 
Poland  and  South  America,  the  sciences  and  arts  are 
well   understood,   especially  the  art  of  printing  ;  and 

females  are  treated  as  companions. 

Many  of  the  customs  of  those  civilized  nations 
which  are  not  enlightened  are  still  barbarous,  and 
most  of  the  people  remain  in  the  grossest  ignorance. 

134.  5th.  Enlightened  nations  are   those  in  which 
knowledge  is  more  general,  and  the  sciences  and  arts 
are  found  in  the  greatest  perfection,  as  in  most  of  the 
nations  of  Europe. 

The  degree  of  civilization  of  each  country  is  shown 
in  the  Chart  of  the  World  by  several  shades,  which  are 
there  explained. 


>.ENERAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

Questions. — What  are  the  different  stales  of  society  among 
men ?  What  is  the  savage  state  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the 
knowledge  and  customs  of  savages  ?  What  nations  of  the 
world  are  in  this  state  ?  (See  the  Chart.)  WThat  is  the  barba- 
rous state  ?  What  are  the  customs  of  these  nations  ?  What  na- 
tions are  barbarous?  What  is  the  general  character  of  savage 
and  barbarous  nations  ?  What  is  the  half-civilized  state  ?  What 
knowledge  have  half-civilized  nations:1  How  do  they  treat 
their  women  ?  What  countries  are  half-civilized  ? 

Describe  the  state  of  civilized  nations.  What  can  you  say  of 
their  custom?  and  information  ?  What  are  enlightened  nations  ? 
In  what  quarters  of  the  world  do  you  find  civilized  and  en- 
lightened nations  ?  What  are  those  of  each  class  in  Europe  and 
America  ? 

CXXXV.  GOVERNMENT.  (For  the  Review.) 

a.  The   first   kind   of  government  in   the  world  was  the 
patriarchal,   in  which  every  father,  or  patriarch,  governed  his 
own  family  and  servants. 

b.  Some  patriarchs  became  governors    of  many  kindred 
families,  or  a  tribe,  and  were  called  chifft. 

The  government  of  savage  and  barbarous  nations  is  usually 
that  of  patriarchs,  or  chiefs,  as  among  the  Indians. 

r.  When  particular  chiefs  become  very  powerful,  they  con- 
quer many  others,  and  become  rulers  of  large  countries.  They 
are  then  called  monarchs,  kings,  or  emperors. 

d.  dn  absolute  monarchy  is  a  government  in  which  the  will 
of  the  monarch  is  the  laic,  as  in  Turkey  and  Russia. 

e.  A  republic  if  that  government  in  which  the  people  choose 
their  own  rulers,  as  in  the  United  States. 

/.  A  limited  monarchy  combines  these  two  governments,  and 
is  that  in  which  the  people  assist  in  making  laws,  which  the 
king  is  also  obliged  to  obey,  as  in  England. 

On  th'.  Chart  of  the  World,  chiefs  are  indicated  by  stars  :  an 
absolute  monarchy  by  a  crown  :  a  republic  by  the  Roman  fasces 
nnd  the  cap  of  liberty :  and  a  limited  monarchy  by  uniting  the 
tico  last  emblems. 

Questions. — What  was  the  first  kind  of  government  ?  What 
•was  the  next  ?  What  is  done  by  some  chiefs  ?  What  are  they 
then  called  :  What  is  an  absolute  monarchy  ?  What  absolute 
monarchies  in  Europe  and  Asia  ?  What  is  a  republic  ?  What 
republic  is  there  in  Europe?  What  is  a  limited  monarchy  ? 
Mention  the  limited  monarchies  in  Europe. 


RELIGIO.V.  51 

CXXXVI.  RELIGION.  (For  the  Review.) 

U.  The  four  prevailing  religions  of  the  world  are,  the  Pa- 
gan, Mahometan,  Christian,  and  Jewish. 

b.  Pagans  are  those  who  believe  in  many  false  gods,  and  in 
different  nations  worship  the  sun,  stars,  rivers,  idols  and  even 
beasts  and  insects. 


Pagan  Idol  in  India. 

.  They  often  torture  themselves,  destroy  their  children, 
and  practise  other  cruel  and  wicked  rites  to  please  their 
gods,  and  obtain  the  forgiveness  of  their  sins.  (See  the  en- 
gravings for  HINDOOSTAN,  THIBET,  ToMKijv,  and  POLY- 
NESIA.) 

Pagan  countries  are  distinguished  on  the  Chart  of  the  World 
by  an  altar. 

d.  Mahometans  are  those  who  believe  in  Mahomet,  an  im- 
postor in  Arabia,  who  lived  600  years  after  Christ,  and  pre- 
tended to  be  inspired. 

«.  He  commanded  all  his  followers  to  go  on  a  pilgrimage 
to  the  temple  of  Mecca,  and  to  kneel  when  they  came  near 
it. 

/.  He  forbade  idolatry  and  the  worship  of  many  gods.  But 
he  allowed  sojae  crimes,  and  promised  the  faithful  a  sensual 
paradise  h  .reader. 

Mahometan  countries  are  distinguished  on  ike  Char'  by  a 
cressent,  the  standard  of  Mahomet. 


GENERAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


Pilgrims  to  the  Temple  of  Mecca. 

g.  Christian*  are  those  who  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  as  the 
Saviour. 

h.  There  are  three  great  divisions  of  Christians — Catholic, 
Greek,  and  Protestant  Christians, each  having  peculiar  doctrines 
and  modes  of  worship. 

t.  Protestants  are  divided  into  various  sects,  of  which  the 
principal  are  Lutherans,  Episcopalians,  Presbyterians,  Congre- 
gationalists,  Baptists,  Methodist?,  and  Friends,  or  Quak- 
ers. 

j.  The  J&ct  are  a  people  Scattered  among  all  nations,  who 
believe  in  the  Old  Testament  only,  and  expect  a  Saviour  yet 
to  come. 

k.  It  is  supposed  that  there  are  more  than  700  millions  of 
people  on  the  earth.  Of  these  400  millions  are  Pagans  ;  200 
millions,  Chrbtians ;  90  or  100  millions,  Mahometans ;  and  8 
or  10  millions,  Jews. 

/.  The    savage,    barbarous,    and  half-civilized    nations 
the  world,  are  either   Pagans,  or  Mahometans.     The  Ab 
sinians   profess  to  be   Christians ;  but  their  religion  is  ve 
corrupt. 

m.  Little  settlements  have  been  formed  in  many  Pagan 
countries,  called  missionary  stations,  and  missionaries  have 
been  sent  to  civilize  and  instruct  the  people,  by  different 
sects  of  Christians.  Some  tribes  have  thus  been  led  to  em- 
brace Christianity,  and  have  learned  the  arts  of  civilization. 

Christian  rountriet  are  distinguished  on  the  Chart  of  the 
World  by  a  light  cross,  utiih  the  letter  C,  G,  or  P,  near  it. 


a  t; 

I 


DESCRIPTION     OF    COUNTRIES.  uo 

to  indicate  Catholic,  Greek,  or  Protestant  Christians.  Mis- 
ionary  stations  are  denoted  by  a  dark  cross. 

Questions. — II.  What  are  the  prevailing  religions  of  the 
world?  What  are  Pagans?  What  can  you  say  of  their 
rites  ?  What  countries  of  the  world  are  chiefly  Pagan  ? 
(See  the  Chart.)  What  are  Mahometans?  What  pilgrim- 
age did  Mahomet  require  of  his  followers  ?  What  did  he 
forbid,  and  what  did  he  promise  ?  In  what  countries  of  the 
world  are  Mahometans  chiefly  found  ?  (See  the  Chart.) 

What  are  Christians?  What  are  the  great  divisions  of 
Christians  ?  Wrhat  countries  of  America  and  Europe  are 
Catholic?  What  parts  of  Europe  have  the  Greek  religion? 
How  are  Protestants  divided  ?  What  are  the  Protestant 
countries  of  Europe  and  America  ?  What  are  Jews  ?  What 
is  supposed  to  be  the  number  in  the  world  of  each  religion  ? 
What  is  the  religion  of  the  savage,  barbarous,  and  half-civi- 
lized nations  ?  What  has  been  done  to  instruct  Pagan  nations  ? 
What  effect  has  been  produced  ? 

DESCRIPTION  OF  COUNTRIES. 
AMERICA. 

137.  America,  or  the  new  continent,  on  which  we 
live,  was  first  made  known  to  Europeans  by  Christo- 
pher Columbus,  a  native  of  Genoa,  in  1.492. 

138.  It  is  the  second  of  the  four  quarters  of  the 
globe  in  size,  but  probably  the  least  populous. 

139.  This  continent  is  distinguished   for  its  large 
rivers  and  lakes,  and  its  lofty  mountains,  in  which  it 
generally  surpasses  the  eastern  continent. 

140.  The  countries  of  America  are  much  colder 
than  those  of  Europe  and  Africa,  in  the  same  latitudes. 

Questions. — /.  When  was  America  discovered,  and  by  whom? 
In  what  direction  does  it  lie  from  the  eastern  continent  ? 
(See  the  Map.)  Between  what  oceans  on  the  N.  S.  E.  and 
W.  does  it  lie  ?  What  is  its  size  and  population  compared 
with  the  other  quarters  of  the  world?  For  what  is  it  distin- 
guished ?  How  is  its  climate  compared  with  that  of  Europe  ? 
What  are  the  two  great  divisions  of  America  ?  (See  the  map.) 
What  isthmus  connects  the  two  portions  ?  What  Islands  lie 
between  them  ? 


>4  .   DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

NORTH  AMERICA. 

141.  North  America,  including  Greenland,  extends 
from  10°  to  80°  or  85°  N.  latitude,  and  perhaps  to 
the  pole. 

142.  The  boundaries  and  geography  of  the  north- 
ern parts  are  very  imperfectly  known.     La  to  discov- 
eries render  it  probable  that  Greenland  is  separated 
from  the  continent. 

143.  Almost  every  variety  of  climate  and  produc- 
tion? is  to  be  found  in  this  extensive  country. 

144.  The  western  coast  has  a  mild  climate,  but  the 
northern  and  eastern  parts  are  much  colder  fhan  the 
same  latitude?  in  Europe. 

145.  The  northern  regions  of  North  America,  even 
as  far  south  as  latitude  50',  are  barren  and  desolate 
with  frost. 

146.  The   middle   regions   between   30°  and    50° 
have  snow  during  the  winter ;  and  the  countries  in 
the  northern  part  of  these  regions  have  severe  cold. 

147.  South  of  latitude  30°,  snow  is  unknown,  ex- 
cept in   mountainous  regions  ;  and  coffee,  the  sugar- 
cane and  other  tropical  plants,  are  found  in  abundance. 

148.  The  northern  and  western  portions  of  North 
America  are  inhabited  almost  entirely  by  Indians,  in  a 
savage  state.     They  are  visited  by  Europeans  only  to 
procure  skins  and  furs. 

149.  The  eastern  pnrts,  below  50°  of  latitude,  were 
long  since  colonized  and  peopled  from  European  na- 
tions ;  'and  few  of  the  Indians  remain. 

150.  The  United  States,  occupying  the  middle  por- 
tions of  North  America,  is  the  only  country  which  has 
yet  become  independent. 

The  northern  parts  are  under  the  government  of 
Great  Britain,  and  the  southern,  under  that  of  Spain,  j 

Questions.  I.  What  is  the  extent  of  North  America  ?  How  1 
i=  it  bounded  ?  that  is,  what  seas,  countries,  &c.  are  there  on  j 
the  North,  East,  South  and  West.  (Sec  the  Map.} 


NORTH    AMERICA.  oa 

In  bounding  countries,  let  the  pupil  always  proceed  in  the 
same  order,  beginning  at  the  North,  and  going  on  to  the  East, 
outh,  and  West. 

Are  the  northern  parts  well  known  ?  What  can  you  say 
generally  of  the  climate  ?  What  is  the  climate  of  the  wes- 
tern, and  what  of  the  other  parts?  What  lakes  does  it  con- 
tain, and  how  do  they  compare  with  those  of  other  parts  of 
the  world?  (See  page  31,  §62.)  What  is  the  most  north- 
ern country '.  What  territory  lies  next  south  of  the  Arctic 
Circle?  Describe  the  northern  regions  of  North  America. 
What  can  you  say  of  the  middle  regions?  What  country  is 
in  the'  middle  regions  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  southern 
parts  ?  What  Spanish  provinces  in  the  south,  and  what  por- 
tions of  the  United  States?  What  islands  lie  in  this  latitude? 
By  whom  are  the  northern  and  western  parts  inhabited  ?  By 
whom  were  the  eastern  parts  peopled  ?  What  part  of  N< 
America  is  independent  ? 

Questions  on  the  Chart  of  the  World. 

Civilisation. — /.  What  parts  of  North  America  are  civil- 
ized ?  What  are  enlightened  ?  What  parts  are  still  in  the 
savage  stal  e  ? 

(Questions  marked  (II.')  to  be  left  for  the  Review.) 

Government. — //.  What  government  do  you  find  among 
the  Indians  in  the  north  and  west?  What  is  that  of  Canada 
and  the  British  provinces  ?  What  is  that  of  the  United  States  ? 
What  of  Mexico  ? 

Religion. — //.  What  is  the  prevailing  religion  of  the 
northern  portion  ?  What  is  that  of  the  British  provinces  ?  The 
United  States-  Mexico? 

Population. — //.  What  is  the  probable  population  of  all 
North  America  ?  Who  inhabit  the  northern  portion  of  North 
America  ?  How  many  inhabitants,  and  what  are  they,  in  the 
British  Provinces  ?  Describe  the  population  of  the  U.  States. 
What  is  the  population  of  Mexico,  and  of  whom  is  it  composed  ? 
Questions  on  the  Map  of  North  America. 

I.  What  is  the  most  eastern  point  of  North  America  ?  What 
is  the  most  western  ?  What  isthmus  unites  it  to  South  Ameri- 
ca ?  What  straits  have  been  found  separating  the  continent 
from  Greenland  on  the  north  ?  What  on  the  east  ?  What  is 
the  southern  cape  of  Florida  ?  Between  what  latitudes  does 
North  America  lie  ? 

Gu/ys,  Bays,  and  Straits.— I.    What   Gulf  south    of  N. 
America  ?     What  two  large  bays  in  the  N.  E.  ?    What  straits 
5* 


a6  DESCRIPTION*    OF    COUNTRIES. 

on  the  northern  boundary  ?  What  straits  lead  into  Hudson's 
Bay?  What  bay  between  Nova  Scotia  and  New  Bruns- 
wick ?  Wrhere  are  Beering's  straits  ?  Wrhat  gulf  and  sounds 
on  the  western  coast? 

Mountains. — /.  What  is  the  course  of  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains ?  What  is  the  course  of  the  Allegany  ridge  ?  (See  map 
ef  the  United  States.)  What  lofty  mountains  on  the  N.  W. 
coast p 

Lakes. — /.  What  six  lakes  lie  between  the  U.  States  and 
the  British  territories  ?  Which  is  the  largest,  and  which  the 
smallest?  What  lake  is  next  to  the  Lake  of  the  Woods 
on  the  north- we?t?  What  others  beyond  this  in  the  same 
direction?  Which  is  the  most  northern?  W'hat  are  the  two 
principal  lakes  of  Mexico  and  Guatimala .  How  many  de- 
grees is  it  from  Lake  Nicaragua,  to  the  Pacific  Ocean  ?  Into- 
what  sea  does  it  empty  ? 

Hirers. — /.  What  are  the  two  principal  rivers  flowing  from, 
the  Rocky  Mountains  into  the  Pacific  Ocean  ?  What  two  riv- 
ers empty  into  the  Arctic  Ocean?  Mention  some  of  the  riv- 
ers emptying  into  Hudson's  Bay.  What  river  runs  from  the 
great  lakes  into  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ?  What  two  great 
rivers  empty  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico?  What  are  the  two- 
principal  rivers  thai  flow  into  the  Mississippi  from  the  west? 
What  large  river  from  the  enst  ? 

II.  Describe  the  branches  of  the  Columbia.  Through 
what  lakes  does  Mackenzie's  River  pass  ?  What  lakes  and 
branches  supply  Churchill  River?  What  river  runs  from 
Lake  Winnepeg  to  Hudson's  Bay?  What  river  flows  from 
Lake  St.  Joseph  into  Hudson's  Bay?  Are  there  any  rivers  or 
importance  in  New  Britain  and  Greenland?  What  is  the  size 
of  the  two  great  rivers  which  flow  into  the  gulf  of  Mexico  ? 
Where  does  the  Mississippi  rise?  Describe  its  branches. 
What  branches  has  the  Missouri, and  on  which  side  are  they? 

Boundaries  and  Capitals. — /.  How  are  the  British  terri- 
tories bounded?  Describe  the  chain  of  lakes  which  separates 
them  from  the  United  States.  What  is  the  capital  of  Lower 
Canada '  How  are  the  United  States  and  their  territory 
bounded?  Where  is  the  seat  of  general  government?  How 
far  west  do  the  U.  States  proper  extend  ?  How  is  Mexico 
bounded  ?  What  is  its  capital  ?  What  are  the  boundaries  of 
Guatimala  ?  Its  capital  ? 

Islands. — /.  What  islands  are  there  at  the  mouth  of  the 
St.  Lawrence  ?  .  What  is  the  largest  on  the  coast  of  the  Unit- 
«•'!  States?  What  island?  are  there  at  some  distance  east 




NORTH    AMERICA.  5,7 

of  the  United  States  ?  What  islands  lie  between  North  and 
South  America  ?  Which  is  the  largest  ?  What  are  the  three 
next  in  size  ? 

II.  Describe  the  inhabitants,  and  their  number,  in  Cuba— 
St.  Domingo — Porto  Rico— Jamaica — The  Caribbean  Islands. 
(See  Chart  of  the  World.)  What  name  is  given  to  the  most 
northern  group  of  Islands  ?  Mention  some  of  the  small  islands 
called  the  Caribbean,  lying  east  of  Porto  Rico.  Which  is  the 
most  southern  and  largest  of  these  ?  What  two  islands  on  the 
coast  of  South  America,  west  of  Tobago?  What  are  the 
principal  islands  on  the  western  coast  ? 

Questions  on  the  Map  of  the  United  Stales. 

L  What  ocean  bounds  the  United  States  on  the  east  ?  What 
gulf  on  the  south  ?  What  lakes  on  the  north  ?  What  bay  is 
there  on  the  coast  of  Massachusetts,  and  what  are  its  capes  ? 
What  islands  south  of  Massachusetts  and  Rhode  Island  ?  What 
island  and  sound  S.  of  Connecticut  ?  What  is  the  eastern 
point  of  Long  Island  called  ?  What  bay  lies  S.  of  Pennsylva- 
nia ?  What  are  its  capes  ?  What  bay  and  capes  S.  of  Mary- 
land ?  Which  is  the  largest?  What  states  lie  upon  each? 
What  sounds  are  there  on  the  coast  of  N.  Carolina  ?  What 
inlets  lead  into  them  ?  What  capes  on  this  coast?  What  islands 
on  the  coast  of  Georgia  and  Florida  ? 

Mountains. — 7.  What  is  the  principal  range  of  mountains  in 
the  United  States  ?  Through  what  states  do  they  pass  ?  What 
branch  passes  into  Tennessee? 

//.  What  is  the  most  eastern  ridge  called  ?  Where  do  the 
rivers  empty  which  rise  on  the  eastern  side  of  these  mountains? 
What  great  river  receives  most  of  those  on  the  western  side  ? 
What  ranges  of  mountains  are  there  in  the  north-eastern  states? 

Rivers. — /.  Where  is  the  Hudson  river?  What  are  the  six 
principal  rivers  emptying  into  the  Atlantic,  east  of  the  Hudson  ? 
Which  is  the  largest  ?  What  two  large  rivers  are  next  south  of 
the  Hudson  ?  What  rivers  empty  into  Albemarle  Sound^? 
What  into  Pamlico  Sound  ?  What  large  river  runs  into  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico  ?  What  are  the  principal  branches? 

//.  What  is  the  course  of  the  Connecticut  River,  through 
•what  states  does  it  pass,  where  does  it  empty,  and  what  is  its 
•comparative  size  ?  Describe  in  the  same  manner,  the  other  five 
principal  rivers  of  N.  England. 

The  pupil  should  be  taught  to  mention  all  these  particulars 
concerning  every  river  he  describes,  leithovt  minute  questions. 


00  DESCRIPTION    OF    COV5TRIE-. 

//.  Describe  the  Hudson  River  and  its  principal  branch. 
Describe  the  two  large  rivers  next  south  of  the  Hudson,  and 
their  branches.  What  is  the  general  course  of  the  rivers 
which  have  been  described  •.  What  is  the  general  course  of 
the  rivers  which  empty  into  the  Atlantic,  south  of  the  Sus- 
quehannah  ?  What  rivers  empty  into  Chesapeake  Bay,  and 
on  which  »ide  ?  What  considerable  branch  has  the  Potomac? 
Describe  the  river?  emptying  into  Albemarle  Sound,  and  their 
branches.  Describe  those  emptying  into  Pamlico  Sound. 
What  rivers  are  found  between  these  and  Savannah  River? 
Describe  their  source,  size,  and  branches.  Describe  the  Sa- 
vannah, and  the  rivers  S.  of  it  emptying  into  the  Atlantic. 
What  river  forms  the  southern  boundary  of  Georgia?  What  is 
the  principal  river  of  East  Florida  ? 

//.  What  river  passes  through  Florida,  into  the  gulf  of 
Mexico  ?  What  branches  form  it  ?  Mention  the  eastern  and 
western  branches  of  the  Mobile  River,  which  empties  at  the 
town  of  Mobile.  What  two  rivers  between  the  Mobile  and 
the  Mississippi  ?  What  are  the  two  principal  branches  of  the 
-ippi,  S.  of  the  Ohio?  What  two  rivers  form  the  Ohio, 
and  where  do  they  rise :  Describe  the  principal  branches  of 
the  Ohio  on  the  south  side,  beginning  at  the  mouth.  Describe 
those  on  the  north  side.  What  branches  has  the  Mississippi, 
N.  of  the  Ohio  ?  What  are  the  three  largest  western  branches 
of  the  Miniasippi  ?  What  one  N.  of  the  Missouri?  What  be- 
tween the  Missouri  and  Arkan^aw  :  Where  are  the  Osage  and 
Wachitta,  or  Ouachitta  ? 

Lak't. — //.  Where  is  Lake  Michigan,  and  with  what  lake 
Joes  it  communicate?  What  lake  between  Huron  and  Erie? 
What  river  empties  into  it  ?  What  rivers  empty  into  Lake 
Erie,  and  from  what  state  ?  What  river  and  falls  between 
Erie  and  Ontario?  What  empty  into  Lake  Ontario?  What 
states  lie  upon  these  lakes ':  What  lake  E.  of  Ontario,  and  how  < 
is  it  connected  with  the  St.  Lawre.ice  •  What  small  lake  is 
connected  with  this  ?  What  small  lake  E.  of  Champlain,  and 
what  river  passes  from  it  ?  What  lakes  in  Maine  ? 

Boundaries  and  Capitals. — /.  What  six  states  lie  east  of  the 
Hudson  River '.  What  are  their  boundaries  and  seats  of  gov- 
ernment, beginning  at  the  most  eastern  ?  What  four  states  lie 
next  to  these,  east  of  Maryland  and  Ohio?  Mention  the 
boundaries  and  capitals  of  each.  What  eight  states  lie  on 
the  Mississippi,  and  its  branches,  and  what  are  their  bounda- 
ries and  capitals :  What  six  states  lie  east  of  these,  on  the  At- 
lantic and  Golf  of  Mexico  ?  What  are  their  boundaries  and 


DANISH    AMERICA.  53- 

capitals  ?  Where  is  Florida  ?  What  three  other  territories,  near 
the  states  which  have  been  mentioned  ? 

The  following  is  a  sketch  of  some  of  the  more  difficult 
boundaries,  wiili  blanks  for  the  names  which  the  pupil  should 
fill  up  from  the  map. 

Maine  is  bounded  N.  by  -  ;  E.  by  -  ;  S. 
by  the  -  Ocean?  and  W.  by  -  .  New  Hampshire 
is  bounded  N.  by  -  :  —  ;  E.  by  -  and  the  - 
Ocean;  S.  by  -  ;  and  W  by  -  River,  which  sep- 
arates it  from  -  .  Rhode  Island  is  bounded  N.  and  E. 
by  --  ;  S.  by  -  Ocean;  and  W.  by  -  .  Del- 
aware is  bounded  N.  by  --  ;  E.  by  -  River  and 
bay,  which  separate  it  from  -  ;  S.  and  W.  by  --  . 
Maryland  is  bounded  N.  by  -  ;  E.  by  -  and  - 
Ocean  ;  S.  and  W.  by  -  River,  which  separates  it  from. 
South  Carolina  is  bounded  N.  and  N.  E.  by 


.  .     . 

S.  E.  by  -  the  Ocean  ;  and  S.  W.  by  -  River,  which 
separates  it  from  -  . 

Latitudes  and  Longitudes  in  JV.  America.  -  //.  What 
parts  of  North  America  are  between  50°  and  60°  of  north 
latitude?  What  parts  between  40°  and  50°?  What 
between  30°  and  40°?  What  is  nearly  the  latitude  of 
Quebec  and  Montreal?  Of  Washington?  Of  New-Orleans? 
Of  Mexico  ?  Of  the  West-Indies  ?  Find  the  longitude  from 
London,  of  Philadelphia,  New-Orleans  and  Mexico.  What 
is  the  difference  of  time,  between  these  places  and  London  ?  Is 
their  time  faster  or  slower?  (See  the  Chart  of  the  World,  and 
page  45.) 

DANISH   AMERICA. 
GREENLAND. 

151.  The  coast  of  Greenland  is  usually  lined  with 
immense  islands  of  ice.  The  white  bear  is  often  found 
floating  upon  them. 

152.  This  cold  desolate  region  belongs  to  the  Dane*. 
It  is  valuable  principally  on  account  of  the  fisheries 
on  the  coast. 

153.  It   is  inhabited  by  about  20,000  Esquimaux* 
Indians,    and  8,000  or  10,000  Norwegians,  with  some 
Moravian  missionaries. 


*  Pronounced  Eskerao.. 


t;l>  DESCRIPTION     OK    COCNTRIt?. 

Ice  Islands  and  the  White  Bear. 


Questions — /.  In  what  direction  is  Greenland  1'rom  the  Uni- 
ted States  ;  What  is  the  southern  cape  >  What  straits  sepa- 
rate it  from  Labrador?  What  island  and  settlement  on  the 
"western  coast  ? 

RUSSIAN  AMERICA. 

154.  The  island  of  Spitzbergen,  which  is  sometimes 
considered  as   a  part  of  America,  belongs  to  Russia. 

155.  The  Russians  also  possess  a  part  of  the  North- 
West  Coast  of  North-America,  and  hold  about  50,000 
Indians  in  subjection. 

156.  The  people  of  this  region  resemble  those  of 
Siberia,  and  probably  came  from  Asia. 

Questions. — /.  Where  is  Spitzbergen,  and  to  whom  does  it 
belong?  (See  map  of  Ike  World.)  What  is  the  most  western 
cape  of  North  America  r  What  peninsula  south  of  it? 

II.  What  sound  and  inlet  near  Alaska  ?  What  mountains 
on  the  coast,  and  of  what. height  r  Where  is  Portlock  Har- 
bour? What  parts  ot  I  Hay  and  of  Greenland  are 
nearly  in  the  same  latitude  :  What  parts  of  Europe  are  in  this 
latitude  ? 

BRITISH  AMERICA. 

157.  The  British  possessions  in  N.  America  may  be 
divided  into  three  portions  ;    the  North- West  Territo- 
ry, lying  west  of  Hudson's  Bay  ;   New-Britain,  east  of 
this  bay;  and  the  British  Provinces,  on  the  south-east. 


BRITISH     AMERICA.  (j  1 

158.  They  extend  from  the  Atlantic  Ocean  to  the 
Rocky  Mountains,  on  the  north  of  the  United  States. 

NORTH-WEST  BRITISH  TERRITORY. 

159.  The  North-West  British  Territory  is  a  frozen, 
barren,  inhospitable  region,  lying  north  of  latitude  50". 

160.  The  animals  of  this   territory  furnish   great 
quantities  of  furs,  which  are  conveyed  by  the  Indians 
and  traders   in  canoes,   «o  light,  that  they  carry  them 
from  one  stream  to  another. 


Indians  carrying  their  canoes. 

161.  It  is  inhabited  by  the  Esquimaux  Indians,  on 
the  coast,  and  the  Knisteneaux*  and  Chipewayans,  in 
the  interior,  with  only  a  few  trading  settlements  of 
whites. 

Questions. — /.  How  may  the  British  possessions  be  divided? 
How  are  they  bounded?  (See  the.  Map)  Describe  the  south- 
ern boundary.  What  bay  do  they  include  ? 

//.  What  divisions  are  made  around  Hudson's  Bay  ?  What 
large  lakes  are  there  ?  What  are  the  chief  rivers  runnin°- 
north?  What  rivers  empty  into  Hudson's  Bay?  What  ar- 
ticles of  commerce  are  furnished  by  the  N.  W.  British  Ter- 
ritory? What  fort  and  trading  houses  on  Hudson's  Bay? 
Where  is  the  most  northern,  and  where  is  the  most  western 

*  Pronounced  Nisteno. 


tjZ  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUSTRIES. 

trading  house  ?   What  can  you  say  of  this  region  ?  How  is  itf 
inhabited  ? 

NEW  BRITAIN. 

162.  New  Britain  is  colder  than  the  North-Western 
Territory.  It  is  inhabited  by  a  few  Indians,  some  of 
whom  have  been  taught  and  civilized  by  European 
missionaries. 

Question*. — /.  What  can  you  say  of  New-Britain  ?  What  in- 
dians  are  found  on  the  coast,  and  what  in  the  interior  ?  (See 
map.")  What  missionary  station  on  the  Labrador  coast?  (Two 
other*  have  been  established  in  Labrador.)  What  provinces  lie 
S.  of  it  ? 

BRITISH  PROVINCES. 

Upper  Canada — Loa-er  Canada — .Yea1  Brunswick — 
ffava.  Scotia — J\'ercfoundland — Prince  Edward. 


Falls  of  Niagara, 

163.  The  cataract  of  Niagara,  in  Upper  Canada,  is* 
probably  the  grandest  in  the  world.  The  stream  is 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide,  divided  by  an  island  in 
the  middle.  It  falls  150  feet,  and  the  roar  maybe 
heard  15  miles. 

164.  The  climate  of  Lower  Canada  is  severely  cold  ; 
that  of  Upper  Canada,  New  Brunswick  and  Nova  Sco- 
tia, is  more  mild.  All  these  are  productive  and  flour- 
ishing provinces. 

J"65.  The  French  inhabitants,  the  most  numerous  ii^ 


63 

Lower  Canada,  are  superstitious  and  ignorant  The 
British  and  Americans,  especially  in  Upper  Canada , 
have  better  characters  and  more  information. 

166.  Newfoundland,   Cape  Breton  and  Prince  Ed- 
ward are  cold,  barren  islands.     They  are  chiefly  in- 
habited  and   resorted  to,  on  account  $f  the  fisheries 
near  them,  and  the  inhabitants  are  rude  and  uneducated. 

Questions. — /.  How  are  the  British  Provinces  divided? 
How  are  they  bounded  ?  What  great  natural  curiosity  do 
they  contain  ?  Where  is  Niagara,  and  what  .lake  empties  over 
these  falls.  (See  map  of  the  United  States.')  What  is  the  climate 
of  Canada,  and  the  other  provinces  on  the  continent  ?  What 
can  you  say  of  the  people  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  provinces 
on  the  islands,  and  their  inhabitants? 

Questions  on  the  map. — II.  Which  is  the  most  eastern 
British  Province  ?  How  is  it  bounded  ?  What  is  the  chief 
settlement  ?  Where  are  Cape  Breton,  and  Prince  Edward  or 
St.  Johns?  What  settlement  in  Cape  Breten?  What  other 
islands  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ?  What  one  on  the  coast 
of  Nova  Scotia  ?  How  is  Nova  Scotia  bounded  ?  What  is  the 
capital  ?  What  other  principal  places  ?  (See*map  of  the  United 
States.')  What  cape  at  the  south?  What  are  the  bound- 
aries of  Lower  Canada  and  of  Upper  Canadaj?  What  river  di- 
vides them  in  part  ?  What  is  the  capital,  and  what  are  the 
other  principal  places  of  Lower  Canada  ?  (See  map  of  the 
United  States.)  ,What  of  Upper  Canada  ?  How  is  New  Bruns- 
wick bounded  ?  What  are  its  principal  places  ?  With  what  lakes 
does  the  St.  Laurence  communicate  ?  What  lake  lies  N.  of' 
Lake  Huron  ? 

THE  UNITED  STATES. 

167.  The  United  States  were  formerly  colonies,  or 
provinces,  of  Great-Britain. 

On  the  4th  of  July,  1776,  thfcf  were  declared  inde- 
pendent, and  a  few  years  after,  the  present  constitu- 
tion, or  system  of  government,  was  formed. 

168.  There  are  now  twenty-four  separate  states, 
united  in  one  republic,  and  four  territories,  besides 
the  great  western  territory,  or  Territory  of  Missouri. 

6 


DESCRIPTION    OF    COUXTJIIES. 

169.  The  United  States  are  usually  spoken  of  in 
four  divisions — the  Extern,  Western,  Middle,  and 
Southern  States. 

The  six  Eastern  States  are  those  east  of  the  Hudson. 

The  Western  States  are  those  which  lie  on  the 
Mississippi  and|its  branches. 

The  four  Middle  States  are  between  the  Eastern 
and  Western  States,  as  far  south  «s  Maryland. 

The   six   Southern  States  are  those  south  of  these, 
lying  on  the  Atlantic  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 
CLXX.         (For  the  Reiitic.) 

a.  The  laws  of  the   United  States  are  made  by  a  Cor 
•which  consists  of  a  House  of  Representatives,  chosen  every  two 
years  by  the  people  of  each  state  according  to  their  population; 
and  of  a  Senate  of  two  from  each  state,  chosen  for  six  years. 

b.  The   laws  are   executed  by  the  President,  who  is  chosen 
by  the  votes  of  all  the  States  every  four  years,  assisted  by  the 

iry  of  State  and  the  Secretaries  of  War,  of  the  >"avy, 
and  of  the  Treasury. 

c.  The   President  and  Senate  appoint  the  inferior  officers  of 
government,  and  those  of  the  army  and  navy. 

d.  Each  of  the  states  has  an   independent  government,  with 
distinct  laws   for   itself,   much  like   that  of  the  United  States, 
with   a  governor  at  the  head.     The  territories  are  under  the 
general  government. 

f.  On  the  eastern  continent,  especially  in  Europe,  the  laws 
make  distinctions  in  the  privilege?  of  the  people,  according  to 
their  rank  and  religion. 

f.  The   constitution  of  the  United  States  does  not  make  any 
distinctions  of  rank,  except  in  the  officers  of  government ;  and 
all  religions  are  allowed  which  do  not  disturb  the  good  order  ol 
society. 

g.  The  climate  and  s^£p  various  in  different  parts  of  the 
United  States  ;  but  almdflRl  parts  jpill  produce  in  abundance 
wheat,  rye.  Indian  cor  id  oats,  with  beans,  peas  and 

yother  vegetables,  and  excellent  fruits 

h.  The  northern  parts,  extending  from  41°  to  45°  of  north 
latitude,  have  severe  winters  and  much  snow. 

Thi»  portion  is  best  fitted  for  pasturage,  and  the  coarser 
grains,  rye.  oats  and  barley  ;  but  it  also  produces  good  wheat 
and  fine  fruits. 

t.  The  middle  regions,  betWMB  41°    and  36°  or  36J°  of 


UNITED    STATES.  65 

latitude,  have  mild  winters  and  little  snow ;  and  the  heat  of 
summer  is  longer  continued  and  more  constant  than  it  is  farther 
north. 

This  portion  of  the  United  States  abounds  in  excellent  grain 
and  fine  fruits,  and  between  40°  and  36°,  is  well  suited  for  the 
cultivation  of  tobacco. 

i.  In  the  southern  parts,  between  36°  and  30°,  the  climate 
is  warm.  Snow  is  uncommon,  and  cotton,  rice,  olives,  figs, 
pomegranates,  and  other  fruits  of  warm  climates  flourish. 

fc.  South  of  30°,  snow  is  unknown,  and  the  productions  of 
the  Torrid  Zone  are  found. 

/,  The  inhabitants  of  the  United  States  are  Europeans,  or 
their  descendants,  except  the  African  slaves,  principally  found 
in  the  Southern  States,  and  about  100,000  Indians,  chiefly  in. 
the  Western  States. 

TO.  The  value  of  goods  imported  into  the  United  Slates  from 
other  countries,  in  one  year,  may  be  estimated  at  70  millions 
of  dollars ;  and  the  exports,  most  of  which  are  produced  or 
manufactured  in  the  United  States,  are  of  about  the  same 
value. 

n.  The  value  of  articles  manufactured  in  the  United  States 
in  1810,  was  from  150  to  200  millions  of  dollars.  The  quantity 
and  excellence  of  these  articles  has  been  rapidly  increas- 
ing. 

Questions. — /.  To  whom  did  the  United  States  formerly  be- 
long ?  When  did  they  become  independent  ?  How  many  states 
and  how  many  territories  are  there  ?  What  division  is  com- 
monly made  of  the  United  States  ?  Which  are  the  Eastern 
States?  The  Western  States?  The  Middle  States?  The 
Southern  States  ? 

//.  By  whom  are  the  laws  of  the  United  States  made  ? 
By  whom  are  they  executed?  Who  appoint  the  inferior 
officers  of  government?  What  are  the  governments  of  the  par- 
ticular States  ?  What  distinctions  are  made  among  the  people 
in  Europe  ?  Do  the  laws  of  the  United  States  make  these  dis- 
tinctions ? 

//.  What  can  you  say  of  the  climate  and  productions  of 
the  United  States  ?  What  is  the  climate  between  41°  and 
15°  north  latitude  ?  What  are  the  chief  productions  ? 
What  states  are  included  in  this  region  ?  What  can  you 
say  of  the  middle  regions  ?  What  are  their  productions  ? 
What  is  the  latitude  of  Philadelphia  ? — Washington  ? — 

Lexington,  (Ken.)  ? Norfolk,  (Vir.)  ?.  What  states  lie 

north  of  the  parallel  of  42  degrees  ?  What  states  between 


tit)  DESCRIPTION    OF    COCNTRIES. 

42°  and  36i°?  What  states  between  36°  and  30°  r  What 
are  their  climate  and  productions  ?  What  states  are  bounded  on 
the  parallel  of  42°  ?  What  on  those  of  36£°  and  35°  ?  What 
is  the  latitude  of  Xewbern— of  Charleston — of  Savannah — of 
New  Orleans'  What  parts  of  the  United  States  lie  S.  of  30°? 
What  can  you  say  of  their  climate  ?  Who  are  the  inhabitants  of 
the  United  States  ?  What  is  the  value  of  the  imports  and  ex- 
ports of  the  United  States  ?  What  is  that  of  the  manufactures ' 

EASTERN  STATES,  OR  NEW  ENGLAND. 

J\Iaine — Ke^'-Hampshire — Vermont — Massachusetts — 

Connecticut — Rhode  Island. 


The  Whale  Fishery. 

171.  Commerce  and  the  Fisheries  have  hitherto 
been  the  chief  sources  of  wealth  to  New  England. 

172.  This  small  and  populous  portion  of  the  United 
States   is  colder  and  less  fertile  than  the  rest  ;  but  it 
abounds  in  good  pasturage,  corn,  and  rye,  and  pro- 
duces much  fine  fruit. 

173.  The  eastern  coast  of  New  England  is  generally 
level.    The  western  and  northern  parts  are  mountain- 
ous, and  the  interior  is  uneven  and  hilly. 

174.  The  northern  parts  are  cold,  dry  and  healthy  ; 
the  southern  parts  have  a  milder,  but  more  variable 
climate  ;  the  eastern  coast  is  exposed  to  bleak,  clamp 
winds  from  the  ocean. 

CLXXV.  (For  the  Review.) 

•n.    The   Eastern   Stated  cpntain  two   of  the  first  literary  j 


EASTERN    UNITED    STATES.  67 

institutions  in  the  United  States— Harvard  University  at 
Cambridge,  near  Boston,  (Mass.)  and  Yale  College  at  New- 
Haven,  (Con.) 

b.  There  are  six  other  colleges — at  Providence  (R.  I.)  Wil- 
liamstown,  (Mass.  N.  W.  part)  Hanover,  (N.  H.)  Middlebury 
and  Burlington,  (Ver.)  and  Brunswick,   (Me.);  and  a  colle- 
giate institution  at  Amherst,  (Mass.) 

c.  The  institutions  at  Cambridge,  New-Haven,  and  Hano- 
ver have  medical  colleges  connected  with  them. 

d.  The  Law  School  at  Litchfield,  and  the  Asylum  for  the 
Deaf  and  Dumb  at  Hartford,  (Conn.)  are  well  known. 

e.  There  are  five  institutions  for  the  education  of  clergy- 
men— at    Andover    and  Cambridge,    (Mass.)    New    Haven, 
(Conn.)  and  Bangor  and  Waterville,  (Maine.) 

/.  Almost  all  parts  of  New  England  are  furnished  with 
schools,  supported  by  law,  where  every  person  may  receive  a 
common  education,  and  with  an  unusual  proportion  of  church- 
es and  ministers. 

g.  In  consequence  of  these  institutions,  few  are  found  in 
these  states  who  cannot  read  and  write,  and  knowledge  is 
constantly  and  rapidly  spread  by  the  numerous  books  and 
newspapers  which  are  published. 

h.  The  people  are  generally  distinguished  for  industry,  en- 
terprize,  and  intelligence,  and  for  good  education  and  good 
morals.  Few,  comparatively,  suffer  from  poverty. 

i.  The  inhabitants  of  the  coast  procure  dried  fish,  whale 
oil,  and  spermaceti  from  their  fisheries ;  and  those  of  the 
interior  obtain  beef,  pork,  butter,  and  cheese  from  their  farms, 
and  lumber  and  potash  from  their  forests.  These  articles  are 
their  chief  exports. 

j.  The  people  of  New  England  are  principally  clothed  and 
supplied  from  their  own  productions  and  manufactures. 

k.  These  states  excel  any  others  of  equal  extent  in  the 
Union,  in  the  tonnage  of  their  ships  ;  and  also  in  the  value  of 
their  manufactures,  which  are  sent  to  other  states  in  lar»e 
quantities. 

Questions. — /.  From  what  has  the  wealth  of  New  England 
been  chiefly  derived  ?  How  are  the  Eastern  States  bounded  ? 
Between  what  latitudes  do  they  lie  ?  What  are  their  climate 
and  chief  productions  ?  What  is  the  face  of  the  country  ? 
Describe  the  climate  of  each  portion. 

//.  What  colleges  has  New  England?  What  medical  in- 
stitutions? What  other  institutions?  What  other 'means  of 
6* 


DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

education  and  instruction  ?    What  is  the  general  character  of 

the  people  ?     What  are  the  most  important  productions  and 

exports  of  New  England?     Whence  do  the  people  obtain  most 

of  the  supplies  they  need  ?     What  is  the  state  of  commerce 

and  manufactures  in  New  England  ?     What  is  the  chief  river 

f  New  England  ?     (See  the  map.)  Which  is  the  largest  town  ? 

what  two  are  next  in  population  ? 

MAINE. 

176.  Maine  is  the  most  recently  settled  of  the  East- 
ern States.     A  large  part  of  it  is  still  covered  with 
forests. 

The  extensive  seacoast  and  fine  harbours  of  Maine 
are  favourable  to  commerce,  and  it  is  now  the  fourth 
state  in  the  Union  in  the  quantity  of  its  shipping. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries,  rivers, 
and  capital  of  Maine  ? 

//.  What  river  separates  it  from  New  Brunswick  on  the 
east '".  What  are  the  chief  seaports  and  where  ?  What  towns 
in  the  interior  ?  Where  is  it?  college  ?  What  two  other  insti- 
tutions has  it?  (Sec  CLXXV.  b.  and  e.)  (Face  of  the  countn/, 
173—  Climate  174.*) 

NEW  HAMPSHIRE. 

177.  New  Hampshire   is  a  cold,  but  productive 
Slate,  remarkable  for  the  White  mountains,  the  highest 
in  the  United  States. 

Its  trade  is  chiefly  carried  on  through  the  seaports 
of  Massachusetts. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries,  river, 
and  capital  of  New  Hampshire.  What  mountains  has  it  ? 

//.  What  seaport  has  New  Hampshire,  and  in  what  part  ? 
Where  is  its  college  ?  What  other  towns  on  the  Connecticut 
tiver?  What  five  towns  around  the  capital,  in  different  direc- 
tions? (Productions,  172— Face,  173— Climate,  174.) 

*  The  face  of  the  country,  Climate,  and  Productions  of  each 
slate  may  usually  be  learned  from  the  description  of  the 
division  to  which  it  belongs.  To  assist  the  pupil,  these  refer- 
ences are  made  to  the  numbers  of  the  articles,  where  the 
information  is  found.  Thus  it  is  stated,  that  the  northern  part 
of  New  England  is  mountainous ;  and  as  Maine  is  in  the"  north  - 
ei2>  part,  this  description  applies  to  it. 


EASTERN    UNITED    STATES.  by 

VERMONT. 

178.  Vermont  takes  its  name  from  the  Green  Moun- 
tains, which  pass  through  it,  and  render  its  air  remark- 
ably pure  and  healthy. 

The  trade  of  Vermont  is  chiefly  with  the  neighbour- 
ing states. 

Questions  on  the  Map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries,  rivers 
and  capital  of  Vermont.  What  is  the  course  of  the  Green 
Mountains  ?  What  places  on  the  Connecticut? 

//.  In  what  towns  are  its  two  colleges,  and  where  are  they 
situated  ?  What  is  the  most  northern  town  ?  Where  is  Ben- 
ninglon?  (Face,  173— Climate,  174.) 

'     MASSACHUSETTS. 

/J  79.  Massachusetts  was  the  first  settled  state  in  New- 
England,  and  is  the  most  thickly  settled  in  the  union. 

Although  one  of  the  smallest  states,  it  is  first,  except 
yiNew-York,  in  commerce,  and  among  the  first  in  manu- 
factures and  wealth. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries,  rivers 
and  capital  of  Massachusetts.  What  bay  and  capes  has  it? 
What  seaports  N.  of  Boston  ?  Where  is  Plymouth,  the  spot  on 
which  the  forefathers  of  N.  England  first  landed  ? 

II.  What  port  on  the  southern  coast  ?  What  town  N.  of  it? 
What  islands  near  it  ?  What  are  the  principal  places  on  the 
Connecticut  river  ?  What  are  the  principal  places  between  the 
coast  and  the  river?  What  one  west  of  the  Connecticut? 
Where  are  Harvard  University  and  Williamstown  College  r 
(CLXXV.  a.  and  6.)  (Prod.  172.— Face,  173.— C/i  .174.) 
C9NNECTICUT. 

180.  Connecticut  is  one  of  the  three  smallest  states 
in  the  Union;  but  in  exports,  manufactures  and  wealth, 
it  is  superior  to  half  the  larger  states. 

It  has  been  much  distinguished  for  its  men  of  genius 
and  learning,  and  for  the  general  regularity  and  good 
order  of  the  people. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries,  chief 
river,  and  two  capitals  of  Connecticut. 

(The  rivsr  emptying  at  New-London  is  the  Thames,  and  that 
west  of  the  Connecticut  is  the  Housatonic.') 

What  are  the  two  principal  places  E.  of  the  Connecticut 


lO  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTKH  -. 

River  •  What  town  below  Hartford  on  the  Connecticut  ?  (Say- 
brook  litf  a  I  the  movlh.) 

II.  What  is  the  chief  town  on  the  coast,  W.  of  New-Ha- 
Ten?  What  one  N.  of  New-Haven?  What  literary  institution! 
has  Connecticut?  (CLXXV.)  (Prod.  172— Face,  173.) 
RHODE  ISLAND. 

181.  Rhode  Island  is  chiefly  distinguished  for  it- 
flourishing  manufactures. 

From  the  situation  of  Rhode  Island,  the  climate  is 
milder  than  in  other  parts  of  New  England.  Its  isl- 
ands are  celebrated  for  beauty  and  fertility. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries  of  Rhode 
Island  and  its  capital.  What  other  principal  port  and  how 
situated  ?  (Bristol  is  a  commercial  place  E.  of  Providence.} 

II.  What  island  south  of  Rhode  Island  ?  Where  is  the  col- 
lege of  Rhode  Island  ?  Why  is  the  climate  of  this  state  mildei 
than  that  of  Vermont?  (See  }  114j».  41.) 

MIDDLE  STATES. 
Aeic-I'orfc — JVeic  Jersty — Pennsylvania — DeJairare. 


182.  The  most  important  production  of  the  Middle 
States  is  wheat.     Large  quantities  of  flour  are  export- 
ed from  them  to  other  parts  of  America  and  to  Europe. 

183.  Except  the  northern  part  of  New-York,  the 
Middle  States  have  a  milder  climate,  and  more  fertile 
soil  than  the  Eastern  States. 

184.  They  are  generally  healthy,  except    on  the 
marshy  borders  of  the  lakes  and  rivers. 


MIDDLE    UNITED    STATES.  .  71 

CLXXXV.      (For  the  Review.) 

a.  These   states   contain  the  two  first  medical  institutions  in 
the  country, — one  at  Philadelphia,  connected  with  a  university, 
and  another  at  New- York.     They  have  also  two  distinguished 
colleges, — at  Princeton  in  New  Jersey,  and  at  Schenectady  in 
New-York,   besides  others,  at  New- York,  and  Clinton,  (N.  Y.) 
and   at  Carlisle,   Meadville,   Washington    and     Canonsburg, 
(Penn.) 

b.  There  are  two  theological  seminaries  in  the  state  of  New- 
York — at  Auburn,   and  New- York  ;  and  two  in  New  Jersey, 
at  Princeton  and  Brunswick. 

:.  There  are  two  institutions  for  the  education  of  the  deaf 
arid  dumb,  one  in  New- York,  and  one  in  Philadelphia. 

d.  Public  schools  are   not  generally  established  in  the  Mid- 
dle States,  except  in  the  state  of  New- York. 

e.  The  population  of  these  states  has  been  rapidly  increasing, 
and  great  improvements  have  been  made  within  twenty  years 
past. 

/.  They  were  chiefly  settled  by  emigrants  from  England, 
Holland,  Germany,  Ireland  and  the  Eastern  States,  and  each 
preserves  much  of  its  own  national  character. 

g.  If  the  higher  classes  have  more  wealth  and  refinement 
than  in  the  Eastern  States,  the  lower  classes  are  more  rude 
and  ignorant,  and  the  poor  more  numerous. 

h.  These  states  surpass  the  other  portions  of  the  United 
States  in  wealth,  and  in  the  value  of  their  manufactures. 

i.  By  means  of  canals,  some  parts  of  which  are  already  com- 
pleted, the  navigable  rivers  of  these  states  will  probably  be 
connected  with  tho  lakes  and  the  Mississippi. 

Questions. — /.  (See  the  map.}  How  are  the  Middle  States 
bounded?  Between  what  latitudes  are  they?  Which  is  the 
smallest  and  most  southern  ?  Which  is  the  next  larger,  and 
which  are  the  largest  ?  Which  lie  immediately  on  the 
Atlantic?  Which  are  on  the  lakes?  How  is  Pennsylvania 
situated?  What  is  the  chief  production  of  these  states?  What 
is  their  climate  ? 

//.  Mention  their  literary  institutions.  What  theological 
seminaries  are  there?  What  provision  is  made  for  the  educa- 
tion of  the  poor  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  improvement  of 
these  states  ?  How  were  these  states  settled  ?  What  can  you  say 
of  the  character  of  the  people?  How  do  the  Middle  States  com- 
pare with  the  other  divisions  of  the  Union,  in  manufactures  and 
wealth  ?  What  advantages  can  they  derive  from  canah  f 


:.rriJu.V    0> 

NEW- YORK. 

186.  New-York  is  the  richest,  and  one  of  the  largesl, 
most  populous,  and  commercial  states  in  the  Union. 

The  eastern  part  was  principally  settled  by  the 
Dutch  ;  the  western  part,  by  emigrants  from  New- 
England. 

A  canal  has  already  been  completed  by  this  state,  unit- 
ing Lake  Chatnplain  to  the  Hudson,  and  the  greaterpart 
of  another,  intended  to  unite  the  Hudson  wit  h  Lake  Erie. 

Qufstivnt  on  the  map. — 7.  What  are  the  boundaries  of  New- 

What   rivers  in  the  eastern  part  :  What  in  the  western 

What  two  large  rivers   rise  in  this  state  :  Where  is  th« 

capital  ?  What  is  the  chief  city,  and  where  ?     (Situated  on  an 

t.'land.) 

II.  What  are  the  two  principal  towns  on  the  east  side  of  Hudson 
River.'  What  towns  on  the  west  bank,  beginning' at  the  mouth? 
What  towns  on  and  near  the  Mohawk  River  .'  Wrhat  places  ou 
Lake  Champlain  :  What  is  the  principal  one  on  the  St.  Law- 
rence ?  What  place:  on  Lake  Ontario  :  W7hat  on  Niagara 
River:  What  places  near  the  small  lakes  ?  Where  is  Oswego? 
Rochester:  Leicester:  Batavia  :  What  places  in  the  southern 
part  :  What  lake  ?  What  large  island  east  of  New-York  city  ? 
•  Stale n  Island  lies  between  Long  Island  and  JVV  IT  Jersey.)  What 
are  some  of  the  principal  places  on  Long  Island  :  What  is  the 
eastern  point  called:  Where  is  Gardiner's  Island  ?  WTiat  liter- 
ary institutions  has  New- York,  {Set  CLXXXV.  a.  and  6.) 
(Clinton  is  nine  miles  westofUtica.) 

Several  small  lakes  in  the  interior  of  .\eic-York,  are  numbered 
en  the  map,  as  foliates  :  1.  Skeneateles  L.  2.  Otcasco  L.  3. 
Cayitga  L.  4.  Seneca  L.  5.  Crooked  L.  6.  Canandaigua  L. 
~.  Canetus  L. 

Which  is  the  most  eastern  of  the  small  lakes  of  N.  York: 
On  what  lake  is  Skeneateles  ?  Auburn?  Geneva?  Canaudai- 
gua?  (Productions,  182— Climate,  183,    184.) 
PENNSYLVANIA. 

187.  Pennsylvania  is  a  large,  fertile,  well  cultivated 
and  wealthy  state.     It  is  level  in  the  south-east,  and 
mountainous  or  hilly  in  mo?t  other  p;i: 

German,  Dutch  and  Irish  emigrants,  form  nearly 
half  the  population  of  Pennsylvania,  many  of  whom 
do  not  speak  English. 


MIDDLE    tf.MTED    STATES.  73 

The  English  inhabitants  are  generally  well  inform- 
ed, and  science  is  much  cultivated  among  them.  The 
common  people  of  other  classes  have  little  education. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries  and  riv- 
ers of  Pennsylvania.  What  mountains  pass  through  it  ?  De- 
scribe the  capital  and  the  chief  city. 

II.  What  town  on  the  Schuylkill  ?  What  inland  town  W.  of 
it?  What  four  town*  W.  in  the  same  latitude ?  What  is  the' 
principal  town  in  the  western  part  of  the  state,  and  how  situ- 
ated ?'  What  places  S.  of  it?  Where  is  Meadville?  What 
towns  on  the  Susquehannah  and  its  branches  ?  Where  are 
Easton  and  Reading?  What  are  the  literary  institutions  of 
Pennsylvania?  (CLXXXV.  a.  and  c.)  (Prod.  182.— Cli.  183.) 
NEW  JERSEY. 

188.  New  Jersey  is  level,  barren  and  sandy  in  the 
south,   and  productive,  though    mountainous,  in  the 
north  ;  but  the  middle  portion  of  the  state  is  most  fer- 
tile. 

The  people  are  generally  industrious,  frugal  and 
hospitable,  and  in  many  parts,  well  informed. 

Although  this  state  is  among  the  six  smallest  in  the 
Union,  it  is  among  the  first  six  in  wealth,  and  in  the 
value  of  its  manufactures. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries  of 
New  Jersey.  Where  is  the  seat  of  government? 

The  Raritan,  passing  by  Brunsicick,  and  the  Passaick  and 
Hackemack,  two  small  streams  on  the  east,  are  the  principal 
riven  of  New  Jersey, 

II.  What  towns  between  Trenton  and  Philadelphia  ?  What 
places  on  Delaware  Bay  .'  What  harbours  on  the  coast?  What 
is  the  southern  cape,  and  what  the  northern  of  this  coast  ? 
What  town  in  the  northern  part,  remarkable  for  the  falls  of  the 
Passaick  river  ?  What  literary  institutions  in  this  state  ? 
(CLXXXV.  a.  and  b.)  (Prod.  182— Cli.  183—4.) 
DELAWARE. 

189.  Delaware  is  a  very  small,  but  fertile  state,  re- 
markable for  fine  wheat,  and  numerous  flour  mills  and 
manufacturing  establishments. 

Questions  on  the  map. — I.  Describe  the  boundaries  of  Dela- 
ware.   The  capital  and  other  towns.  What  cape  has  it  ? 
•  Wilmington,  on  the  Delaware.,  is  one  of  the  principal  towns. 


i 4  KIPTIOX    OF    COVXT 

SOUTHERN  STATES. 

Maryland — Virginia — .V.    Carolina — 5.     Carolina — 
Georgia — Alabama. 


Rice.  Cotton.  Tobacco. 

190.  The  Southern  States  extend  from  the  boundaries 
of  Pennsylvania  and  Delaware,  to  those  of  Mississippi 
and  Florida,  all  lying  on  the  Atlantic,  except  Alabama. 

191.  The  northern  parts  abound  in  wheat  and  In- 
dian corn  ;  but  rice,  cotton  and  tobacco  are  the  most 
rateable  productions  of  these  states,  and  are  important 
articles  of  commerce. 

192.  The  country  ou  the  coast  of  the  Southern 
States,  from  100  to  200  miles  in  breadth,  is  generally 
low,  sandy  and  barren,  except  the  marshy,  moist  por- 
tions on  the  bays^and  sounds. 

193.  The  climate  of  the  low  country  is  very  hot 
and  unhealthy   in  the  summer.     The  back  parts  are 
mountainous,  and  enjoy  a  better  climate. 

The  winters  are  mild,  and  snow  seldom  falls  in 
large  quantities  ;    the  heat  of  summer  is   more   op- 
pressive than  in  the  northern  states,  chiefly  because  it 
is  more  constant,  and  longer  continued. 
CXCIV      (For  the  Renev.) 

a.  There  is  a  flourishing  medical  institution,  besides  two 
colleges,  at  Baltimore.  There  are  also  universities  or  col- 
kges  at  the  city  of  Washington,  at  Williamsburgh  and  Prince 
Edward,  (Vir.)  Chapel  Hill,  (N.  C.  )  Columbia,  (S.  C.  )  and 


•>oUTHERN  UNITED  STATES.  •<& 

Athens,  (Geo.)   .  A  new  university  is  established  at  Gharlotts- 
ville,  (Vir.) 

b.  The  inhabitants  of  the  Southern  States  usually  live  oa 
large  plantations,  so  far  from  each  other,  that  there  are  few 
towns  or  villages,  and  of  course,  few  churches  and  common 
schools,  compared  with  those  of  the  northern  states. 

c.  In  consequence  of  this,  the  lower  classes  hare  little  educa- 
tion. 

d.  Nearly  one  half  the  population  consists  of  slaves,  extremely 
ignorant  and  degraded,  who  perform  almost  all  the  labour. 

e.  The  higher  classes  are  hospitable  and  liberal,  and  many 
are  well  educated. 

/.  The  state  of  morals  and  manners  in  the  Southern  States^ 
has  been  improving  for  several  years  past. 

g.  These  states  are  more  extensive  than  the  Middle  anfl 
Eastern  States  together,  and  exceed  either  of  these  divisions  in 
the  amount  of  their  exports  ;  but  the  value  of  property,  excenj; 
slaves,  has  been  less  than  in  the  Middle  States. 

Questions. — /.  Which  are  the  Southern  States?  How  are 
they  bounded  ?  What  are  the  chief  productions  ?  What  is  the 
face  of  the  country  and  climate  on  the  coast  ?  What  in  the 
interior?  What  is  the  comparative  temperature  of  these 
states  ? 

//.  What  literary  institutions  are  there  ?  Are  the  inhabi- 
tants of  these  states  thickly  settled  ?  What  is  the  character  of 
the  lower  classes  ?  What  is  the  proportion  of  slaves  here  ? 
What  are  some  of  the  characteristics  of  the  higher  classes? 
What  improvement  has  been  taking  place?  What  is  the  ex- 
tent of  the  Southern  States  compared  with  the  Eastern  and 
Middle  States  ;  and  what  their  exports  and  wealth  ?  Which  is 
the  largest  of  these  states  ?  Which  is  the  most  northern,  anti 
which  the  most  southern  ?  Which  lies  on  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  ! 

MARYLAND. 

195.  Maryland  is  generally  low,  moist,  and  un- 
healthy, especially  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Chesa- 
peake Bay. 

It  is  very  fertile,  yielding  wheat  and  tobacco  of  the- 
best  quality. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  bay  divides  Maryland? 
Describe  the  boundaries,  rivers,  capital  and  chief  city. 

Ft.  What  are  the  towns  N.  of  BaltimtJTe  ?  What  on  the 
7 


••-b  DESCRIPTION    ©F    COUNTRIES. 

eastern  shore  of  the  Chesapeake  Bay  ?  What  one  on  the  Fo- 
tomac,  at  the  south ?  What  Colleges  in  this  state ?  (CXCIV  a.) 
(Prod.  191,  Face  192,  Climate  193.) 

DISTRICT  OF  COLUMBIA. 

196.  This  is  a  small  district,  ten  miles  square,  lying 
on  the  Potomac,  given  to  the  United  States  by  the 
states  of  Maryland  and  Virginia. 

It  includes  Washington,  the  seat  of  the  United  States' 
government,  with  Alexandria  and  Georgetown. 

Questions  on  the  map. — II.  What  is  the  population  of  Wash- 
ington ?     What  literary  institutions  has  it  f     What  is  the  size 
of  Alexandria  and  Georgetown?     In  what  district  are  they  in- 
cluded, and  hew  large  is  this  district? 
VIRGINIA. 

197.  Virginia  is  the  largest  state,  and  one  of  the 
most  populous   in  the  Union.     It  is  distinguished  as 
the  native  state  of  General  Washington. 

Its  most  important  productions  are  wheat,  tobacco, 
and  corn. 

Questions  on  the  Map. — /.  Mention  the  boundaries,  rivers, 
and  Mountains  of  Virginia.  Describe  the  capital.  What  is 
the  largest  town  and  seaport  ? 

//.  What  place  is  opposite  to  Norfolk?  What  canal  from 
it  ?  What  town  at  the  mouth  of  James  River  ?  What  places 
on  and  near  York  River  ?  Where  are  Petersburg  and  Fre- 
dericksburg  ?  What  places  between  these  and  the  mountains  ? 
What  among  the  mountains  ?  What  springs  in  the  mountains  ? 
What  three  places  on  the  Ohio  ?  What  other  towns  ?  What 
Colleges  in  this  state?  (CXCIV.)  (Prod.  191,  Face  192,  Cli- 
yiate  193.) 

A  part  of  the  Peninsula,  on  which  Cape  Charles  w,  belongs 
to  Virginia. 

NORTH  CAROLINA. 

198.  North  Carolina  produces  cotton  and  rice,  and 
abounds  in  pine  forests,  from  which  large  quantities 
of  pitch,  tar,  and  turpentine  are  obtained. 

The  commerce  of  this  state  is  small,  for  want  of 
good  harbours  on  its  coast. 

Questions  on  the  Map. — 1.  Mention  the  boundaries,  sounds, 

and  chief  rivers,  of  N.  Carolina.     What  is  the  capital  ? 
//.  Where  are  Favetteville  and  Newbern  ?     What  towns  N. 


SOUTHERN    UNITED    STATES.  1.1 

E.  oi"  the  river- Neuse  ?  How  are  they  situated  ?  Where  is  the 
university  of  this  state  ?  What  considerable  place  is  north  of 
this  ?  What  ports  in  the  south,  and  where  ?  What  towns  N. 
and  S.  of  Fayetteville  ?  What  places  in  the  western  part  of  the 
state?  What  springs  on  the  borders  of  Tennessee?  (Fact  192, 
Clim.  193.) 

SOUTH  CAROLINA. 

199.  South    Carolina  has  much  barren  land,  but  is 
very  fertile  on  the  rivers,  and  produces  cotton  and  rice 
in  abundance. 

This  state  has  a  large  share  of  commerce,  wealth, 
and  refinement. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Mention  the  boundaries,  <Sbi<*P 
rivers,  and  capital.  What  is  the  chief  city  ? 
\  //.  What  two  other  seaports,  and  in  what  direction  froni 
Charleston  ?  What  two  towns  N.  W.  of  Beaufort  ?  What  are 
the  principal  places  E.  of  the  Santee  ?  What  on  the  west  of 
this  river  ?  Wrhere  is  the  university  of  this  state  ?  (Cli.  193.) 
GEORGIA. 

200.  The  climate  of  Georgia  is  so  warm,  that  it 
produces  coffee  and  sugar  in  the  southern  part. 

Cotton  is  the  principal  article  of  commerce.  The 
fertile  islands  on  the  coast  produce  the  finest  in  the 
world. 

Questions  an  the  map. — /»-. Mention  the  boundaries  and  cap- 
ital of  Georgia.  What  are  the  chief  rivers  emptying  into  the 
Atlantic  ?  What  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  ?  \Vhat  is  the  prinfcir 
pal  town  and  seaport  ? 

//.  What  four  towns  on  the  coast,  below  Savannah  ?  What 
is  the  principal  town  on  the  Savannah,  iri'the  northern  part  of 
the  state  ?  What  other  towns  ?  What  Indians  are  found  in  the 
northern  part  ?  What  islands  on  the  coast  ?  What  river  forms 
the  southern  boundary  ?  What  two  islands  lie  S.  of  it  ?  What 
colleges  or  universities  in  Georgia  ?  (CXCIV  a.)  (Face  192, 
Glim.  193.) 

ALABAMA. 

201.  Alabama  is  a  very  fertile,  but  newly  settled 
state  resembling  Georgia  in  climate  and  productions. 

Questions  on  the  map. — 7.  Describe  the  boundaries  and  rivers 
of  Alabama.  Where  is  the  seat  of  government  ?  What  ses=* 


»»'  DEsCMFIlOJf  O 

jicrt  on  the  south  ;  What  town  on  the  Mobile  river,  opposite 
to  it  ?  What  town  above  it  ?  Mention  some  other  places  in  the 
State.  What  Indians  are  found  in  this  state  ? 

TERRITORY  OF  FLORIDA. 

202.  Florida  has  been  lately  ceded  by  Spain  to  the 
United  States.  It  extends  almost  to  the  Tropic  of 
Cancer  ;  and  its  climate  is  fitted  to  produce  fine  crops 
of  coffee  and  sugar,  as  well  as  rice  and  cotton. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Florida  bounded,  and  how 
is  it  divided  ?  (Sec  map  of  A".  America.}  What  capes  has  it  ? 
What  river  ?  What  is  the  chief  town  of  E.  Florida  i  What  of 
W.Florida? 

11.  What  other  places  do  you  find :  What  bays  on  the  coast? 
How  fat  is  Cape  Sable  from  the  Island  of  Cuba  ?  What  In- 
dian* are  there  in  W.  Florida? 

WESTERN  STATES. 

Qftio — Indiana — Illinois — Kentucky — Tennessee — 
Afsrisfippi — Louisiana — Missou  ri. 


Ancient  Bonifications  at  .Marietta.  Ohio. 

203.  The  Western  States  abound  with  the  remains 
of  fortifications  and  mounds,  so  ancient,  that  they  are 
now  covered  with  aged  trees.  .  It  is  not  known  when 
these  fortifications  were  built,  or  by  what  nation. 

204.  These  states  lie  entirety  on  the  Mississippi  and 
its  branches,  and  are  generally  well  watered  and  very 
fertile-. 


"WESTERN    UNITED    STATES.  Vy9 

£05.  They  have  a  milder  climate  than  the  states  on 
the  Atlantic  Ocean,  but  generally  resemble  those  in 
the  same  latitude,  in  their  productions. 

206.  Immense  prairies,  or  plains  covered  only  with 
grass,  form  a  striking  characteristic  of  the  Western 
States,  and  the  soil  is  uncommonly  fertile. 

207.  The  chief  productions  of  the  states  north  of 
Tennessee,  are  wheat  and  Indian  corn. 

Horses,  cattle  and  swine  are  raised  in  great  numbers 
in  these  states,  and  large  quantities  of  provisions  ex- 
ported in  boats,  down  the  Mississippi  River. 

208.  Rice,  cotton  and  even  sugar,  are  raised  in  the 
more  southern  states,  chiefly  by  the  labour  of  slaves. 
Kentucky  and  Tennessee  abound  in  hemp  and  tobacco. 

CCIX.     (For  the  Review.') 

a.  Slavery  is  prohibited  in  the  states  north  of  the  Ohio,  and 
the  people  resemble  those  of  the  northern  and  middle  states  on 
the  Atlantic. 

b.  The  western  States  were  settled  latest,  and  are  not  ygt 
well  supplied  with  churches  and  schools. 

c.  The  people  are  brave,  hardy   and  industrious,  but  the 
lower  classes  have  little  education. 

d.  There  are  colleges   at   Athens  and  Cincinnati,    (Ohio.) 
Lexington  and  Danville.    (Ken.)    Greenville,  Nashville  and 
Knoxville,   (Ten.)  and  Washington  (Miss.)     There  are  med- 
ical Institutions  at  Cincinnati  and  Lexington. 

Questions. — /.  What  do  you  find  remarkable  in  the  Western 
States?  Where^  do  these  states  lie,  and  what  are  they? 
What  states  are  west  of  the  Mississippi  ?  What  north  of  the 
Ohio,  and  what  Atlantic  states  are  in  the  same  latitude  ?  What 
between  the  Ohio  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  what  other 
states  in  the  same  latitude  ?  What  can  you  say  of  their  climate  ? 
What  is  there  peculiar  in  the  face  of  the  country  ?  What  are 
the  chief  productions  of  the  states  N.  of  Tennessee  r  What  are 
the  productions  of  the  more  southern  states  ? 

II.  In  what  states  is  slavery  prohibited  ?  In  what  latitude  da 
the  Western  States  lie?  When  were  they  settled?  What  is  the 
character  of  the  peopL  generally?  What  colleges  are  therein 
the  Western  States  ? 

1* 


o.y  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

OHIO. 

210.  Ohio  is  a  fertile  state,  remarkably  level  and 
fixe  fro%n  stones. 

The  inhabitants  are  frugal  and  industrious,  and  are 
rapidly  establishing  schools,  colleges  and  churches. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  are  the  boundaries  and  seat 
of  government  of  Ohio  ?  What  rivers  empty  into  the  lakes,  and 
•what  into  the  Ohio  ? 

//.  What  is  the  largest  town  in  Ohio  ?  What  towns  on  the 
River  Ohio,  above  Cincinnati  ?  What  places  are  there  on  the 
Scioto  River?  What  on  the  Muskingum  River:  What  towns 
and  forts  on  the  north  ?  Where  is  Cleavelaud  ?  What  colleges 
are  there  in  this  state  (CCIX.  rf.)  (Clim.  2f)5— Prod.  207.) 
INDIANA. 

211.  This  state  resembles  Ohio  in  fertility.     In 
some  parts  the  climate  is  so  mild  as  to  produce  grapes 
from  which  wine  can  be  made. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Indiana  bounded  :  What 
are  ite  rivers  ?  What  is  the  seat  of  government  ?  What  towns 
are  there  on  the  Ohio  ?  What  on  the  Wabash  ?  What  place 
and  forts  in  the  north  ? 

ILLINOIS. 

212.  Illinois  is  a  fertile,  but  thinly  settled  state,  re- 
markable for  its  extensive  prairies. 

Questions  on/Ac  map. — 7.  How  is  Illinois  bounded?  What  i* 
the  chief  town  and  seat  of  government  ?  What  places  are  north 
of  it  on  the  Mississippi  and  Kaskaskias  rivers  ?  What  east  ? 
MICHIGAN  TERRITORY. 

213.  Michigan  is  a  well  watered,  fertile  territory, 
very  thinly  settled. 

Questions  on  the  map. — 7.  How  is  it  bounded  ?  What  is  the 
principal  place,  and  where?  What  town  south  of  it  ?  Where 
is  Michilimackinac,  an  important  military  post  ? 
NORTH-WEST  TERRITORY. 

214.  This  territory  lies  between  Michigan  and  the 
Mississippi,  extending  to  Lake  Superior,  and  the  Lake 
of  the  Woods* 


WESTERN  UNITED  STATES.  «1 

It  is  chiefly  inhabited  by  Indians,  and  little  known. 

Its  rivers  and  lakes  abound  in  fish,  and  where  they 
are  shallow,  produce  great  quantities  of  wild  rice  re- 
sembling oats. 

There  are  very  valuable  lead  mines  in  this  territory, 
and  large  masses  of  pure  copper  have  been  found  near 
Lake  Superior. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  rivers  do  you  find  in  this 
territory?  What  fatls  of  the  Mississippi?  What  tribes  of 
Indians? 

KENTUCKY. 

215.  Kentucky  is  a  very  fertile  state,  with  a  mild 
moist  climate. 

It  abounds  in  salt  springs,  from  which  several  of  the 
neighbouring  states  are  supplied  with  salt. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Kentucky  bounded  ? 
What  is  the  capital  ?  What  are  the  two  chief  towns  ? 

//.  W7hat  towns  are  between  Cumberland  and  Green  Riv- 
ers ?  What  two  on  them  ?  Where  are  Bairdstown  and  Sprmg- 
field?  What  springs  S.  E.  from  Lexington  ?  What  towns  are 
there  on  the  Ohio?  What  colleges  in  this  state?  (CCIX.  <//) 
(Prod.  208.) 

TENNESSEE. 

216.  Tennessee  is  generally  a  fertile,  healthy  state. 
It  is  divided  by  the  Cumberland  mountains  into  East 
and  West  Tennessee. 

It  is  not  subject  to  the  extremes  of  heat  and  cold, 
and  the  spring  is  several  weeks  earlier  than  in  New- 
England. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  are  the  boundaries  and  riv- 
ers of  Tennessee  ?  What  mountains  separate  the  Cumberland 
and  Tennessee  rivers  f  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns, 
and  where  ? 

II.  What  are  the  principal  places  above  Knoxville,  on  the 
Tennessee  and  its  branches  ?  What  are  below  it ?  What  two 
places  on  the  Cumberland  River?  What  place  between  these 
rivers  ?  What  colleges  in  this  state  ?  (CCIX  rf.)  What  mis- 
sionary station  near  the  southern  boundary  ? 
MISSISSIPPI. 

217.  Mississippi  is  a  well  watered,  level  and  fertile 


•J~  DESCRIPTION*    OF    COUNTRIES. 

country.     It  i*  remarkably  fitted  for  the  cultivation  of 
cotton,  and  in  the  southern  parts,  produces  sugar. 

Only  half  of  this  state  is  owned  by  the  whites,  the 
rest  belonging  to  the  Choctaw  and  Chickasaw  Indians. 

Qverfioru  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Mississippi  bounded  ? 
What  are  its  principal  rivers  ?  Where  do  you  find  the  Chick- 
asaws,  and  where  the  Choctaws  ?  How  much  of  the  state  do 
they  possess?  Where  is  the  seat  of  government  ?  What  is  the 
thief  town,  and  where  : 

11.  Where  is  the  college  of  this  state?  (CCIX  d.)  In  what 
direction  from  New-Orleans  is  Natchez  ':   What  towns  are  north 
of  Natchez  •  What  between  the  Mississippi  and  Pearl  Rivers? 
What  one  on  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  f  Whaf  places  N.  of  i 
goula,  in  the  western  part  of  the  state  ? 
LOUISIANA. 

218.  Louisiana  is  the  most  southern  state  now  in  the 
Union,  with  a  hot,  unhealthy  climate,  producing  trop^ 
ical  fruit*,  and  especially  the  sugar  cane  in  abundance. 

A  large  part  of  this  state,  and  even  the  city  of  New- 
Orleans,  is  lower  than  the  rivers,  and  the  water  flows 
out  of  the  rivers  on  each  side,  forming  immense 
swamps. 

To  prevent  this,  banks,  or  levees  are  built,  and  the 
lands  which  are  drained  are  extremely  fertile. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  are  the  boundaries  and 
capital  of  Louisiana  ?  What  are  the  chief  rivers:  What  river 
•eparates  it  from  Texas?  What  towns  in  the  western  part: 
What  towns  east  of  the  Mississippi  ? 

ARKANSAW  TERRITORY. 

219.  This  territory  is  chiefly  inhabited  by  Indians, 
and  resembles  the  neighbouring  states. 

twru  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Arkansaw  bounded? 
What  town  do  you  find  ?  What  are  the  rivers  of  this  territo- 
ry :  What  Indians  are  here  ? 

MISSOURI. 

Iissouri  is  the  last  state  admitted  into  the 
Union,  remarkable  for  its  rich  and  extensive  mines  of 
lead. 

The  climate  is  mild  and  healthy,  and  the  land  gen- 
erally very  fertile,  especially  on  the  rivers. 


sI'AMSH  WORTH  AMERICA.  83 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  are  the  boundaries  of  Mis- 
souri ?  What  rivers  pass  through  and  rise  in  it  ?  What  are  the 
principal  places  and  where  ?  What  valuable  mines  do  you  find 
in  this  state  ? 

MISSOURI  TERRITORY. 
Or  the  Western  Territory  of  the  United  States. 


Indians  catching  Buffaloes. 

221.  This  territory  embraces  the  greater  part  of  the 
United  States'  possessions  west  of  the  Mississippi.     It 
is  still  a  wilderness  consisting  chiefly  of  immense  plains. 

It  abounds  in  wild  animals,  and  is  inhabited  only  by 
Indians,  and  a  few  soldiers  stationed  at  military  posts. 

Buffaloes  are  found  in  numerous  and  large  herds, 
and  are  caught  by  the  Indians,  by  driving  them  into 
enclosures,  as  represented  in.  the  cut. 

Questions  on  the  map. — 7.  How  is  Missouri  Territory  bound- 
ed ?  What  mountains  divide  it  ?  What  river  flows  east  from 
the  mountains  ? 

//.  What  are  its  chief  branches '  What  one  flows  west? 
What  Indians  are  found  here  ?  Where  is  there  a  missionary 
station  ? 

SPANISH  NORTH  AMERICA. 

222.  The  Spanish  provinces  of  North  America  are 
Mexico   and  Gautimala,  Florida  having  been  lately 
given  up  to  the  United  States. 


DESCRIPTION 


223.  This  extensive  region  was  formerly  inhabited 
by  a  powerful  people,  almost  as  civilized  as  the  Chi- 
nese. The  natives  were  conquered  and  cruelly  treated 
by  the  Spaniards,  who  still  hold  many  in  slavery. 

The  Spanish  inhabitants  are  generally  ignorant  and 
corrupt,  without  the  refinement  of  European  manners. 


Pyramid  of  Cholula. 

t    At  Cholula  in  Mexico,  is  a  rery  large  pyramid 
built  of  brick  by  the  ancient  inhabitants,  with  a  temple 
on  the  top,  in  which  thousarfUs  of  persons  were  proba- 
rinced  to  the  Sun. 

'ion>.  I    What  parts   of   America  now  belong  to  the 
•'.'hat  puple  formerly  inhabited  this  region  ?  What 
remarkable  work  of  theirs  can  you  mention  f   What  was  done 
to  the  natives  ?  What  is  the  character  of  the  Spaniards  ? 

MEXICO. 

j.  Mexico  has  long  been  celebrated  for  its  rich 
mines  of  gold  and  -nv.r.  which  are  chiefly  in  the 
southern  part. 

The  interior  is  thinly  inhabited,  and  is  remarkable 
for  immense  herds  of  wild  horses  and  cattle.  The 
southern  parts  contain  most  of  the  population. 

The  lowlands  on  the  coast,  are  hot  and  unhealthy  ; 
but  tii*.  middle  is  a  high,  temperate  plain,  from  6,000 


INDIAN  TRIBES  OK  If.  AMERICA.  85 

to  8,000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  with  every 
variety  of  climate  and  productions,  at  different  heights. 

Some  parts  which  are  inhabited,  are  so  cold  that 
wheat  will  not  grow,  and  the  whole  is  crowned  with 
mountains,  covered  with  perpetual  snow. 

Queshor^  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Mexico  bounded  ?  What 
are  the  chief  rivers  ?  What  gulfs,  and  what  peninsulas  do  you 
find ?  What  provinces  are  mentioned  on  the  map  ?  What  is 
the  climate  of  the  coast,  and  what  of  other  parts  ?  What  is  the 
capital  ? 

//.  What  are  the  chief  sea  ports  on  the  Pacific  ?  What  on 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico?  Which  is  the  nearest  port  to  Mexico? 
What  two  cities  S.  of  Mexico :  What  Volcano  ?  What  cities 
between  Mexico  and  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  ?  What  are  the 
principal  N.  of  this  line  ?  What  is  the  most  northern  town 
in  the  interior  ?  What  capes  on  the  Pacific  ?  What  islands 
off  the  coast?  Which  is  the  most  northerly  port,  and  what  is 
its  size  ?  What  places  on  the  Gulf  of  California  ?  What  island 
in  it? 

GUATIMALA. 

227.  Guatimaki  is   a  warm,   fertile  and  populous 
province,  between  Mexico  and  the  Isthmus  of  Darien. 

Its  coast  furnishes  great  quantities  of  mahogany,  and 
a  British  settlement  has  been  established  at  Honduras 
to  procure  it. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Guatimala  bounded? 
What  is  the  capital  ? 

//.  What  sea  port  besides?  What  one  on  the  Gulf  of  Ama- 
tique?  Where  are  Ciudad  Real  and  Vera  Paz?  Where  is 
Chiapa,  or  Chiapa  of  the  Indians  ?  What  lake  in  the  S.  and 
•where  does  it  empty  ?  What  is  the  nearest  port  of  S.  America, 
situated  on  the  Isthmus  ? 

INDIAN  TRIBES  OF  NORTH  AMERICA. 

228.  The  whole  of  North  America  was  formerly 
possessed  by  the  Indians,  but  they  have  gradually  been 
diminished  by  wars  and  new  diseases,  as  the  number 
of  white  people  has  increased. 

229.  Many  tribes  still  remain  in  various 'parts  of 
North  America,  which  are  really  independent  nations. 
They  hold   their  lands  and  are  governed  by  their 
chiefs,  according  to  their  own  laws. 


AIPTIOX    OF    COVXi: 

230.  Most  of  the  Indians  of  North  America  are  tall, 
well  formed,  active  and  intelligent,  distinguished  for 
boldness  and  native  eloquence. 

231.  The  northern  and  north-eastern  coasts  are  in- 
habited chiefly  by  the  Esquimaux.    They  are  dwarfish, 
dull  and  filthy  ;  but  mild  in  their  character,  and  more 
disposed  to  receive  instruction  th;m  many  other  tribes. 

-'.  The  Knisteneaux  and  Chipewayans  inhabit  the 
•interior  of  the  northern  parts.  The  Knisteneaux  arc 
the  most  intelligent,  mild  and  honest 

233.  The  Sioux,  Pawnee  and  Osage  Indians.,  found 
on  the  Missouri  and  its  branches,  are  the  most  robust 
and  warlike  tribes  we  know. 

L.  The  Snake  Indians  of  the  western  territory- 
are  mild  and  inoffensive  in  their  character.  This  is 
also  said  of  most  oi  the  tribes  beyond  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains, called  Flatheads,  from  the  flatness  of  their  skulls, 
produced  by  pressing  the  heads  of  infants. 

CCXXXV.     (For  the  Rtri'.w.} 

a.  There  are  several  powerful  tnbes  in  the  Arkansaw  Ter- 
ritory and  in  Mexico.  Some  oi"  them  use  horses,  taken  from 
the  immense  herds  which  are  found  wild. 

6.  Some  Indian  nations  in  -iexico  have  been  partially  civil - 
"-'•  ized,  and  are  now  aroverned  by  Catholic  priests.     Others  live 
in  towns  by  themselves,  with  an  Indian  governor  appointed  by 
the  Spaniards. 

c.  The  most  important  tribes  within  tfie  United  States,  are 
those  which  are  found  between  the  Ohio  and  the  Gulf  of  .Mex- 
ico—-the  Cherokee.5,  Choctaws,  Chicka=avs  and  Creeks. 

d.  Some  of  these,  especially  the  Cherokees,  have  learned  the 
arts  of  civilized  life;  and  some  are  found  who  are  well  educat- 
ed, and  possessed  of  large  plantations  and  numerous  slaves. 

e.  There  are  many  Indians  between  the  Ohio  and  the  great 
lakes,  who  are  chiefly  Chipewayans. 

/.  The  principal  tribes  in  the  states  on  the  Atlantic  were 
the  Mohekasneews,  and  the  Iroquois  or  Six  Nations.     A  few 
.em  are  still  scattered  through  New-England  and  New- 
York. 

The  Iroquois  are  principally  fttled  in  the  western  part 


WEST    INDIE*.  87 

of  New- York  with  teachers  and  missionaries  among  them. 
Among  these,  the  Oneida  and  Tuscarora  Indians  have  regular 
churches  and  ministers. 

h.  Missionaries,  teachers  und  mechanics  have  also  been  sent 
among  the  Cherokees,  Choctaws  and  Osages,  who  have  begun 
to  instruct  and  civilize  these  tribes. 

i.  There  are  probably  100,000  Indians  in  the  United  States, 
and  300,000  in  their  territories.  Most  of  them  are  savages, 
ignorant  of  Christianity  and  sunk  in  vice. 

Questions. — /.  Who  formerly  possessed  North  America  ?  Are 
there  any  Indian  tribes  remaining  ?  What  is  their  general  ap- 
pearance? What  tribes  are  found  on  the  Missouri,  arid  what 
can  you  say  of  them  ?  Where  are  the  Snake  Indians  found,  and 
what  is  their  character  ? 

II.  What  do  we  know  of  the  tribes  south  of  the  Missouri  ? 
What  is  the  state  of  some  nations  in  Mexico?  What  are  the 
most  important  tribes  within  the  United  States  ?  Find  the  situ- 
ation of  each  on  the  map.  What  nation  do  you  find  in  Florida  ? 
"What  is  the  state  of  these  Indians?  What  Indians  do  you  find 
north  of  the  Ohio  ?  What  were  the  principal  tribes  on  the  At- 
lantic ?  Where  are  the  Iroquois  settled  ?  What  has  been  done 
to  improve  other  Indians  of  our  country?  How  many  are 
there  probably  in  the  United  States  and  their  territories?  What 
is  their  general  character  ? 

WEST  INDIA  ISLANDS. 


A  field  of  Sugar  Cane. 
8 


88  BESCRfFTIOS   01=    COTTSTRIE?. 

236.  The  W.  Indies  are  a  number  of  very  fertile 
islands  King  between  North  and  South  America. 

237.  One  of  their  principal  productions  is  the  su- 
gar cane.     It  is  cultivated  by  slaves,  who  form  more 
than  half   the  population.      They   are  treated  with 
cruelty  in  many  of  the  islands. 

238'.  The  climate  is  mild  and  delightful  in  the 
winter  ;  bat  it  is  extremely  hot,  and  in  most  islands, 
dangerous  to  strangers  at  other  times. 

239.  The  West  Indies  produce   almost  all  the  fine 
fruits  and   plants  of  the  Torrid  Zone  in  abundance. 
Coffee  and  sugar  are  the  most  valuable,  which  are  ex- 
ported in  large  quantities 

240.  The  rains  in  these  islands  are  so  violent  as 
to  deluge  the  country  in  a  short  time  :    and   they  are 
subject  to  dreadful  hurricanes,  which  often  destroy 
buildings  and  crops. 

241.  These  islands  may  be  divided  into  the  Baha- 
mas, the  Greater  Antilles,  including  the  four  larger 
islands,  the  Canbbee  Islands,  and  the  Lesser  Antilles. 

Question*. — /.  Where  are  the  West  Indies?  In  what  latitude 
do  they  lie?  What  production  is  abundant?  What  is  their 
f  limate  ?  To  what  evils  are  they  subject  ?  How  may  these 
islands  be  divided  ?  Which  is  the  largest  island  ?  Which  is  the 
2d?  the  3d:  the  4th?  Which  is  the  most  populous? 

BAHAMA    I«LKS. 

242.  Cotton  is  the  most  important  production  of 
these  islands. 

Many  of  them,  particularly  Turk's  Isles,  abound 
in  natural  salt  ponds,  in  which  excellent  salt  is  formed 
by  the  heat  of  the  sun. 

lions  on  the  map. — /.  What  is  the  population  of  the 
Bahamas.'  What  is  the  chief  island?  What  Gulf  between  them 
and  Florida  ?  WThat  dangerous  bank  or  shoal  near  them  ? 

GREATER    ANTILLES. 

243.  Cuba,  Porto   Kico  and  the  south  eastern  part 
of  St.  Domingo,  or  Hispaniola,  belong  to  the  Spaniards. 

244.  Cuba  is  the  most  fertile  and  wealthy  of  these 
••!?.     It  produces  the  finest  tobacco  known. 


WEST  INDIES.  89 

245.  The  north-western  part  of  St.  Domingo,  now 
called  Hayti,  was  taken  from  the  French  by  their 
African  slaves,  who  have  since  formed  an  independ- 
ent republican  government,  and  begun  to  establish 
schools  and  churches. 

246.  Jamaica  is  less  fertile  than  these  islands,  but 
is  well  cultivated.     It  belongs  to  the  English. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  islands  are  called  the 
Greater  Antilles?  Which  is  the  largest?  Which  is  the  most 
eastern  ?  Which  belong  to  the  Spaniards  ?  What  can  you  say 
of  Cuba? 

//.  Are  there  any  mountains  in  Cuba?  In  what  direction, 
and  how  far  is  it  from  Florida  ?  What  is  the  chief  city  ?  What 
city  on  the  south  side  ?  Which  way  is  St.  Domingo  from 
Cuba?  What  part  belongs  to  the  Spaniards?  What  is  the 
chief  town  ?  Who  govern  the  remainder  of  the  island  ?  What 
places  in  this  part  ?  Where  is  Porto  Rico  ?  Where  is  Jamaica  ? 
What  can  you  say  of  it  ?  What  is  the  principal  place  ?  What 
is  the  class  and  comparative  population  of  each  of  these 
islands  ? 

CARIBBEE    ISLANDS. 

247.  Of  these  islands,  St.  Bartholomew's  belongs 
to  Sweden,  St.  Thomas  and  Santa  Cruz,  to  the  Danes. 
Guadaloupe  and  Martinico,  to  the  French,  and  the  re- 
mainder  on    the    map,    including  Trinidad,    to   the 
English. 

248.  Curazoa,  on  the  coast  of  S.  America,  with  the 
neighbouring  islands,  belongs  to  th«   Dutch.    These 
islands  are  sometimes  called  the  Lesser  Antilles. 

Questions  on  the  map. — I.  In  what  direction  are  the  Caribbee 
Islands  from  Porto  Rico?  Which  is  most  northern?  Which 
the  most  southern,  and  how  is  it  situated  ?  (See  map  of  S. 
America.) 

11.  Mention  the  comparative  population  of  each. 

BERMUDA    ISLANDS. 

249.  These   islands  are  usually  spoken  of  among 
the  West  India  Islands,  although  at  some  distance  from 
most  of  them. 

They  have  a  warm,  but  very  fine  climate,  and  are 
often  resorted  to  for  the  recovery  of  health. 


20  DESCRIPTION    OF   COUNTRIES-. 

Questions  on  the  map. — 7.  Where  are  the  Bermuda  Isle?? 
"What  is  their  population  ? 

CCL.         (For  the  Review.) 
APPLICATION  OF  GEOGRAPHY; 

Or  travels  on  the  Maps. 

To  discover  whether  you  understand  what  you  have  learneff, 
and  know  how  to  apply  it,  you  must  endeavour  to  travel  on 
the  map,  and  give  an  account  of  the  objects  you  meet  with. 
To  answer  the  questions,  you  must  remember  what  you  have 
learned,  or  look  back  to  the  account  of  North  America,  and  of 
Zones,  Climates,  Civilization,  Government  and  Religion. 

Map  of  North  America. — What  course  will  you  take  from 
the  eastern  coast  of  the  United  States  to  Greenland  ?  What 
countries  and  islands  shall  you  pass,  and  to  whom  do  they 
belong?  What  new  objects  shall  you  probably  see  on  your 
voyage?  (See  151.)  What  buy  lies  west  of  Greenland?  What 
ia  the  most  northern  passage  from  this  bay  towards  the  west, 
which  has  been  discovered  ?  How  far  west  has  it  been  exam- 
ined: In  what  directions  from  this  place  has  the  sea  been 
seen  ?  How  many  degrees  westward  is  Icy  Cape  ? 

As  it  is  probable  the  ice  will  not  permit  you  to  go  farther, 
you  can  return  and  examine  Hudson's  bay. 

What  straits  lead  into  this  bay  ?  What  country  lies  S.  oi 
ihese  straits?  What  can  you  say  of  the  people ?  (232.)  What 
Ibrts  and  trading  houses  do  you  find  on  Hudson's  Bay?  What 
course  will  you  take  to  reach  the  most  western  trading  house  on 
Peace  River?  How  do  you  like  the  climate  ;  (159.)  What 
mountains  are  near  you,  and  how  high  do  they  appear  to  be  ? 
Who  occupy  the  coast  west  of  these  mountains?  What  articles 
of  commerce  shall  you  find  among:  the  Indians  ?  (160.)  How  do 
the  traders  convey  their  furs?  What  course  must  you  take  to 
reach  Montreal  by  water?  What  language  shall  you  find  most 
common  there?  (165.) 

Map  of  the  United  S'ates. — What  towns  should  you  pass  in 
goinj  down  to  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Lawrence  ? 

You  will  find  the  banks  of  this  river  fertile,  and  lined  with 
house;,  forming  almost  a  continued  village. 

Through  what  river  can  you  pass  into  Lake  Champlain  ? 
What  communication  is  there  between  this  hike  and  the 


TRAVELS    ON    THE   MAP.  •         91 

Hudson  River  ?  What  states  lie  east  of  the  Hudson  ?  How  can, 
you  pass  fronf  the  Hudson  to  Lake  Erie  ? 

It  is  probable  that  a  canal  will  be  made  from  the  Ohio  to 
Lake  Erie,  and  the  canal  from  Lake  Erie  to  the  Hudson  will 
soon  be  completed. 

How  will  you  go  from  New- York  to  New-Orleans  by  water, 
through  the  United  States,  when  these  canals  are  finished? 
Through  whatTjranches  can  the  James  River  be  connected 
with  the  Ohio  ? 

It  is  also  expected  that  a  canal  will  be  made  from  the  Chesa- 
peake to  Delaware  Bay,  and  that  the  Delaware  River  will  be 
connected  with  the  Raritan,  which  empties  near  New-York. 

What  will  be  the  course  of  the  inland  navigation  from  Mon- 
treal to  Wilmington,  N.  C  if  these  canals  are  completed  ? 

As  the  canals,  which  have  been  mentioned,  are  not  yet  com- 
pleted, it  will  be  necessary  to  travel  by  land  through  the  Atlan- 
tic states. 

Beginat  Portland,  Maine,  and  describe  the  course  through 
the  seats  of  government  of  the  states  lying  on  the  Atlantic, 
till  you  reach  St.  Augustine,  and  mention  the  states  and  towns 
through  which  you  pass,  and  the  rivers  and  bays  you 
cross. 

What  states  and  what  seaports  do  you  pass  on  the  coast,  in 
returning  from  St.  Augustine  by  sea,  as  far  as  New- York  ?  and 
what  islands  ?  What  states,  ports  and  islands  do  you  pass  in  going 
through  Long  Island  Sound  to  Boston  and  Newfound- 
land ? 

If  you  wish  to  visit  the  western  coast  of  America,  you  will  be 
obliged  to  go  round  Cape  Horn. 

Describe  the  voyage  and  mention  the  countries  you  will  pass. 
(See  Map  of  the  World  and  Map  of  North  America.)  What  is 
the  first  country  of  N.  America  you  reachf  Describe  your 
course  along  the  coast  to  Alaska.  What  great  river,  with  an 
American  settlement  on  it,  do  you  find  ? 

It  is  usual  for  ships  that  visit  the  No^jtjPWest  Coast  to 
carry  the  furs  they  obtain  to  China,  where  they  are  very 

8* 


92  DESCRIPTION    OF   COUNTRIES. 

valuable.  On  their  course  they  often  stop  at  the  Sandwich 
Islands  for  refreshment. 

Describe  the  course  of  these  ships  to  Canton.  How  can 
they  go  to  the  United  States,  moving  still  westward,  so  as  to 
complete  their  voyage  round  the  world  ?  If  you  do  not  wish  to 
take  so  long  a  voyage,  at  what  port  in  Mexico  can  you  land, 
nearest  the  capital  :  What  do  you  find  remarkable  in  Mexico? 
(See  224,  225,  226.)  What  gulf  and  sea  mus^  you  cross,  in 
going  to  Trinidad  ?  What  course  will  you  take  to  go  to  New- 
Orleans,  and  stop  at  the  principal  islands  of  the  West  Indies  as 
yon  pass  ? 

.Map  of  the  United  States. — What  is  the  situation  of  New- 
Orleans  ?  What  states  and  places  shall  you  pass  in  going  up  the 
Mississippi  and  Ohio  to  Pittsburgh  ?  What  mountains  must  you 
cross  in  going  from  Pittsburgh  to  Philadelphia?  What  is  the 
first,  and  what  the  last  ridge ?  What  is  the  direct  course  to 
Washington  if  you  stop  at  Wheeling  on  the  Ohio  ?  In  what 
direction  from  Washington  is  Philadelphia:1  New-York? 
Boston  ?  Quebec  ?  Hudson's  Bay  ?  Missouri  ?  Cincinnati  ? 
New-Orleans  ?  Charleston  ?  Mexico  ?  The  West  Indies  ?  In 
what  direction  is  your  own  home,  and  how  many  degrees  or 
miles  distant?  What  places  shall  you  find  in  passing  up  the 
Connecticut  River  on  each  side  ?  What  on  the  Hudson  ?  The 
Delaware  ?  The  Susquehannah  ?  The  Potomac  ?  The  James  ? 
The  Savannah  ? 

SOUTH  AMERICA. 

251.  South  America  is  a  very  fertile  portion  of  the 
world,  distinguished  for  the  size  and  grandeur  of  its 
rivers,  and  the  height  and  extent  of  its  mountains. 

252.  It  abounds  in  precious  stones  ;  and  its  mines, 
with  those  of  Mexico,  furnish  much  more  gold   and 
silver  than  all  other  parts  of  the  world.     Its  soil  pro- 
duces many  medicinal  and  other  valuable  plants,  which 
are  not  found  in  other  countries. 

«s253.  Brazil  and  a  part  of  Guiana  are  settled  and 
governed  by  the  Portuguese  ;  but  most  of  South  Ame- 
rica by  the  Spaniards.  They  occupy  the  sea  coast 
principally  ;  and  the  interior  is  still  a  wilderness> 
traversed  only  by  Indians. 


SOUTH    AMERICA.  LO 

254.  The  northern  and  middle  portions  lie  within 
the  Torrid   Zone,  and  the  southern  extend  nearly  to 
the  Frigid. 

255.  The  climates  of  South  America  are  more  tem- 
perate than  those  in  the  same  latitudes  on  the  Eastern 
Continent,  for  reasons  which  appear  on  the  map,  in  the 
number  of  mountains  and  rivers,  and  the  neighbour- 
hood of  the  ocean.    (See.  p.  41,  §113— §114.) 

CCLVI.     (For  the  Review.) 

a.  The  Araucanians  of  Chili,  and  some  other  tribes  of  Indians 
in  South  America,  are  much  more  civilized  than  those  of  North 
America,  and  are  equally  brave  and  warlike. 

ft.  Some  tribes,  who  were  taught  the  Catholic  religion  and 
the  arts  o£  civilization  by  the  Jesuits,  sfill  remain  independent. 

«.  The  greater  part  of  the  population  of  South  America  con- 
sists of  Indians  who  are  subject  to  the  Spaniards,  and  almost  like 
slaves  in  their  character. 

d.  The  middle  classes  of  society  are  chiefly  Mestizoes,  or 
children  of  Spaniards  who  have  intermarried  with  Indians. 

ci  They  are  naturally  intelligent  and  sprightly,  and  some 
of  them  have  become  very  learned  men.  Others  of  this  class 
arfc  herdsmen,  resembling  savages  in  their  character*  and 
habits. 

/.  The  higher  classes  consist  of  European  and  American 
Spaniards  and  Portuguese,  who  are  generally  educated  and 
wealthy,  but  dissolute  in  their  morals. 

g..  The  government  of  Spain  formerly  discouraged  education 
and  the  circulafio*ri''of  books  among  the  people  of  South  Ame- 
rica. 

h.  Several  of  the"  Spanish  Provinces  having  now  becomr 
independent,  new  Institutions  have  been  founded,  and  inform- 
ation has  been  more  extensively  spread  by  books  and  newspa- 
pers. 

i.  There  are  universities  at  Carraccas,  Santa  Fe  de  Bogota,- 
Quito,  Lima,  and  Guamanga.  A  university  has  been  recently 
established  at  Cordova,  and  a  college  at>Buenos-Ayres,  with  a 
state  library  of  20,000  volumes. 

fc.  Chili  and  Buenos-Ayres  have  declared  themselves  inde- 
pendent of  Spain;  Venezuela  and  New  Granada  are  also 
declared  independent  under  the  name  of  Colombia  ;  but  these 
provinces  are  still  engaged  in  wars  with  the  armies  of  Spain, 


94  BKSCRIPTIOS    OF    COUNTRIES. 

Questions, — 7.  In  which  hemisphere,  and  in  what  zones,  is 
South  America  ?  How  is  it  bounded  ?  For  what  is  it  distin- 
guished •  What  are  its  most  valuable  productions  ?  How  is  it 
settled,  and  what  can  you  say  of  the  interior  ?  How  are  the 
climates  of  South  America,  compared  with  others  in  the  same 
latitude  ?  What  reason  can  you  discover  on  the  map,  for 
this? 

II.  What  is  the  character  of  the  Araucanians  '  What  is  the 
state  of  the  Indians  instructed  by  the  Jesuits  ?  Who  form  the 
greater  part  of  the  population  of  South  America '  What  can 
you  say  of  the  middle  classes,  and  what  is  their  character  ?  What 
can  you  say  of  those  who  have  become  herdsmen  ?  Who  form 
the  higher  classes  ?  Did  the  government  of  Spain  encourage 
learning  in  S.  America.'  What  alteration  has  taken  place  in 
the  government,  and  the  state  of  knowledge  What  univer- 
sities are  there  in  the  Spanish  Provinces  ?  What  countries  have 
declared  themselves  independent,  and  what  is  their  present 
situation  ? 

Questions  on  the  Chart  of  the  World. 

Civilization. — /.  Are  there  any  enlightened  countries  in 
S.  America  ?  What  countries  are  savage?  What  is  the  state  of 
the  remaining  countries  ?  • 

Government  and  Religion. — II.  What  is  the  religion  of  the 
savages  in  South  America:  What  of  the  civilized  countries? 
What  countries  have  a  republican  government  ?  What  is  the 
government  of  the  remainder  ? 

Population. — Which  is  the  most  populous  country  of  S. 
America  ?  What  countries  have  about  two  millions  of  inhab- 
itants ?  What  countries  have  only  one  million  ? 

Questions  on  the  map  of  isouth  America. 

Capes,  Bays,  and  Straiti. — I.  What  is  the  southern  cape 
of  S.  America?  What  is  the  most  nortfiern  ?  What  are  the 
most  eastern  and  western  capes  ?  Where  is  Cape  North  ? 
Where  is  Cape  Antonio?  Santa  Maria?  \Vhat  bays  on  the 
south-eastern  coast  ?  What  straits  at  the  south  ?  What  are  the 
principal  capes  and  gulfs  south  of  Peru  ?  What  north  of  this 
country  '. 

Mountains. — 7.  What  is  the  great  chain  of  mountains  in 
S.  America?  What  course  and  what  number  of  degrees  do 
they  run?  What  is  their  height  ?  (XLVII.  ;c.)  What  are  the 
principal  peaks  in  New  Granada  and  Cluli  ?  What  mountains 
are  there  in  Guiana  ? 

Riven. — 7.  What  is  the  largest  river  of  S.  America?  Where 
does  it  rise '  What  are  the  principal  branches  on  the 
north  ?  What  on  the  south  .'  Where  does  the  Beni  empty  ? 


S.OUTH  AMKKICA.  96 

What  is  the  second  river  of  South  America  ?     Where  is  the 
River  Orinoco. 

//.  Describe  the  Paraguay.  What  great  branches  form  it, 
and  which  is  the  principal  ?  What  other  branches  has  it,  and 
where  ?  What  river  west  of  it  empties  into  a  hike  ?  Whru 
are  the  chief  rivers  S.  of  it  ?  What  are  the  principal  rivers  on 
the  eastern  coast  of  Brazil  ?  What  is  the  third  river  in  S.  Ame- 
rica ?  Describe  its  course.  What  island  lies  at  the  mouth  ? 
Has  it  any  communication  with  the  Amazon  ?  What  two 
rivers  in  Guiana  are  most  known?  Where  is  the  River  Mag- 
dalena  ?  Describe  its  size,  course,  and  chief  branch.  What 
reason  can  you  see  on  the  map,  why  there  are  no  large  rivers 
on  the  western  coast  ? 

Boundaries  and  Capitals. — /.  What  countries  of  S.  America 
lie  north  of  the  Equator?  What  are  the  boundaries  and  capi- 
tals and  chief  towns  of  New  Grenada  -  Venezuela  ?  Suri- 
nam? French  Guiana?  What  three  countries  lie  principally 
between  the  Equator  and  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn  ?  What 
are  the  boundaries  and  capitals  of  Brazil  and  Peru  ? 

dmazonia  is  that  region  claimed  by  the  governments  of  Brazil 
and  Peru,  which  is  entirely  inhabited  by  Indians,  and  has  no 
Jixed  boundary. 

What  three  countries  lie  principally  south  of  the  Tropic  of 
Capricorn  ?  What  are  the  boundaries  and  capital  of  Chili  ? 
Of  La  Plata  or  Buenos  Ayres  ?  Why  do  you  find  no  towns  in 
Patagonia  ?  (See  Chart  and  p.  48,  §  130.) 

Islands — /.  What  islands  are  there  on  the  northern  coast  of 
South  America?  What  islands  lie  north  of  the  mouth  of  the 
Orinoco  ?  What  one  at  the  mouth  of  the  Amazon  ?  What 
islands  off  the  coast  of  Brazil?  On  what  island  is  Cape  Horn? 
What  islands  E.  of  it?  Where  are  the  newly  discovered  is- 
lands, called  the  South  Shetland  Isles  ? 

Where  is  Juan  Fernandez,  the  island  of  Robinson  Crusoe? 
What  island  N.  of  it  ?  What  is  the  chief  island  near  the  coast 
of  Chili? 

Latitudes  and  Longitudes. — //.  What  are  nearly  the  lati- 
tudes of  the  northern  and  middle  countries  of  S.  America  ? 
What  countries  of  America  north  of  the  Equator  have  the 
same  latitude  with  the  southern  countries  ?  (bee  Chart  of  the 
World.')  What  places  do  you  find  in  latitude  10°  north? 
What  places  under  the  Equator  ?  What  places  do  you  find 
12°  S.  of  the  Equator  ?  What  islands  are  in  about  20°  lati- 
tude ?  What  islands  in  the  Pacific  are  in  the  same  latitude  < 


36  DESCRIPTION  OF  COUNTRIES 

What  islands  and  countries  are  in  20°  N.  latitude?  What 
places  lie  in  34°  or  35°  S.  latitude?  What  is  the  latitude  of 
Cape  Horn  ?  What  other  land  can  you  find  in  the  same  lati- 
tude ?  Between  what  longitudes  does  S.  America  lie  ?  WThat 
parts  of  \.  America  are  in  the  same  longitude  with  Brazil? 
What  with  Peru  ?  What  countries  of  S.  America  have  noon  at 
the  same  time  with  Philadelphia  ?  (See  the  Chart.)  What  is 
the  difference  of  time  between  Philadelphia  and  the  eastern 
parts  of  Brazil  ?  What  is  the  difference  of  time  between  Peru 
and  London  ? 

NORTHERN  COUNTRIES  OF  S.  AMERICA. 
NFIW  GRANADA. 


Mountains  o/.Yetc  Granada. 

257.  New  Granada  contains  some  of  the  loftiest 
mountains  and  volcanoes  in  tbf-  world.  Quito,  one  of 
its  cities,  is  9,000  feet  abov<-  the  level  of  the  sea. 

It  is  hot  and  unhealthy  in  those  parts  which  are  low, 
but  the  mountainous  regions  have  a  delightful  climate. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  New  Granada  bounded? 
What  rivers  has  it  ?  What  is  the  capital  ?  In  what  latitude  is 
Quito  ? 

//.  What  is  the  mountain  near  which  it  stands  ?  What  other 
near,  which  is  the  highest  in  S.  America  ?  What  place  W.  of 
the  Andes  ?  Where  is  Popayan  ?  What  ports  on  the  Isthmus 
of  Darien  ?  What  ports  on  the  northern  coast  ?  Describe  the 
course  of  the  moujpMros  tn  A'w  Granada. 


SOUTH    AMERICA. 
VENEZUELA. 


fleets  of  an  Earthquake. 

258.  Venezuela,  as  well  as  most  of  the  countries  of 
S.  America,  is  subject  to  dreadful  earthquakes,  one  of 
which  destroyed  the  city  of  Caraccas,  a  few  years  since. 
On  this  account  the  houses  ar^  now  generally  built  of 
one  story. 

It  is  a  rich,  fertile  country,  vvitn  ihe  usual  climate  of 
the  Torrid  Zone.  It  has  become  independent  of  Spain. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Venezuela  bounded? 
What  is  the  capital?  What  is  the  port  of  Caraccas?  What 
other  ports  ? 

//.  Where  is  Truxillo?  Merida?  St.  Thomas?  What  other 
town  on  the  Orinoco  ?  What  island  at  the  mouth  ?  What  other 
island  on  the  coast  belonging  to  Venezuela?  What  portion  el' 
Guiana  is  included  in  Venezuela? 

GUIANA. 

259.  Guiana  is  that  part  of  S.  America  which  lies  be- 
tween the  Orinoco  and  Amazon.     It  is  divided  among 
the  Spanish,  Portuguese,  French,  Dutch  and  English. 

It  is  a  very  fertile  country,  but  hot,  moist,  and  un- 
healthy. It  is  chiefly  inhabited  by  bold  and  warlike 
tribes  of  Indians,  some  of  whom  feed  on  human  flesh. 

The  Anaconda,  a  very  large  serpent  like  those  of 
the  Asiatic  islands,  is  found  in  Guiana,  which  crushes 
.knimals  to  death,  and  then  devours  them. 


DESCRIPTION    OF    COUJfTKIEs'. 

The  Anaco'.da.     (Guiana.') 


Question*  on  the  map  — J.  What  great  riv.ers  inclose  Guiana  ? 
How  is  it  bounded  ?     Among  whom  is  it  divided  ? 

Surinam  is  Dutch  Guiana,  and  Demarara  English  Guiana* 
II.  What  river  separates  Demarara  and  Surinam '     What 
other  rivers  are  the  principal?      What  places  on  the  coast, 
and  where  ?     WThat  missions  are  there  in  the  interior  ? 

MIDDLE  COUNTRIES  OF  S.  AMERICA. 
PERU. 


Travelling  over  the.  Mountains. 
260.  The  commerce  of  Peru  is  chiefly  carried  on 
over  the  mountains,  where  the  steep  narrow  paths 
can  only  be  travelled  by  mules,  and  the  /'"wf»,.or  F^ 


>OUTH    AMERICA. 


It  is  a  mountainous,  and  therefore  temperate  prov- 
ince, under  the  government  of  Spain.  It  is  chiefly 
inhabited  near  the  Andes. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Peru  bounded?  What 
mountains  pass  through  it?  What  is  the  capital,  and  where? 

II.  What  is  the  nearest  seaport  ?    Where  is  Cusco,  the  an- 
f  lent  Indian  capital  ?     What  are  the  principal  places  besides 
this  E.  of  the  mountains  ?  What  places  near  the  sea,  N.  of  Lima? 
AMAZONIA. 

26 1 .  This  name  has  been  gw  n  to  the  whole  interior 
of  South  America,  lying  chiefly  on  the  Amazon  and  its 
branches,  which  is  scarcely  known  to  Europeans. 

It  is  a  temperate  and  very  fertile  region,  entirely 
inhabited  and  governed  by  Indian  tribes  of  various 
characters.  Son^fcf  them  are  powerful,  and  skilled 
in  a  few  of  the  arts. 

Questions  on  the  map. — 7.  How  is  Amazonia  bounded  ? 
What  rivers  has  it?  What  settlements  are  nearest  to  it  in 
Brazil,  Peru,  and  La  Plata  ? 

BRAZIL. 


Slaves  searching  jur   Diamonds. 
262.   Almost  all  the  diamonds  used  in  the  world  are 
now   obtained  from   Brazil.     They  are  found  in  the 
sands  of  the  rivers,  and  washed  out  by  slaves. 

It  is  an  extensive  kingdom,  subject  to  the  king  of 
Portugal.  It  is  generally  fertile,  temperate  and  healthy, 
9 


100 


»T 


The  civilized  inhabitants,  who  are  found  almost  eQ' 
tirely  on  the  coast,  are  said  to  be  improving  in  char- 
acter and  information. 

Qucttioni  on  Iht  map. — /.  How  is  Brazil  bounded?  What  ia 
its  capital  What  great  river  has  it  in  the  north  ? 

II.  What  ports  N.  of  Rio  Janeiro?  What  places  S.  W. 
of  it?  What  mines,  and  mining  towns  N.  of  Rio  Janeiro? 
What  others  in  the  western  part  of  Brazil?  What  islands  off 
the  coast  ? 

SOUTHERN*  COUNTRIES. 
LA  PLATA  OR  BUENOS  AYRE5. 


it,,  i-   <  ,  (  .  oj   /.a   1  ,nta. 

263.  The  plains  of  La  Plain  are  frequented  by  herds- 
men, with  immense  droves  of  cattle,  almost  wild, 
which  they  catch  with  a  noose. 

A  large  part  of  this  province  has  become  mdepen 
ent,  under  the  name  of  the  United  Provinces  of  South 
America.     The  people  have  begun  to  improve  rapid- 
Iv,  in  knowledge  and  character. 

It  contains  extensive  fertile  plains  called  Pampas 
The  richest  mines  of  silver  in  the  world  are  in  this 


the  map.— I.  How  is  La  Plata  bounded?   What 
is  the  capital  '.    Where  is  Montevideo  ?  .        , 

//.  What  three   places  are  there  on  the  Paraguay  River 
Where   is  Mendoza:     What  two   place?  north  of  it.     VMiat 
places  and  what  mines  in  the  northern  part  ol   La  l 
What  lake  ? 


SOUTH    AMERICA.  10J 

CHILI. 


Bridges  in  Chili. 

264  The  people  of  Chili  are  obliged  to  pass  Iheic 
streams  by  means  of  ropes,  because  they  are  too  rapid 
to  allow  the  building  of  bridges  like  ours. 

Chili  is  a  mountainous,  temperate,  productive,  and 
healthy  country,  resembling  Switzerland.  It  is  now 
independent  of  Spain. 

The  people  are  intelligent,  hospitable  and  verj  hu- 
mane to  their  slaves,  but-little  cultivated. 

The  Araucanians  are  an  independent  nation  of 
brave,  intelligent  Indians,  in  the  southern  part. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /  How  is  Chili  bounded  ?  What  ex- 
tensive desert  is  there  on  the  north?  What  is  the  capital  ? 

II.  What  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  peaks  of  the  Andes 
in  Chili  ?    What  place  near  this   mountain  ?    What  are  the 
principal  seaports?    Where  is  Valparaiso?    What  island  near 
the  southern  part  ?    What  islands  off  the  coast  ? 
PATAGONIA, 

AKD    THE    SOUTHERN    ISLES. 

265.  Patagonia  is  a  country  very  little  known.  It  is 
inhabited  by  Indian  tribes,  some  of  which  are  said  to 
be  of  gigantic  size.  The  southern  part  and  the  islands 
around  it,  are  cold,  dreary,  inhospitable  regions.  " 

South  Georgia,  Sandwich  Land,  and  the  newly  dis- 
covered South  Shetland  Isles,  are  barren  rocks  cov- 
e'red  with  perpetual  snow.  The  coast  is  lined  with 


102  DESCRIPTION    d 

Kiilins  Seals. 


perpendicular  mountains  ot'  ice.  and  cannot  be  visjjtecl 
by  ships  in  the  winter.  These  islands  are  inhabited 
only  by  sea  fowl?  and  seals,  and  are  resorted  to  for  the 
purpose  of  killing  seal.*,  who«p  skin*  are  valuable. 

Qutstions  on  Ike  Map  of  tfu  World. — /.  How  is  Patagonia 
bounded?  What. island?  E.  of  it.;  What  other  islands  lie  S.  of 
it  ?  What  is  the  most  southern  lanj  yet  discovered  ? 

CCLXVI.          (For  the  Rerun:.") 
TRAVELS  OX  THE  MAP  OF  S.  AMERICA. 

The  greater  part  of  South  America  is  a  wilderness,  and  the 
Wars  in  the  civilized  parts,  which  are  not  vet  finished,  render 
travelling  unsafe,  even  there. 

What  is  the  most  direct  cource^  from  the  eastern  coast  of  the 
United  States  to  Lasruira.  the  port  of  Caraccas?  What  isl- 
ands do  you  pass  ?  What  calamity  did  Caraccas  meet  with  a 
few  years  since  ?  (258.)  What  port?  and  river  shall  you  pass 
in  going  to  Demarara  ?  To  whom  Joes  this  settlement  belong? 
(-259.)  What  places,  islands,  and  capes  do  you  pass,  in  going 
from  Demarara  to  Pemambuco :  What  do  you  pass  in  going 
from  this  place  to  Rio  Janeiro  ?  What  do  you  find  remarkable 
in  Brazil?  (262.) 

You  must  be  cautious  in  travelling  in  Brazil,  or  in  Guiana. 
There  are  several  tribes  of  Indians  who  seek  every  opportunity 
of  killing  persons,  in  order  to  devour  them. 

If  you  are  allowed  by  the  governor  to  visit  the  mines  of  gold 
and  diamond;,   (which  is  not  likely,)  what  course  will   you 
take?  -What  toTrns  shall  you  pass  in  defending  the  River 
,-uay  to  Bnenos  Ayres?  What  do  you  find  remarkable: 


TRAVELS — CITIES    OF    AMERICA.  103 

You  must  also  be  cautious  in  travelling"  here  not  to  meet  the 
Guachos,  or  herdsmen.  They  would  rob  you,  even  of  your 
clothes,  without  hesitation. 

What  public  Institutions  do  you  find  in  La  Plata,  and  what 
appears  to  be  the  state  of  the  people  ?  What  course  will  you 
take  by  sea  to  Valparaiso,  the  chief  port  of  Chili?  What  coun- 
try and  islands  do  you  pass,  and  what  can  you  say  of  them  ? 
What  places  on  the  coast  of  Chili  ?  Describe  the  situation  of 
Chili?  How  do  you  like  the  Chilian  bridges ?  Is  the  climate 
agreeable  ? 

As  the  Desert  of  Atacama,  between  Chili  and  Peru,  is  al- 
most impassible,  it  is  best  to  proceed  to  Peru  by  sea. 

Describe  your  course  to  Lima,  and  the  ports  you  pass. 
How  must  you  cross  the  mountains  to  visit  Cusco  ?  What  can 
you  say  of  this  place?  In  what  direction  from  Cusco,  and  how 
far  are  the  celebrated  mines  of  Potosi  ? 

If  you  are  willing  to  encounter  difficulties  and  dangers  to 
gratify  your  curiosity,  you  may  perhaps  be  able  to  go  along 
the  eastern  side  of  the  Andes,  to  Quit®. 

What  places  shall  you  pass,  and  what  river?  What  lofty 
mountains  are  now  near  you  ? 

In  this  place,  you  will  often  see  clouds  and  storms  beloV  you, 
while  you  have  clear  sky  above  you  and  enjoy  constant  spring ; 
but  you  must  fly  from  yotir  house,  if  an  earthquake  should 
occur. 

What  course  will  you  take  to  Panama,  Porto  Bello  and  Car- 
thagena  ?  And  how  find  the  shortest  way  to  your  home  ? 
CCLXXVII.      CITIES  OF  AMERICA.    (Fur   the  Review.) 

America  is  much  less  distinguished  for  the  number  and  size 
of  its  cities  than  Europe  and  Asia.  There  are  none  which  be- 
long to  the  four  first  classes  of  cities  in  the  world,  and  only  five 
which  are  above  the  seventh  class. 

In  the  cities  of  the  UNITED  STATES  the  houses  are  generally 
built  of  brick.  The  streets  are  broader  and  more  neat  than 
in  most  European  cities  ;  and  are  usually  paved,  and  furnished 
•with  side  walks  for  foot  passengers.  They  are  adorned  with 
churches  and  other  public  buildings,  which  often  have  consid- 
erable beauty.  Perhaps  no  cities  in  the  world  are  more  dis- 
tinguished for  the  number  of  humane  and  charitable  Institutions, 
than  those  of  the  United  States. 

The  towns   of  the  northern   United    States    especially  of 
New  England,  are  seldom  closely    built.     The  houses  are 
9* 


103(6)  DESCRIPTION*   OF  COUNTRIES. 

generally  of  wood,  separated  by  gardens  and  cultivated  grounds ; 
and  the  streets  are  usually  shaded  with  trees.  These  circum- 
stances give  them  peculiar  beauty. 

The  towns  of  the  Western  States,  and  of  the  western  parts 
of  New- York  and  Pennsylvania,  are  laid  out  more  regularly, 
and  the  buildings  are  generally  more  elegant,  than  in  the  older 
towns  of  the  Atlantic  states. 

In  the  Southern  States,  the  people  are  so  much  scattered 
that  there  are  few  towns  or  villages,  and  only  a  small  number 
of  places  of  considerable  size. 

Most  of  the  principal  cities  of  the  United  States  are  seaports, 
and  the  largest  are  situated  on  islands  or  peninsulas.  New- 
York  and  New  Orleans  are  on  islands  ;  Boston,  Philadelphia 
and  Charleston,  are  on  peninsulas  ;  Hartford,  Albany.  Tren- 
ton, Richmond,  and  Savannah,  are  capitals,  at  the  head  of 
sloop-navigation  on  their  respective  rivers. 

The  seats  of  government  of  the  states  are  often  very  small 
towns,  chosen  only  on  account  of  their  central  situation. 

WASHINGTON-  was  laid  out  on  an  extensive  and  regular 
plan,  as  the  seat  of  government  for  the  United  States.  It  is  not 
yet  closely  built,  and  the  clusters  of  house,  with  extensive 
vacant  spots,  appear  like  a  number  of  villages.  The  Capitol, 
for  the  meetings  of  Congress,  and  the  President's  house,  are 
magnificent  buildings. 

ffe\D-York  is  among  the  first  commercial  cities  in  the  world. 
It  is  situated  on  a  beautiful  and  spacious  harbour,  formed  by  the 
Hudson  River  and  the  passage  from  Long-Island  Sound,  here 
called  the  East  River.  The  streets  rise  from  the  water,  and 
are  laid  out  with  considerable  regularity. 

Philadelphia  is  the  first  city  in  the  Union  in  manufactures. 
It  is  remarkable  for  the  regularity  and  neatness  of  its  streets, 
and  for  the  beauty  of  its  environs.  Its  inland  trade  is  extensive, 
market  is  said  to  be  unrivalled. 

Baltimore  is  situated  on  a  bay  running  up  from  the  Patapsco 
River.  It  is  divided  by  a  small  stream  into  two  parts,  the  town, 
and  Fell's  Point.  The  latter  is  the  principal  seat  of  commer- 
cial business.  This  city  has  increased  with  great  rapidity.  It 
is  adorned  with  the  only  monument  to  the  memory  of  Washing- 
ton in  our  country. 

Boston,  is  the  principal  city  of  New  England,  in  commerce, 
population  and  wealth.  It  is  situated  on  an  irregular  penin- 
sula, and  the  streets  are  narrow  and  crooked.  The  harbour  is 
excellent,  adorned  with  islands,  and  surrounded  by  a  beautiful 
?r4  highly  cultivated  country. 


CITIES    OF    AMERICA.  163(c) 

^\'tw  Orleans,  from  its  situation  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi, is  the  centre  of  trade  for  the  extensive  country  wa- 
Lered  by  this  river  and  its  branches.  The  ground  on  whifch 
it  stands  is  lower  than  the  river,  in  many  parts  of  the  town, 
and  extremely  wet.  The  situation  and  climate  render  it  very 
unhealthy  in  the  warm  season,  especially  to  strangers. 

Charleston  is  regularly  built  on  a  low  peninsula  between 
Ashley  and  Cooper  rivers,  which  form  a  fine  harbour  at  their 
junction.  It  is  a  place  of  considerable  wealth  and  commerce, 
and  is  the  largest  city  in  the  Southern  States,  except  Balti- 
more. 

Albany  is  a  flourishing  city,  finely  situated  for  trade,  at  tlin 
head  of  sloop-navigation  on  the  Hudson  River.  Near  this 
place  the  canals  from  Lake  Champlain  and  Lake  Erie  unife 
with  the  Hudson. 

Salem  is  a  flourishing  and  wealthy  place,  the  second  in  New- 
England,  in  commerce.  It  is  distinguished  for  the  extent  of 
its  trade  with  the  East  Indies. 

Providence  is  the  third  commercial  town  in  New-England. 
It  is  distinguished  for  its  college,  and  the  ^numerous  manufac- 
turing establishments  in  its  neighbourhood. 

Richmond  is  the  seat  of  trade  for  the  interior  of  Virginia. 
It  is  situated  on  a  beautiful  declivity,  on  the  banks  of  James 
River.  Norfolk  is  the  principal  seaport  of  Virginia. 

Cincinnati  is  the  most  populous  place,  except  New  Orlean?. 
in  the  Western  States,  and  is  increasing  with  great  rapidity  in 
commerce  and  population. 

Of  the  large  towns  of  the  United  States,  Savannah  is  one  of 
the  most  flourishing  in  commerce.  Natchez,  the  principal  town 
of  Mississippi,  is  also  flourishing  in  trade.  Newbern  is  the 
largest  town  of  North  Carolina,  and  has  a  valuable  trade  with 
the  West  Indies.  Knoxville  and  Nashville  are  the  principal 
towns  of  Tennessee,  and  the  seats  of  literary  institutions.  Lex* 
ington  is  a  large  and  handsome  town,  the  seat  of  Transylvania 
University.  Pittsburg  is  the  head  of  navigation  on  the  Ohio, 
and  the  centre  of  trade  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Western 
States.  Newark  is  the  largest  town  in  New-Jersey,  distin- 
guished for  its  flourishing  manufactures.  New  Haven  is  one 
of  the  most  beautiful  towns  in  the  United  States,  distinguished 
as  the  seat  of  Yale  College.  Hartford  is  a  flourishing  place., 
both  in  trade  and  manufactures.  Neicporl  is  beautifully  situ- 
ated, on  a  fine  harbour  of  great  size  and  depth.  Burlington, 
Windsor  and  Middlebury,  the  principal  towns  cf  Vermont^  are 
small  but  flourishing  pla^r*. 


04  DESCRIETIOS    OK    COUSTR1ES. 

consequence  of  its  numerous  inland  seas,  and  the  gene- 
ral cultivation  of  the  soil. 

270.  In  the  countries  of  Europe  lying  north  of  55' 
of  latitude,  the  cold  is  very  severe,  and  the  inland 
seas  are  frozen  over  in  the  winter. 

271.  ID  the  middle  countries,  between  45C  and   55% 
the  climate  is  much  milder  than  it  is   in  the  northern 
United  States,  between  40'  and  -} 

..  In  the  southern  countries  snow  seldom  falls, 
and  vegetables  grow  the  greater  part  of  the  year. 

273.  Sciences,  arts  and  manufactures  have  reached 
a  higher  degree  of  perfection  in  Europe,  than  in  any 
other  part  of  the  world. 

CCLXX1V.         (For  the  Review.) 

a.  All  other  civilized  countries  of  the  world  were  peopled 
from  Europe  ;    and  all  the  European  states,  except  Germany, 
Prussia,   Austria,  Switzerland    and   Italy,  possess   colonies   in 
the  other  quarters  of  the  globe 

b.  There  are  many  universities  in  Europe.     The  most  cele- 
brated   are   those   of   Cambridge   and    Oxford    in   England : 
Edinburgh,  in  Scotland;    Leyden,  in  the  Netherlands;    Got- 

and  Leipsic,  in  Germany;  Vienna,  in  Austria;  Bo- 
logna, in  Italy ;  and  Salamanca,  in  Spain ;  which  hare  produced 
the  most  learned  men  the  world  ever  saw. 

c.  There  are  few  countries  well  provided  with  schools  for 
the  instruction  of  the  poor.     In  the  Catholic  countries,  the 
people  are  forbidden  to  read  the  bible. 

d.  The  common  people  are  generally  ignorant,  superstitious 
and  degraded,  and  much  oppressed  by  the  nobles. 

e.  The  higher  classes  are  generally  well  educated  and  refined, 
but  indolent  and  luxurious. 

/.  In  most  countries  of  Europe,  rice  is  more  prevalent  among 
all  classes,  and  morality  and  piety  are  less  regarded,  than  in  the 

- 

*  Questions. — /.  What  is  the  size  and  population  of  Europe  : 
How  is  its  climate,  compared  with  that  of  America  and  Asia : 
What  is  the  climate  in  each  division?  What  is  the  state  of  the 
arts  and  scien. 

//.  What  are  some  of  the  principal  universities  ?  Are  there 
generally  schools  for  the  poor?  What  is  the  character  of  the 
common  people?  What  is  that  of  the  higher  classes  ?  What  is 
the  general  state  of  morals  in  Europe  ? 


105 

Questions  on  the  Chart  of  the  World. 

Civilization. — /.  Are  there  any  parts  of  Europe  barba-v 
rous?  What  country  is  half-civilized?  What  are  only  civilized f 
What  are  enlightened  ? 

Government. — II.  What  countries  have  absolute  monar- 
chies, or  despotic  governments?  What  country  has  a  repub- 
lican government  ?  What  countries  have  limited  monarchies  ? 
How  is  Germany  governed? 

Religion. — //.  What  countries  of  Europe  are  Protestant? 
In  what  country  does  the  Greek  religion  prevail?  What  coun- 
try is  Mahometan  ?  What  countries  are  Catholic  entirely? 
What  are  divided  between  Protestant  and  Catholic  ? 

Population. — //.  What  country  of  Europe  has  the  largest 
number  of  inhabitants?  What  two  are  next?  What  is  the 
population  of  Great- Britain,  including  England,  Scotland  and 
Ireland  ?  What  is  that  of  each  country  ?  What  countries  have 
ten  millions  of  inhabitants  ?  What  have  13  millions  ?  What  is 
the  population  of  Turkey?  Of  the  Netherlands?  What  coun- 
tries have  two  or  three  millions  of  inhabitants  ?  What  coun- 
tries have  a  smaller  number  ?  What  country  has  the  least  num- 
ber of  inhabitants  ? 

Questions  on  the  map  of  Europe. 

L  How  is  Europe  bounded  on  the  N.,  E-,  S.,  and  W.  ? 
Mention  particularly  the  seas  on  the  south,  and  the  moun- 
tains and  rivers  on  the  east.  What  divides  it  from  Africa 
and  Asia  ?  What  is  the  northern  cape  of  Europe  ?  What  the 
most  southern  ?  Between  what  latitudes  and  longitudes  does 
it  lie  ?  What  capes  in  Spain  ?  In  Ireland  ?  England  ?  On  the 
coast  of  the  Mediterranean  '  What  is  the  northern  cape  of 
Africa  ? 

Seas,  Gulfs  and  Straits. — /.  What  four  seas  are  there  in  the 
northern  part  of  Europe?  What  two  gulfs  in  the  Baltic? 
What  arfe  the  straits  or  sounds  called,  which  lead  into  the 
Baltic  Sea?  What  five  seas  are  there  in  the  south  of  Europe  ? 
What  three  gulfs,  in  the  Mediterranean  ?  What  straits  lead  into 
the  Mediterranean  ?  What  countries  are  0:1  the  Baltic  ?  On  the 
North  Sea?  What  on  the  Mediterranean?  The  Archipelago? 
Black  Sea  ?  What  straits  lead  into  the  Sea  of  Marmora  ?  What 
straits  between  England  and  France  ?  What  channels  near  the 
British  Isles  ? 

Mountains.— I.  What  three  chains  of  mountains  in  the 
northern  part  of  Europe?  In  what  direction  do  they  run? 
What  four  chains  in  the  middle  of  Europe  ?  What  are  the 
principal  chains  in  the  south  of  Europe  ? 

11.  Where  is  the  Sierra  JVforena  ?    What  are  the  hiffbsst 


14jp 

mountains  in  Europe  f*    What  chain  is  the  longest 

the  situation  and  height  of  .Mount  Heckla  in  Iceland.     Mount 

Vesuvius,  in  Italy.     Mouiit  Etra,  in  Sicily. 

Lakes. — /.  What  two  remarkable  lakes  in  Sweden  ? 
two  in  Russia  ?     11.  How  large  ?  (Sie  LXIH.  b.  ice.) 

Hirers. — /.  What  three  rivers  in  the  north  of  Russia? 
What  are  the  two  chief  rivers  of  Sweden  ?  What  four  rivers 
empty  into  the  Baltic  from  the  south?  What  river  enters  the 
Skaggerack  from  Norway  ~:  What  two  rivers  of  England  empty 
into  the  North  Sea  ?  (The  T\cetd  and  the  Forth  tmpty 
from  Scotland.)  What  four  from  the  continent ?  (The  Rhine 
passe*  through  Lake  Constance  in  Switzerland.) 

What  river  empties  into  the  British  Channel ?  What  two 
into  the  Bay  of  Biscay?  What  five  enter  the  Atlantic  from 
Spain '.  What  two  pass  into  the  Mediterranean  from  Spain 
and  France  ?  (The  Rhone  passes  through  the  Lake  of  Genera.) 
What  four  enter  the  Black  Sea  ? 

//.  Describe  each  of  the  rivers  mentioned,  beginning  at  the 
north,  and  proceeding  along  the  coast,  (t.  e.  tell  trhere  it  rites, 
what  course  it  run*,  where  it  empties,  and  tchat  is  its  class  and 
comparative  sise.)  What  river  near  Rome  ?  What  one  enters 
the  Gulf  of  Venice :  .Describe  each.  What  branches  has  the 
Danube  ?  What  river  empties  into  the  Sea  of  Azof?  What 
is  the  largest  river  in  Europe."  Which  are  the  two  largest  iu 
the  west  of  Europe  ? 

Boundaries  and  Capital*. — /.  What  are  the  five  countries 
of  Europe  lying  N.  of  55 :  latitude  ?  What  are  the  boundaries 
of  each  >  What  are  the  eight  middle  countries,  between  55° 
sud  45°  ?  What  are  the  boundaries  of  each  ?  What  are  the 
lour  S.  of  45D.  and  their  boundaries  ?  What  parts  of  Asia  and 
America  are  in  the  same  latitude  with  the  northern  countries 
of  Europe  ?  What  with  the  middle  and  southern  countries  ? 
What  are  the  capitals  of  the  five  northern  countries  and  Po- 
land ?  What  are  the  capitals  of  the  eight  middle  countries  ? 
Of  the  four  southern  ? 

Islands. — /.  What  are  the  two  largest  islands  west  of  Eu- 

-t  are  the  islands  N.  of  Europe:  What  are  t'., 
ol  Great  Britain :     West  of  Scotland  ?     In  the   British  Chan- 
in  the  Baltic  Sea?     What  are  the  two  largest  in  the 
Mediterranean  ? 

//.  What  are  those  near  Spain  ?  Those  near  Italy  ?  Those 
between  Italy  and  Turkey?  What  one  S.  of  Sicily :  What 
are  the  chief  islands  in  and  near  the  A  rchipelago  ? 

three    capitals 


NORTH E UN   Kt'ROi".  tiJ, 

m  the  latitude  of  the  Shetland  Isles  and  Greenland ; 
What  four  others  in  that  of  London,  and  the  Straits  of  Bell- 
i.-les  in  N.  America  ?  What  capitals  between  45°  and  50°  of 
latitude  ?  What  places  in  the  latitude  of  Halifax  ?  Of  Boston 
What  capitals  nearly  in  the  latitude  of  New- York  and  Madrid . 
What  in  that  of  Washington  ?  Trace  the  line  of  36°  latitude 
(which  is  pearly  that  of  Raleigh,  N.  Carolina,)  to  the  Caspian 
Sea,  and  mention  the  places  and  coasts  on  and  near  it.  Find 
the  longitudes  of  London — Petersburgh — Paris — Rome — Con- 
r-tantinople.  About  what  time  is  it  at  St.  Petersburgh  an«i 
Constantinople,  when  it  is  noon  at  Philadelphia?  (See  f/ic 
Chart  of  the  World.)  What  time  in  Sweden,  Austria  and  Italy. 
What  in  London,  the  west  of  France,  and  Spain  ? 

NORTHERN  COUNTRIES  OF  EUROPE. 

Russia — Poland — Sweden — Norway — Denmark — 

Scotland. 

275.  The  northern  countries  of  Europe  lie  between 
55°  and  72°  of  north  latitude.     The   inland  portions 
are  much  colder  than  any  part  of  the  United  States  • 
but  the  parts  near  the  ocean  are  temperate. 

276.  They  generally  produce  some  fruits,  and  a  suf- 
ficient supply  of  grain  and  vegetables  ;  but  they  are 
best  fitted  for  pasturage. 

277.  In  Norway,  and  other  parts  in  or  near  the 
Frigid  Zone,  the  inhabitants  are  often  obliged  to  eat 
mos?.  and  even  the  bark  of  trees,  for  want  of  grain. 

CCLXXVIII.         (For  the  Review.') 
a.  In  many  parts  of  these  countries,  the  sun  sets  so  late  and 

rises  so  early  in  summer,  that  they  can  see  to  read  and  write 

ut  midnight.     la  winter  they  have  only  an  hour  or  two  of  light 

at  noon. 
6.  These  countries  have  usually  neither  spring  nor  autumn. 

The  change  is  sudden  from  winter  to  summer,  and  grain  is 

reaped  in  a  few  weeks  after  it  is  sown. 

c.  The  principal  exports  of  these  countries  are  dried  fish, 
iron,  copper  and  hemp,  with  timber,  tar,  &c.  for  ship  build- 
ing. 

d.  The  people  are  generally  brave,  hardy  and  industrious, 
and  more  virtuous  than  in  other  parts  of  Europe. 

--. — L    Where  do  the  five    northern   count'-' 
10 


Europe  lie?  In  what  zone,  and  in  what  part  of  it  are  u. 
ihem  ?  What  is  the  general  climate  of  that  part  of  the  Tem- 
perate Zone  ?  (See  p.  41,  Hi  2.)  Is  any  part  of  them  in  the 
"Frigid  Zone  ?  What  then  will  be  their  climate  ?  (See.  p.  39,  $97.) 
What  do  they  generally  produce  ?  What  do  the  people  often 
eat  in  some  of  these  countries  ? 

//.  What  can  you  say  of  their  nights  f  Whai  ofotheir  sea- 
sons? What  are  the  principal  exports  of  these  countries  ?  What 
is  the  character  of  the  people. 

RUS.SU  IN    EUROPE. 


travelling  house. 

•'.  It  is  a  favourite  winter  amusement  in  Russia  to 
slide  down  artificial  hills,  built  of  timber  and  covered 
with  ice.  The  Russians  often  travel  in  small  house?, 
placed  on  sleds. 

Russia  i=  the  largest  country  in  Europe,  extending 
into  the  middle  and  southern  parts  of  it,  but  not  thickly 
settled.  It  is  intensely  cold  and  unproductive  in  the 
north,  but  temperate  and  productive  in  the  south.  It 
is  generally  very  level. 

The  common  people  of  Russia  are  generally  ignorant 
and  rude,  or  barbarous  ;  and  most  of  them  are  slaves  to 
the  nobles.  Great  efforts  are  now  made  to  improvethem. 

The  Russian  empire  embrace!' nearly  half  of  Europe, 
with  a  large  part  of  Asia,  and  extends  into  the  northern 
parts  of  North  America. 


NORTHERN     EUROPr  !09 

Questions  on  Ike  map. — /.  Describe  the  boundaries,  capital 
and  rivers  of  Russia. 

//.  What  two. towns  are  on  the  White  Sea?  What  is  their 
class  and  population  ?  What  place  is  at  the  head  of  the  Baltic 
Sea?  Describe  the  two  principal  places  in  Finland.  Whut 
rivers  in  Finland  ?  What  city  N.  W.  of  Petersburg^,  which  is 
its  seaport?  What  two  other  seaports  on  the  Baltic  S.  of  Pe- 
tersburgh,  nnd  how  situated?  Describe  the  situation  and  size  of 
Moscow.  What  three  places  on  the  Volga  N.  of  Moscow,  and 
of  what  size  ?  What  three  places  between  Moscow  and  the 
Dnieper  ?  What  two  on  the  Dnieper  ?  What  two  ports  on  the 
Black  Sea  ?  At  what  places  in  Russia  do  you  find  universities  f 
(Prod.  276.) 

Spitzbergen  and  Nova  Ztmbla  are  frozen  uninhabited  is, 
ands,  btlcmging  io  Rusfia.     Where  are  they  situated  ? 
POLAND. 


Saltf  Mines  of  Cracorv. 

280.  Poland  was  formerly  an  independent  kingdom, 
and^was  celebrated  for  the  suit  mines  of  Cracow,  which 
contain  whole  villages  of  miners. 

It  was  divided  some  years  since  between  Austria 
Prussia  and  Russia.  The  greater  part  of  it  is  now  uu- 
der  the  government  of  the  Emperor  of  Russia. 

It  is  a  cold,  but  level  and  productive  couutrv,  with  *. 
people  generally  rude  and  ignorant. 

on  the  map. — 7.   What  rivers  an*  'bund  in  IV- 


,  1V>  .iPTIO.V    -  .  KIES-. 

land?    Which  of  them  are  connected  by  canals  :    Where  i; 
Warsaw,  the  capital  ? 

//.  What  two  places  east  of  this?  Where  is  Cracow  ?  What 
; ties  do  you  find? 

SWEDEN". 


.2  Mine  in   Sn-cden. 

.  The  great  wealth  of  Sweden  consists  in  its  nu- 
merous mines,  which  produce  iron  and  copper  of  the 
best  quality. 

Sweden  is  a  cold  country.  It  is  rugged  and  moun- 
tainous in  the  western  parts,  but  level  on  the  shores  oi% 
the  Baltic. 

The  Swedes  have  public  schools,  and  are  generally 
nell  informed  and  honest,  as  well  as  intelligent  and 
sprightly. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Sweden  bounded *    What 
mountains  separata  it  from  Norway  ?  What  river  from  Russia  f 
//.  What  two  lakes  are  there  in  the  southern  part  of  Swe- 
den •  What  is  the  chief  river  ?  What  is  the  capital  of  Sweden .' 
-uilt  on  several  islands  in  the  Lal;e  Malar.")     What  other 
:  of  importance  on  the  eastern  coast  ?    What  one  on  the 
western .'    What  other  important  places  are  there  ?    What  uni- 

'—  Prod.  276.) 
ilWAY. 

\  cold,  mountainous,  barren 
den. 


NORTHERN     EUE.OPE. 


The  Maelstrom. 

Norway  is  remarkable  for  the  Maelstrom,  a  dreadful 
whirlpool,  which  draws  in  ships,  and  even  whales, 
from  -a  distance  of  several  miles. 

The  Norwegians  are  honest  and  hospitable,  but  rude 
and  illiterate.  They  are  supported  chiefly  by  hunting, 
fishing,  and  cutting  timber  for  exportation. 

Qnestions  ofa  the  map. — /.  How  is  Norway  bounded  ?  What 
are  the  northern  and  southern  capes?  What  islands  on  the 
N.  W.  coast  ?  Where  is  the  Maelstrom  ?  What  is  the  chiei 
river?  The  capital? 

.  //.  What  is  the  most  northern  town  ?    Describe  the  principal 
places  in  the  south.    What  universities  or  colleges  ? 

LAPLAND. 


The  Reindeer  of  Lapland. 


In  Lapland  they  use  Reindeer  as  their  beasts 
of  burden,  live  on  their  milk  and  flesh,  and  dress  in 
their  skins. 

It  is  a  frozen,  mountainous,  desolate  region,  occupy- 
ing the  northern  parts  of  Russia,  Sweden  and  Norway. 
The  Laplanders  are  dwarfish,  ignorant,  superstitious 
and  barbarous. 

Quiftions  on  the  map.— I.  What  river  in  Lapland  ?    "What 
village  deserving  of  notice  • 

DENMARK. 
Including  Iceland  and  (he  Faroe  Isles. 


The  Great  Geyser  of  Iceland. 

284.  Iceland,  belonging  to  Denmark,  is  remarkable 
for  its  volcano,  and  for  the  hot  springs  called  the  Gey- 
sers, which  spout  hot  water  often  to  the  height  of  90  feet. 

Denmark  is  a  level  and  fertile  country,  with  a  damp 
but  healthy  climate. 

The  Danes  are  an  honest,  industrious  people,  but 
not  distinguished  for  enterprise  or  learning. 

The  Eyder  is  the  only  river  of  importance  in  Den- 
mark. It  falls  into  the  North  Sea,  and  is  connected 
with  the  Baltic  by  the  canal  of  Kiel. 

Questions  en    I  fie    map. — /.   How  is  Denmark    bounded? 
What  islands  belong  to  it  ?    Describe  the  capital.     (It  is  on  th". 
island  of  Zealand.) 
II.  Where  is  Elsinore  ?   *vVhere  is  Altona  ?  and  how  large .: 


MIDDLE    COUNTRIES    OF    EUIXOFE.  1  1J 

What  great  seaport  is  near  it  ?    What  university  do  you  find  ? 
( Kid  also  has  a  universili/.)  (dim.  275 — Prod.  276.) 
SCOTLAND. 

285.  Scotland   is   among  the  northern  countries  o| 
Europe,   and  resembles  them   in  climate,  and  in'Jhcr 
character  of  its  people.     It  will  be  described  under  the 
head  of  Great  Britain,  to  which  it  belongs. 

MIDDLE  COUNTRIES  OF  EUROPE. 

England — Ireland —  The   Netherlands — Gertnany — 

Prussia — Austria — Switzerland — France. 

286.  The  middle  countries  of  Europe  extend  from 
about  45"  to  55°  of  north  latitude.     The  southern  part 
of  Russia  is  also  in  the  same  latitude. 

287.  The  climate  in  most  parts  of  these  countries  is 
milder  than  in  the  northern  United  States  ;  but  in  the 
northern  parts,  the  winters  are  very  cold. 

288.  They  produce  excellent  grain  and  vegetables, 
and  many  tine  fruits  in  abundance. 

289.  The  southern  parts  abound  in  grapes  and  olives, 
which  furnish  the  people  with  wine  and  oil,  for  com- 
mon use.  «^ 
CCXC.         (For  the  Review.') 

a.  The  chief  exports  of  these  countries  are  provisions,  grain, 
wine,    and  innumerable  manufactures   of   wool,    cotton   and 
metals. 

b.  The  people  are  of  various  characters,  but  generally  ac- 
tive and  intelligent. 

c.  Most  of  them  excel  other  nations  of  Europe  in  manufac- 
tures and  learning ;  but  they  aVe  less  hardy  and  virtuous  than 
in  moie.of  the  northern  countries. 

Questions. — /.  In  what  latitude  are  the  middle  countries  of 
Europe  ?  What  countries  are  in  the  northern  part,  and  what  in 
the  southern  of  this  division  ?  What,  part  of  Russia  is  in  the 
same  latitude  ?  What  is  the  climate  of  these  countries '.  What 
do  they  produce  ?  What  fruits  in  the  southern  parts  i 

II.  What  are  the  chief  exports  ?  What  ii  the  character  of 
the  people  ?  In  what  do  they  excel  other  nations  of  Europe  ? 
What  can  you  say  of  their  virtue? 


114  INSCRIPTION     OK    COUNTRIES 

BRITISH  ISLES,  OR  GREAT  BRITAIN. 
291.  In  the  British  Isles,  England,  Scotland  and  Ire- 
Jand  are  united  in  one  kingdom,  which  excels  all  other 
^countries  in  the  extent  and  value  of  its  manufactures 
and  commerce,  and  in  the  strength  of  its  navy. 

The  British  empire  includes  numerous  and  extensive 
colonies,  in  every  quarter  of  the  globe. 
ENGLAND. 


Iron  Bridge  and  Canal  in  England. 

292.  England  is  remarkable  for  its  fine  roads  and 
bridges,  and  also  for  its  canals^  which  pass  through 
mountains  and  over  rivers.  It  is  a  moist,  temperate, 
fruitful  and  beautiful  country. 

The  people  are  intelligent,  brave  and  industrious, 
chiefly  supported  by  manufactures  and  commerce. 

Jersey,  and  the  neighbouring  islands  of  Guernsey, 
Alderney  and  Sark  belong  to  England. 

Wales  is  a  mountainous  country,  formerly  independ- 
ent, but  now  incorporated  with  England. 

Quc.«/t07w on  t?u  map. — /.  How  is  England  bounded?  What 
channel  and  straits  divide  it  from  France  ?  What  islands  in  the 
English  Channel  belong  to  England  ?  What  island  opposite 
Portsmouth  ?  Describe  the  capital.  What  are  the  three  prin- 
cipal rivers  ? 

//.  Where  are  the  two  chief  universities .'  In  what  direr- 


MIBBLfci    COUNTRIES    OF    EUROPE. 


H, 


:  ton  from  London  ?  What  two  seaports  on  the  Channel  ?  Where 
is  Bristol?  What  other  seaport  on  the  west?  Which  way  frorn^ 
Liverpool  are  the  great  manufacturing  towns  of  Birmingha: 
and  Manchester?  What  two  seaports  on  the  North  Sea?  Wh«| 
tv.'o  other  important  places  in  the  north  ? 
SCOTLAND. 


FingaVs  Cave,  in  Stajfa. 

293.  In  Staffa,  one  of  the  Western  Isles  of  Scotland, 
is  a  cavern  of  great  height,  called  Fingal's  Cave,  sup- 
ported by  natural  columns,  appearing  like  hewn  stone. 

Scotland  is  one  of  the  northern  countries  of  Europe. 
It  is  cold,  mountainous  and  unfruitful,  chiefly  fitted  for 
pasturage. 

The  Scotch  are  hardy  and  enterprising.  They  are 
remarkable  for  general  education  and  morality,  pro- 
duced by  their  numerous  schools  and  their  attention 
to  public  worship. 

The  Orkney,  the  Shetland  and  the  Western  Isles,  or 
Hebrides,  belong  to  Scotland.  The  chief  rivers  are 
the  Forth  on  the  east,  and  the  Clyde  on  the  west. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Scotland  bounded?  What 
Elands  belong  to  it  ?  What  arc  the  chief  rivers?  What  is  the 
capital  and  where  ?  What  seaport  in  the  west  ? 

II.  What  two  ports  on  the  eastern  coast  ?  Where  is  Perth  ' 
'\  here  are  the  universities  of  Scotland  ? 


KIPT1ON    OF    COVNir.lt-. 

IRELAND. 


The  Giant's  Causeway. 

294.  Ireland  is  remarkable  for  the  Giant's  Cause- 
way, on  the  northern  coast,  composed  of  regular  nat- 
ural pillars,  like  those  of  StafTa. 

It  is  a  level,  moist  and  fertile  country,  celebrated  for 
the  beautiful  green  of  its  fields. 

The  common  people  are  hardy  and  brave,  but  gene- 
rally ignorant  and  superstitious,  and  extremely  poor. 

Questions  on  the.  map. — /.  Hc&r  is  Ireland  bounded  ?  WRat 
is  the  chief  river  ?  What  place  on  the  Shannon  ?  Describe  the 
capital. 

//.  What  is  the  chief  seaport  in  the  south  ?  What  two  ports 
in  the  west  ?  What  are  the  two  principal  places  in  the  north  ? 
What  is  the  southern  cape  of  Ireland .'  What  university  in 
Ireland? 

KINGDOM  OF  THE  NETHERLANDS. 

Including  Holland  and  the  Netherlands. 

295.  This   country  is  generally  lower  than  the  sea 
and  rivers.     It  is  drained  by  means  of  numerous  ca- 
nals, which  are  also  used  instead  of  roads. 

The  Kingdom  of  the  Netherlands  is  a  flat,  moist  and 
highly  cultivated  country,  with  a  cold  and  damp,  but 
healthy  climate.     The  people  are  honest,  and  remark 
able  for  industry,  frugality  and  neatne 


MIDDLE    COUNTRIES    OF    EUROPE. 

Canals  in  the  Netherlands. 


117 


The  northern  part  of  this  kingdom  was  formerly 
called  Holland,  and  the  southern  part,  Flandefs  or 
the  Netherlands. 

Questions™  the  map.— I.  How  is  the  Netherlands  bounded' 
What  nvers  pass  through  it?  What  is  the  capital ' 

south  There  ^  thC  HagUe  '   What  tW°  °ther  cities  in  thp 
GERMANY. 


Women  labour  inQ . 
29G.  In  Germany,  as  in  Sweden  and  other  parts  of 
Europe,  the  women  often  perform  the  rabour  of  men 
?n  me  fie!r]?. 


T.IPTION  or  c 

Germany,  on   the   map,  includes  the  kingdo; 
Bavaria,    Wurtemberg,    Saxony   and   Hanover,   with 
thirty-four  small  States  and  free  Cities. 

The  Germanic  confederation,  or  the  whole  of  Ger- 
many, embraces  these  states,  togetherwitb  some  parts 
of  Austria  and  Prussia. 

Germany  is  a  productive  «.o~mry.  It  is  remarka 
ble  for  the  number  of  its  le.~rn"d  men  and  authors, 
and  the  perfect  state  o:  .iences. 

The  people  are  distinguished  for  their  gravity,  in- 

and  perseverance. 

Quuttoju  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Germany  bounded  r  What 
•Iocs  it  include.'  What  rivers  pass  through  it.'  In  what 
part  of  Germany  is   Bavaria:   What  are    the   two   principal 
places  in  Bavaria.'    Where  is  WurUraburr,  and  whV 

Where  is  Saxony,  and  \ 
over,  and  what  is  its  chief 

II.  Where  are  the  three  free  cities,  Frankfort,  Bremen,  and 
Hamburg  ?  What    other    city  do   yon  find,  celebrated  for  a 
university?  Lubtc,  the  fourth  free  city,  u  ,V.  E.  of  Ha: 
3.) 


A  Cottage  in  Prussia. 

297.    In   Prussia,   as   in  other  parts   of  Europe, 
splendid  palaces  and  cities  are  often  coatr 
•^rc-tched  huts  of  the    6or. 


MIDDLE    COUNTRIES    Or    EUROPE.  119 

Prussia  is  generally  a  level  country,  with  a  cold 
moist  climate.  It  is  remarkable  for  its  mines  of  am- 
ber. A  part  of  Germany  belongs  to  Prussia. 

The  Prussians  are  chiefly  distinguished  as  a  military 
nation.  Many  of  the  inhabitants  are  properly  Germans. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Prussia  bounded?  What 
three  rivers  empty  in  it  ?  What  large  river  passes  through  it  ? 
Describe  the  capital. 

//.  Where  are  Konigsburg  and  Dantzic  ?    What  city  is  on 
the  Oder?  What  part  of  Germany  belongs  to  Prussia?    Where 
are  the  universities  of  Prussia  ?  (Clim.  287 — Prod.  288.) 
AUSTRIA. 


120  DESCRIPTION  OF  COtT5TRIF>. 

Qualions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Austria  bounded  ?  Whai 
rivers  are  there  ?  What  mountains?  What  are  the  chief  divi- 
sions of  Austria  ?  Where  is  the  capital  ? 

//.  Where  is  Presburg?  What  two  cities  below  it  on  the 
Danube  ?  What  two  north  of  Vienna  ?  What  one  in  the  N. 
E.?  Where  is  Trieste?  In?pruck '  Ragusa?  What  three 
Italian  cities  are  now  in  Austria  ?  What  universities  are  there  in 
Austria  ?  (Clim.  287— Prod.  288—289.) 
:TZERLAND. 


An  A-calanche. 

299.  Avalanches,    or    immense    masses  of   snow, 
sometimes  fall  from  the  Alps,  in  Switzerland,  and  bury 
houses  and  even  whole  villages. 

Switzerland  is  a  cold,  mountainous  and  rough  coun- 
try, but  the  vallies  are  productive. 

The  Swiss  are  generally  well  educated,  and  are  re- 
markable for  their  bravery,  industry  and  virtue. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Switzerland  bounded : 
What  two  large  rivers  rise  in  it,  and  through  what  lakes  do 
they  pass  ?  (Set  LXIII.  rf.)  What  is  the  capital  ?  What  are  the 
two  other  principal  places?  What  universities  do  you  find  ? 

//.  (Cataracts  LX.  a.— Lakes.  LXIII.  r.) 
FRANCE. 

300.  France  abounds  in  vineyards,  which  furnish 
wine  for  the  common  drink  of  the  people. 

It  is  a  fertile  country  ;  and  although  it  is  in  the 
same  latitude  with  Canada,  it  has  a  finer  and  milder 
i-limatp  than  thp  Middle  United  States. 


SOUTHERN    EUROPE. 

Vineyards  in  France. 


121 


The  French  are  gay,  polished,  active  and  industri- 
ous, and  celebrated  for  their  ingenuity  and  skill  in 
the  arts  and  sciences.  Corsica  belongs  to  France. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  France  bounded  ?  What 
three  rivers  are  there  in  the  west  ?  Describe  the  capital  ? 
What  two  other  places  on  the  Seine,  and  where  ?  What  town 
nearest  England  ? 

//.  What  city  near  the  northern  boundary  ?  Where  is  Stras- 
burg  ?  What  is  the  most  western  city  in  France  ?  What  three 
cities  are  there  on  the  Loire  ?  What  remarkable  seaport  on  the 
Garonne?  Where  is  Rochelle?  Where  is  Bayonne  ?  What 
two  cities  between  the  Bay  of  Biscay  and  Gulf  of  Lyons? 
Where  does  the  Canal  Royal  pass  ?  What  town  on  the  Rhone  ? 
What  mountains  west  of  it  ?  What  two  seaports  on  the  Medi- 
terranean ?  Where  is  Corsica  ?  What  universities  has  France  ? 
(C/tm.  287— Prorf.288— 289.) 

SOUTHERN  COUNTRIES  OF  EUROPE. 
Spain — Portugal — Italy — Turkey. 

301.  The  southern   countries  of   Europe  extend 
from  about  35°  to  45°  of  north  latitude.     They  have 
very  warm  and  dry 'climates.     In  most  of  them,  snow 
seldom  falls  except  on  the  mountains,  and  vegetables 
continue  green  through  the  winter. 

302.  They  abound  in  the  finest  grain,  vines  and 
olives,  as  well  as  oranges,  lemons,  figs  and  other  fruits 
of  warm  climates. 


DESCRIPTION'    OF    COlMKIEr. 

CCCIII.       (For  the  Review.') 

a.  The  most  important  exports  are  these  fruits,  with  raisins, 
currants,  wine,  brandy,  and  especially  silk  and  oil. 

6-  The  people  are  generally  indolent,  and  are  less  virtuous, 
and  less  distinguished  for  learning  and  improvements,  than  other 
nations  of  Europe. 

c.  Bread,  vegetables  and  fruits,  with  wine  and  oil,  are  the 
principal  articles  of  food  in  these  countries. 

Questions. — /.  Wh  ch  are  the  southern  countries  of  Europe? 
What  is  their  situation  and  climate  ?  What  can  you  say  of 
their  winters  ?  What  are  their  chief  productions  ? 

//    What  are  the  most  important  exports  ?   What  is  the  gen- 
eral character  of  the  inhabitants,  compared  with  that  of  other 
nations  of  Europe  ?    What  are  the  principal  articles  of  food  ? 
What  peculiar  wind  in  these  countries  ?  (See  CXVI.  A.) 
SPAIN. 


.•3  Bull  Fight. 

304.  It  is  a  favourite  amusement,  both  of  males  and 
females  in  Spain,  to  attend  bull  fights.  Almost  every 
town  has  a  public  place  for  this  purpose. 

Spain  is  a  hot  and  dry,  but  fertile  country.  (CYi.  301.) 

The  Spaniards  are  haughty  and  bigoted,  but  brave 
and  generous.  They  are  now  becoming  more  liberal 
and  enlightened. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Spain  bounded  ?  What 
river  has  it  on  the  east ?  What  rivers  on  the  west  and  south  ? 
Describe  the  capital.  What  two  capes  on  the  north?  What 
wo  seaports  ? 


SOUTHERN    EUROPE.  123 

//.  Where  is  Valladolid  ?  What  two  principal  cities  N.  of 
the  Douro  ?  Where  is  Salamanca  ?  What  city  on  the  Ebro  ? 
Where  is  the  British  fortress  of  Gibraltar?  Name  the  five 
sea-ports  on  the  Mediterranean,  beginning  at  the  south.  What 
two  cities  on  the  Guadalquiver  ?  What  two  cities  between  this 
river  and  the  Tagus  ?  What  chain  of  mountains  ?  What  three 
islands  on  the  coast  of  Spain,  and  what  is  their  comparative 
population  ?  Where  are  the  universities  of  Spain  ?  (Prod.  302.) 
PORTUGAL. 


Treading  out  grain  in  Portugal. 

305.  The  Portuguese  are  so  inattentive  to  improve- 
ments, that  they  still  tread  out  grain  with  oxen,  as  was 
done  in  ancient  times. 

Portugal  is  a  warm,  dry  and  fruitful  country.  (Cli.301 .) 
The  people  are  friendly  and  hospitable,  but  generally 
superstitious,  haughty  and  revengeful. 

Questions  on  the  mtip. — /.  How  is  Portugal  bounded  ?  What 
rivers  pass  through  it  ?  Where  is  the  capital  ?  What  two  cities 
in  the  north  ?  What  port  in  the  southern  part?  What  cape  on 
the  south  ?  What  university  in  Portugal  ?  (Prod.  302.) 

ITALY, 
Including  Sicily  and  Sardinia. 

306.  Italy  is  remarkable  for  two  ancient  volcanoes, 
Etna  in  Sicily,  and  Vesuvius  near  Naples.  (See  L.o,6,c.) 

It  was  the  country  of  ttfe  ancient  Romans,  and  abounds 
with  the  ruins  of  their  cities  and  buildings. 
11  * 


124  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

Mount  Vesuvius,    (Italy.) 


It  has  afertile  soil  and  a  delightful  climate.  (See  301.) 

The  Italians  are  a  polished  people,  distinguished  for 
their  skill  in  music,  painting  and  sculpture.  In  the 
northern  parts  they  are  industrious,  in  the  southern 
parts,  indolent,  and  generally,  they  are  deficient  m 
education  and  morality. 

Italy  has  the  kingdom  of  Naples,  including  Sicily,  io> 
the  south  ;  the  Roman  states  in  the  middle  ;  and  the 
Grand  Duchy  of  Tuscany  next.  In  the  uorth-wes*. 
are  the  small  Duchies  of  Modena,  Parma  and  Lucca. 
and  the  kingdom  of  Sardinia,  which  also  includes  the 
island  of  Sardinia. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Italy  bounded?  What 
river  empties  into  the  Gulf  of  Venice?  What  mountains  run 
through  Italy  ?  Where  is  the  kingdom  of  Naples  ?  What  is  the 
capital  of  this  kingdom  :  What  volcano  near  this  city  ?  Where 
is  Sicily  ?  Wrhat  volcano  is  there  on  it  ?  What  are  three  of  the 
principal  cities  of  Sicily  ?  Where  are  the  Roman  States  ?  On 
what  river  does  Rome  stand  ? 

//.  What  is  the  size  of  Rome  ?  Where  is  Bologna  ?  Where 
is  St.  Marino?  (/<  is  an  independent  republic  of  only  3000 
people.)  Where  is  Tuscany?  What  places  in  it?  What  island 
on  the  coast  ?  Where  is  the  kingdom  of  Sardinia  ?  What  is  the 
capital  ?  What  seaport  of  note  ?  What  is  the  chief  city  on  the 
island  of  Sardinia  ?  To  what  nation  does  Corsica  belong : 
Where  do  you  find  universities  in  Italy  ?  (Prod.  302.) 


MjlTHEUN    EUROPE. 
TURKEY. 


125 


m.  Greece. 

307.  The  southern  .part  of  this  country  was  the  an- 
cient Greece,  and  abbtfnds  in  the  ^remains  of  Grecian 
buildings   and  sculpture,  which  the  Turks  destroy. 

Turkey  is  a  w^arm,  productive  country,  but  poorly 
cultivated.  (CU'w.^JJl*)  ^  ^  •  v 

The  Turks  are  generally  bigoted,  ignorant  and 
vicious,  but  honest  and  hospitable.  The  Greeks  are 
more  lively  and  ingenious,  and  are  Christians. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Turkey  bounded?  What 
are  the  principal  rivers  in  it  ?  What  chain  of*  mountains  ? 
Describe  the  capital  ?  Which  way  from  it  is  Adrianople  ? 

//.  What  two  places  on  the  Danube  ?  In  what  part  of  Tur- 
key are  Jassy  and  Bucharest?  Where  is  Sophia  ?  Salonica  ? 
Where  is  Greece  ?  What  three  places  in  the  south  of  Turkey  ? 
What  is  the  name  of  the  southern  peninsula  ?  What  city  in 
the  N.  W.  part  of  Turkey  ?  What  sea  and  straits  between 
Constantinople  and  the  Archipelago  ?  What  large  island  south 
of  the  Archipelago  ?  What  are  the  six  principal  islands  in  the 
Archipelago?  (Prod.  302.) 

REPUBLIC   OF  THE  IONIAN  ISLES. 

308.  The  Islands  of  Corfu,  Cefalonia,Zante,  Cerigo, 
and  some  others,  form  the  Republic  of  the  Ionian  Isles. 
They   are  inhabited  by  Greeks,  under  the  protection 
of  Great  Britain. 


126  APPLICATION    OF    GEOGRAPHY. 

They  have  a  fine  climate  and  fertile  soil,  and  export 
wine,  oil  and  dried  currants. 

Questions  on  the   map. — /.  Where  are  the  Ionian  islands  ? 
Mention  the  principal,  beginning  at  the  north. 
CCCIX.         TRAVELS  ON  THE  MAP  OF  EUROPE. 

In  travelling  through  Europe  you  will  find  numerous  cities, 
which  abound  with  magnificent  buildings  ;  but  you  will  see 
such  poverty  and  misery  and  vice  as  we  do  not  often  see  in  the 
United  States. 

What  is  the  largest  city  in  Europe  ?  How  will  you  go  to  it 
from  the  United  States,  and  what  ocean  and  channel  must  you 
pass  ?  How  many  people  shall  you  find  there  ? 

What  shall  you  find  worthy  of  notice  in  travelling  through 
England  ?  (See  392.)  In  what  direction,  and  how  will  you  go  to 
visit  the  Cavern  of  Stafla  ?  (293.)  In  what  direction  is  Edin- 
burgh from  the  Western  Isles  ?  What  object  worth  visiting 
shall  you  find  in  Ireland  ?  (294.)  How  will  you  go  from  Ire- 
land to  the  Maelstrom  ?  What  food  shall  you  find  in  Norway  ? 
(277.)  What  articles  of  commerce?  (CCLXXVIII.  e.) 

Observe  the  coast  of  Norway,  lined  with  high  rocks,  and  the 
torrents  rushing  down  from  the  mountains,  full  of  the  trunks  of 
trees,  which  are  thus  conveyed  to  the  ocean. 

Are  the  nights  always»d«rl* here  ?  (CCLXXVIII.  a.)  How 
long  is  the  longest  day  ?  (See  Chart  and  p.  45.)  What  port  in 
Russia  will  you  find  on  the  White  Sea  ?  How  near  are  you  to 
Lapland  now,  in  what  direction  must  you  go,  and  how  shall 
you  be  obliged  to  travel  there  ?  (283.)  What  towns  shall  you; 
pass  in  Finland,  as  you  go  down  through  Cronstadt,  to  Peters- 
burgh  ?  (Pelertburgh,see  p.  127,  e.) 

What  amusement  is  common  here  ?  (279.)  In  what  direction 
from  Petersburg  is  Moscow  ?  How  will  you  go  from  Moscow 
to  the  capital  of  Poland?  What  do  you  find  remarkable  in 
Poland  ?  (280.)  To  what  seaport  will  you  go,  to  sail  for  Stock- 
holm ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  Swedes,  and  their  mines  ?  (281.) 
Row  can  you  go  from  Stockholm  to  Amsterdam  ?  What  places 
do  you  pass,  and  what  peninsula  ?  What  do  you  find  in  Hol- 
land ?  (295.)  How  will  you  go  to  find  the  second  city  of 
Europe  ?  (Pan*,  p.  127,  6.) 

What  drink  shall  you  find  common  here  ?  (300.)  How  will 
you  go  to  Berlin  through  the  principal  kingdoms  of  Germa- 
ny ?  And  now,  how  will  you  get  to  Vienna  ?  and  what  coun- 
tries, rivers  and  mountains  must  you  pass  ?  What  singular 
class  of  people  shall  you  find  in  Austria  ?  Describe  Venice-. 


TKAVELS    ON    THE    MAP.  127 

(see  p.  128.)  Ar"e  the  nobles  or  the  common  people  of  Austria 
best?  (298.) 

What  lofty  mountains  shall  you  find  in  Switzerland,  and  how 
shall  you  be  in  danger  here?  (299.)  In  what  direction  is  the 
country  of  the  ancient  Romans?  (305.) 

What  objects  of  curiosity  shall  you  find  in  Italy  ?  (See  p.  28, 
a,  and  $305.)  What  ancient  country  will  be  east  of  you  when 
you  reach  Sicily  ?  What  shall  you  find  interesting  in  Greece  ? 
What  course  will  you  take  to  Smyrna  ?  What  countries  of 
Europe  which  you  have  not  visited,  shall  you  pass  in  going  home 
from  Smyrna  ?  What  port  of  Spain  shall  you  pass,  in  going 
towards  the  straits  of  Gibraltar? 

The  plague  often  prevails  in  Turkey,  and  they  will  not  allow 
you  to  land  in  Spain,  until  you  have  spent  a  month  in  quaran- 
tine on  board  the  vessel. 

Which  way  will  you  go  to  find  the  capital  of  Spain  ?  What 
course  will  you  take  to  visit  the  capital  of  Portugal,  and  then 
meet  your  vessel  at  Gibraltar? 

Gibraltar  is  much  resorted  to  for  trade,  and  you  will  find  the 
dress  and  languages  of  ten  different  nations  in  its  streets.  It  is 
probably  the  strongest  fortress  in  the  world.  It  belongs  to 
Great  Britain. 

Describe  your  course  from  Gibraltar  home. 

CCCX.   CITIES  OF  EUROPE.         (For  the  Review.) 

The  cities  of  Europe  far  surpass  those  of  America,  in  number, 
population  and  magnificence.  They  are  superior  to  any  in  the 
world,  in  their  universities,  hospitals,  museums  and  other  public 
institutions,  in  the  splendour  and  size  of  their  churches  and  pub- 
lic buildings,  and  in  the  extent  of  their  manufactures  and  com- 
merce. 

In  the  cities  on  the  continent  of  Europe,  the  streets  are 
usually  narrow,  crooked  and  filthy.  They  are  seldom  famished 
with  side  walks,  and  foot  passengers  are  exposed  to  constant 
danger  in  the  crowd  of  carriages. 

The  houses  are  generally  of  stone  or  brick  ;  but  in  many  of 
the  towns  of  Denmark,  Norway,  Sweden,  and  Russia,  they  are 
built  of  timber.  They  are  usually  high,  often  from  five  to  ten 
stories  in  large  cities.  They  are  not  uniform  in  their  appear- 
ance, and  magnificent  palaces  are  frequently  surrounded  with 
wretched  huts. 

The  cities  of  Europe  are  much  more  crowded  with  houses 
and  inhabitants  than  those  of  the  United  States.  In  the  more 
populous  countries,  villages  like  those  of  America  are 
rarely  seen ;  but  every  collection  of  houses  appears  like  a 


"127(6.)  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

portion  of  a  large  city.  A  great  number  of  the  cities  and  towns 
are  STirrounded  with  walls,  and  entered  only  by  gates. 

In  the  cities  of  the  Catholic  countries,  especially  in  the  south 
of  Europe,  pictures  or  images  of  saints  are  placed  at  the  corner 
of  the  streets,  and  passengers  frequently  stop  to  offer  their  de- 
votions before  them.  These  cities  are  also  distinguished  for 
the  great  number  of  their  churches  and  chapels,  and  for  the 
costly  paintings,  statues  and  ornaments  they  contain.  The 
cities  of  Southern  Europe  are  usually  furnished  with  water  by 
aqueducts ;  and  public  fountains  are  erected  in  the  streets  and 
public  squares,  which  add  to  their  beauty,  and  produce  a  re- 
freshing coolness  in  summer. 

Most  of  the  large  cities  are  seaports,  or  connected  with  the 
sea.  The  capitals  are  usually  distinguished  as  the  residence 
of  the  sovereign  and  royal  family.  London,  Paris,  Petersburg, 
Moscow,  Vienna,  Berlin,  Amsterdam,  Dublin,  Rome,  Florence, 
and  Dresden,  are  situated  on  rivers,  which  divide  them  into 
two  portions  connected  by  bridges.  Rome,  Madrid,  Lisbon 
and  Edinburgh,  are  built  on  several  hills,  which  gives  them  a 
picturesque  appearance.  Naples,  and  most  of  the  other  cities 
lying  on  the  Mediterranean,  are  situated  on  declivities,  and  the 
streets  rise  from  the  shore,  like  the  seats  of  an  amphitheatre. 

London  is  the  first  city  in  the  civilized  world,  in  population, 
commerce  and  wealth.  It  also  includes  Westminster,  the  resi- 
dence of  the  royal  family  and  court,  and  Southwark,  on  the 
south  de  of  the  Thames.  The  streets  are  generally  well 
paved,  and  furnished  with  good  side  walks.  It  is  distinguished 
for  the  number  and  extent  of  its  literary  and  charitable  insti- 
tutions. 

Paris  is  the  second  city  of  Europe  in  population.  It  holds 
the  first  rank  in  the  beauty  of  its  public  gardens,  fountains, 
monuments  and  palaces,  and  in  the  extent  and  value  of  its  libra- 
ries and  literary  institutions.  It  is  especially  distinguished  for 
the  gaiety  and  dissipation  of  the  people,  and  the  number  and 
variety  of  its  public  amusements. 

Constantinople  presents  a  magnificent  appearance  from  the 
sea,  in  the  assemblage  of  mosques,  towers  and  palaces,  mingled 
with  beautiful  trees.  But  the  streets  are  narrow,  and  the  whole 
aspect  within  the  city,  is  gloomy  and  disagreeable. 

Naple*  is  situated  in  the  midst  of  a  fine  amphitheatre  of  hills. 
On  one  side  is  Mount  Vesuvius ;  and  a  bay  spreads  before  it, 
ornamented  with  fertile  islands,  which  is  scarcely  equalled  in 
beauty  by  any  in  the  world. 


CITIES    OF    EUROPE.  U27(c.) 

Moscow,  the  ancient  capital  of  Russia,  was  burned  in  the 
war  of  1812,  but  is  now  in  a  great  measure  rebuilt.  It  presents 
a  singular  mixture  of  Asiatic  huts,  and  temples,  and  mosques, 
with  European  palaces  and  churches. 

St.  Petersburgh  is  one  of  the  most  magnificent  cities  in  Eu- 
rope, and  the  seat  of  extensive  commerce.  It  is  built  on  a 
spot  which  was  almost  a  marsh  100  years  ago. 

Madrid  is  situated  dn  high  ground,  half  a  mile  above  the 
level  of  the  sea,  which  renders  it  cool  at  all  seasons.  It  is  only 
important  as  the  residence  of  the  king  and  royal  family. 

Lisbon,  at  a  distance,  presents  a  magnificent  appearance.  It 
has  a  fine  body  of  water  before  it,  and  beautiful  cultivated  hills 
in  the  rear.  But  the  streets  are  irregular  and  filthy,  and  the 
houses  are  neither  elegant  nor  convenient. 

Vienna,  the  former  capital  of  Germany,  is  now  the  chief  city 
of  the  Austrian  empire.  It  is  the  resort  of  merchants  from  va- 
rious nations  of  Europe  and  Asia,  and  is  distinguished  for  the 
beauty  of  its  environs,  and  the  luxury  and  dissipation  of  the 
nobility. 

Amsterdam  is  built  on  oaken  piles,  in  a  marshy  spot,  and  like 
most  of  the  cities  of  Holland,  is  intersected  by  a  great  number 
of  canals  passing  through  its  principal  streets. 

Dublin  is  the  second  city  of  the  British  Isles.  It  presents  a 
grand  appearance  from  the  sea,  and  few  cities  have  a  greater 
proportion  of  magnificent  and  useful  buildings. 

Berlin,  the  residence  of  the  king  of  Prussia,  is  a  handsome, 
well  built  city,  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  River  Spree,  a 
small  branch  of  the  Elbe. 

Rome  was  once  the  capital  of  the  known  world,  but  is  now 
decaying  in  population  and  wealth.  A  large  part  of  it  is  laid 
out  in  fields  and  gardens,  or  covered  with  the  ruins  of  the  an- 
cient city.  Its  churches  are  very  splendid.  St.  Peter's  is  the 
grandest  in  the  world. 

Venice  is  a  beautiful  city,  remarkable  for  its  situation  on 
islands.  The  people  pass  from  one  part  to  another  in  boats,  on 
the  canals,  and  horses  and  carriages  are  rarely  seen. 

Hamburgh  is  the  greatest  commercial  city  of  Germany. 
Like  the  cities  of  Holland  it  is  intersected  by  canals.  Its  streets 
are  not  pleasant  or  well  built. 

Copenhagen,  situated  on  the  island  of  Zealand,  is  a  commer- 
cial city  of  considerable  wealth  and  beauty. 

Edinburgh  is  not  a  place  of  commerce  or  of  manufactures, 
but  it  is  distinguished  for  its  literary  institutions  and  its  learned 
men. 


J  -0  DESCRIPTION'    OF    COUNTRIES. 

Stockholm  has  a  singular  and  romantic  appearance,  from  its 
situation  on  a  number  of  rocky  islands. 

Florence,  the  capital  of  Tuscany,  is  a  beautiful  city,  situated 
on  both  sides  of  the  river  Arno.  Turin  is  a  handsome,  fortified 
town,  the  residence  of  the  king  of  Sardinia.  Dresden  is  one  of 
the  most  elegant  cities  of  Europe,  distinguished  for  its  manufac- 
tures of  fine  porcelain  or  china  ware.  Genera,  the  chief  city 
of  Switzerland,  has  a  beautiful  situation  on  the  lake  of  the 
same  name.  Genoa  is  a  commercial  city,  the  birth  place  of 
Columbus.  Warsaw,  the  capital  of  Poland,  is  composed  chief- 
ly of  mean,  wooden  hovels,  with  only  a  few  fine  buildings. 
Bergen  has  a  fine  harbour.  Christiana  is  the  principal  place 
in  Norway,  and  is  admired  for  the  beauty  of  its  situation. 

The  chief  cities  of  Europe  rank  in  population  as  follows  : 

1  London          "  Moscow          "  Berlin  "  Genoa 

2  Paris  &  Lisbon  7  Venice  "  Turin 

3  Constanti-      "  Vienna  "  Rome  "  Warsaw 

nople          "  Amsterdam    8  Copenhagen  "  Stockholm 

4  Naples  "  .Madrid  "  Edinburgh    10  Dresden 
Petersburgh  6  Dublin           9  Florence        "  Geneva. 

ASIA. 

311.  Asia  is  the  largest  of  the  four  great  divisions  of 
the  globe,  and  has  the.  greatest  number  of  inhabitants. 

It  was  in  Asia  that  our  first  parents  were  created, 
and  the  human  race  preserved  after  the  deluge  ;  there 
the  most  important  events  recorded  in  scripture  took 
place,  and  there  the  Saviour  died  to  redeem  mankind. 

312.  Asia  and  its  islands  extend  from  the  Equator 
and   the  Torrid  Zone  on  the  south,  beyond  the  Polar 
Circle  on  the  north,  each  portion  partaking  of  the  pe- 
culiar character  of  its  zone.   (See  map  of  the  World, 
and  the  account  of  zones — 87,  88 — 96,97—102,  103.) 

313.  The   northern  and  middle  portions  of  Asia, 
like  those  of  America,  are  generally  colder  than  the 
countries  of  Europe  in  the  same  latitude. 

314.  The  tea-plant  and  some  of  the  finest  perfumes 
and  spices,  including  the  nutmeg,  cinnamon  and  clove, 
are  productions  of  Asia  which  are  not  found,  or  very 
sparingly,  in  any  other  part  of  the  world. 


ASIA,  129 

'.  Asia  abounds  in  the  precious  metals  and  gems, 
and  was  for  a  long  time  the  only  place  where  diamonds 
an  d  pearlswere  obtained. 

316.  The  people  in  the  west  of  Asia  have  light  com- 
plexions, and  belong  to  the  European  race  ;  but  those 
east  of  the  Caspian  Sea  are  generally  of  a  deep  yellow 
or  brown,  and  belong  to  the  Tartar  and  Malay  races. 
CCCXVII.     (For  the  Review.') 

a.  The  people  of  the  half-civilized  countries  are  divided  into 
various  ranks  or  casts,  and  the  sou  must  take  the  rank  and  em- 
ployment of  his  father. 

b.  In  these  countries  many  of  the  arts,  as  the   working  of 
metals  and  the  manufacture  of  silk,  woollen  and  porcelain,  are 
found  in  a  very  perfect  state. 

c.  The  sciences  are  little  understood  in  Asia  ;  but  in  the  half- 
civilized  countries,  there  are  schools  and  seminaries  to  give  the 
knowledge  of  writing  and  arithmetic,  and  of  their  laws  and  re- 
ligion, to  certain  classes  of  the  people. 

d.  The  languages  of  Asia  are  far  more  numerous  than  those 
of  Europe,  and  many  books  of  religion,  laws,  history  and  poetry 
are  found  written  in  them. 

e.The  great  mass  of  the  Asiatics  are  in  the  most  degraded 
state  of  ignorance,  and  are  cruelly  oppressed  by  despotic 
priests,  nobles  and  emperors. 

/.  They  generally  practise  fraud,  robbery  and  the  worst  of 
crimes  without  shame,  and  often  make  vice  a  part  of  religious 
worship. 

Questions. — 7.  On  what  continent,  and  in  what  part  of  it 
is  Asia  ?  (See  map  of  the  World.)  How  is  Asia  bounded  on  the 
N.  E.  S.  and  W  ?  What  is  the  size  of  Asia  compared  with  other 
portions  of  the  globe  ?  What  is  its  population  ?  What  are 
some  of  the  most  striking  events  which  have  occurred  in  Asia  ? 
What  are  some  of  the  peculiar  productions  of  Asia  '•:  What 
are  its  mineral  productions  ?  What  is  the  complexion  of  the 
people  in  the  western  countries  ?  What  in  the  eastern  and 
southern  parts  ? 

Questions  on  the  map. — //.  In  what  zones  are  the  northern 
regions  of  Asia  ?  In  what  the  middle  ?  The  southern  ?  Describe 
the  climate  of  each  part  according  to  that  of  its  zone.  What 
can  you  say  of  the  southern  countries  of  Asia  ?  What  is  the 
climate  of  the  northern  parts,  compared  with  that  of  Europe? 


130  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

How  are  the  people  divided  in  the  half-civilized  countries  ' 
What  it  the  state  of  the  arts  in  these  countries ?  What  is  that 
of  the  sciences,  and  what  provision  have  they  for  education  ? 
What  can  you  say  of  the  languages  of  Asia  '.  What  is  the  state 
of  the  common  people  generally  in  Asia  ?  What  is  the  moral 
state  of  the  Asiatics  generally : 

Questions  on  the  Chart  of  the  World. 

Civilisation, — /.  Are  there  any  civilized  countries  in  Asia ? 
What  countries  are  half-civilized,  and  in  what  part  of  Asia  do 
they  chiefly  lie  ':  What  parts  are  barbarous  ?  What  are  savage  ? 

Gorernment. — //.  What  countries  of  Asia  are  governed  by 
chiefs ;  What  kind  of  government  is  there  in  the  other  coun- 
tries of  Asia.'  What  parts  are  subject  to  Russia?  What  to 
China ? 

Religion. — II.  Is  there  any  Christian  country  in  Asia  • 
What  parts  are  Mahometan  ?  What  are  Pagan.'  Are  there 
any  missionary  stations  in  Asia,  and  in  what  countries  chiefly  ? 

Population. — II.  What  country  of  Asia  has  the  largest  num- 
ber of  inhabitants  ?  Which  is  next  to  China  in  population  ? 
What  three  countries  have  14  or  18  millions?  What  three  have 
10  millions  ?  WThich  is  the  largest  country  of  Asia,  and  what 
is  its  population  ?  (The  population  of  Tartary  and  TJiibd  is 
rery  uncertain.)  What  tribes  and  where,  in  Siberia  and  Tar- 
tary ? 

Questions  on  the  Map  of  Asia. 

Seas,  Gulfs,   Ice. — /.  What  seas  are  there   on  the  v. 
Asia  r  Where  is  the  Isthmus  of  Suez,  which  unites  it  to  Africa  '. 
What  straits  lead  to  the  Red  Sea  ?   What  two  seas  are  there 
E.  of  the   Black  Sea  r  What  gulfs  and  bays  in  the  south  of 
What  seas  on  the  east  •    What  gulf  E.  of  Tartary  ? 

Mountains — /.  What  chain  of  mountains  in  the  middle  of 
Asia  ?  Describe  its  direction,  length  and  height.  (See  XLVII. 
i.  and  q.)  What  name  does  it  take  at  the  N.  E.  ?  What  chain 
south  of  the  Altaian,  running  in  the  same  direction?  What 
chain  unites  them  to  the  Altaian  chain  ?  What  two  chains  in  the 
west  of  Asia  ':  What  chain  do  you  find  in  the  south  of  Hin- 
doostan  ?  What  chain  in  Arabia  ?  Which  is  the  longest  chain 
in  Asia  ?  Which  are  the  highest  mountains  in  Asia  ?  (Ste 
XLVII.  b.  and  d.) 

Laf-ft  and  Inland  Seat. — /.  What  great  inland  seas  are 


{here  in  the  west  of  Asia,  not  connected  with  the  ocean  ?  What 
lake  or  sea  is  there  in  East  Persia  ?  What  lakes  in  Siberia,  and 
where  ?  What  is  their  size  ?  (See  LXIII.  e.) 

Rivers. — 7.  What  are  the  three  great  rivers  in  the  north 
of  Asia,  beginning  at  the  east  ?  Where  is  the  Olensk  ?  What 
two  branches  has  the  Oby?  What  branch  has  the  Yenesei? 
Through  what  lake  does  one  of  its  branches  pass?  What  three 
great  rivers  in  the  east  of  Asia  ?  What  river  empties  into  the 
China  Sea  ?  What  one  into  the  gulf  of  Siam  ?  What  into  the 
Bay  of  Bengal  on  the  east?  What  smaller  ones  on  the  west? 
What  river  in  the  west  of  Hindoostan?  What  in  East  Persia? 
Where  are  the  Tigris  and  Euphrates?  What  rivers  empty 
into  the  Caspian  Sea?  What  into  the  Sea  of  Aral?  What 
branch  has  the  Sihon  ?  What  one  on  the  borders  of  Asia  empties 
into  the  Sea  of  Azof?  How  many  of  the  great  rivers  of  Asia 
rise  from  the  mountainous  regions  of  Tartary  and  Thibet  ? 

//.  Describe  each  of  the  rivers  named. 

Boundaries  and  Capitals, — I.  What  country  occupies  the 
northern  part  of  Asia  ?  How  is  it  bounded,  and  what  is  the 
capital  ?  Between  what  latitudes  does  most  of  it  lie  ?  What 
countries  lie  principally  between  30°  and  50°  latitude,  occu- 
pying the  middle  of  Asia  ?  Mention  the  boundaries  and 
capital  or  chief  city  of  Turkey — Georgia — Independent  Tar- 
tary— Chinese  Tartary — Thibet — Arabia — Persia — East  Per- 
sia. What  countries  lie  between  Thibet  and  Hindoostan  ? 
What  are  the  countries  of  Asia  lying  chiefly  S.  of  30°  latitude  ? 
How  far  S.  do  they  extend  ?  What  are  the  boundaries  and 
capitals  of  Hindoostan ?  China?  The  Burman  Empire?  Ton- 
kin ?  Siam  ?  Malaya  ?  What  are  the  principal  countries  on  the 
eastern  coast  of  Asia  ?  What  on  the  western  coast  '•  What  on 
the  southern  ? 

Islands. — /.  What  islands  lie  N.  of  Asia,  and  in  what  ocean  ? 
What  three  large  islands  are  there  on  the  E.  coast  of  Tartary  ? 
What  two  islands  near  the  coast  of  China  ?  What  small  cluster 
more  distant?  What  cluster  of  islands  lies  E.  of  Tonkin? 
What  are  the  principal  islands  in  it  ?  What  is  the  most  eastern 
group  of  the  Asiatic  Isles?  What  are  the  chief  islands  in  it  ? 
What  two  large  islands  lie  between  these  and  Malaya  ?  What 
are  the  chief  islands  among  the  Isles  of  Sunda,  or  those  lying  S. 
of  Borneo  and  Celebez  ?  What  very  large  island  lies  S.  E.  from 
Asia  ?  To  what  division  of  the  earth  does  it  belong  ?  (See  map 
of  the  World.)  What  small  islands  lie  in  the  Bay  of  Bengal  ? 
What  large  island  S.  of  Hindoostan  ?  What  small  groups  west 
of  this  ? 


DESCRIPTION  OF  COrXTRIE5. 

Latitudes  and  Longitudes. — //.  What  are  the  coonu . 
Europe  in  the  same  latitude  with  Siberia  and  Kamschatka ? 
What  of  America  f  What  countries  of  America  and  Europe 
correspond  to  Tartary  in  latitude  ?  What  correspond  to  Tur- 
key and  the  north  of  Persia,  Thibet  and  China?  What  coun- 
tries are  farther  south  than  any  in  Europe  ?  What  other  por- 
tions of  the  world  are  in  the  same  latitude  ? 

Whai:  places  in  Siberia  are  nearly  in  the  latitude  of  Peten- 
What  towns  and  mountains  are  nearly  in  latitude  51^ 
N.  or  in  that  of  London  ?  What  important  places  are  from  39° 
to  41  -,  or  nearly  in  the  latitude  of  Madrid,  Naples  and  New- 
York?  What  remarkable  places  do  you  find  in  latitude  30°  to 
that  of  New-Orleans,  Natchez  and  Savannah,  in  the  U. 
States  ?  Near  what  remarkable  places  does  the  Tropic  of  Can- 
cer pass ?  What  parts  or  islands  of  Asia  does  the  Equator 
What  i-lands  do  you  find  S.  of  the  Equator?  What  is  the  lon- 
gitude of  Turkey  E.  from  Philadelphia?  (See  Chart  of  t/ie 
World.)  Is  their  time  earlier  or  later  than  ours,  and  how 
much?  {See  page 45.)  What  time  is  it  in  Hindoostan,  when  it 
is  noon  at  Philadelphia:  What  in  the  Birman  empire  and 
China  ?  What  in  Japan  ? 

NORTHERN  ASIA. 
SIBERIA. 


Siberian  Hunter  and  Exile. 
318.  The  northern  regions  of  Asia  are  entire: 
cupied  by  the  Russian  dominions,  or  Siberia. 


MIDDLE    KEG  IONS    OF    ASIA..  133 

The  people  of  Siberia  are  rude  or  barbarous,  usually 
living  in  huts,  half  under  ground,  and  subsisting  chiefly 
by  hunting  and  fishing. 

This  is  the  country  to  which  state  criminals  are  often 
exiled  from  Russia.  Some  of  the  large  towns  resem- 
ble those  of  the  European  dominions  in  civilization 
and  religion. 

319.  It  is  generally  frozen  and  barren,  resembling 
Lapland  in  climate.  It  is  larger  than  the  whole  of  Eu- 
rope. Many  parts  of  it  are  immense  plains,  covered 
with  almost  perpetual  snow. 

Russia  obtains  large  supplies  of  precious  stones,  gold, 
silver  and  other  metals,  and  salt,  from  the  mines  of  this 
country  ;  and  the  finest  furs  from  its  wild  animals. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  country  occupies  the  north- 
ern part  of  Asia  ?  How  is  Siberia  bounded  ?  What  cape  is  on 
the  north  ?  What  islands  ?  What  chains  of  mountains  in  and 
around  it  ?  What  rivers  in  the  northern  part  ?  What  is  the 
capital  ? 

//.  What  places  on  the  River  Ural?  Where  is  Tobolsk? 
What  other  place  on  the  Oby  below  this  ?  Where  is  the  Steppe 
of  Issim?  (See  XLIII.  rf.)  What  lake  near  it  ?  Where  are  Kol- 
hy  vane  and  Tomsk  ?  What  'place  near  Lake  Baikal  ?  What 
river  passes  through  this  lake  ?  What  town  on  the  River  Lena  ? 
Where  is  Okotsk?  What  peninsula  on  the  east,  and  what 
towns  on  it  ?  What  missionary  stations  are  there  in  Siberia  ? 

MIDDLE  REGIONS  OF  ASIA. 

Circassia — Georgia — Tartary — Turkey — Persia—— 

Thibet — Japan. 

o20.  The  middle  regions  of  Asia  may  be  considered 
as  embracing  that  vast  mountainous  tract  or  lofty  plain, 
between  the  Altaian  chain  on  the  north,  and  the  Him- 
maleh  Mountains  and  Chinese  wall  on  the  south,  ex- 
tending from  the  Black  Sea  to  the  Channel  of  Tartary. 

321.  They  lie  between  30°  and  50°  of  N.  latitude  ; 
but  the  climate  and  productions  depend  chiefly  on  their 
situation,  and  the  height  of  the  ground.  (Sec  §113,  114.) 
12* 


134  DESCRIPTION  or  COUNT; 

The  southern  parts  of  Persia,  East  Persia  anu 
Thibet  extend  into  southern  Asia,  and  partake  of  it? 
clinr 

323.  A  part  of  Turkey  is  warmer  than  the  south  01" 
Europe  ;  but  in  general,  the  countries  west  of  the  Be- 
lur  Tag,  or  Cloudy  Mountains,  are  temperate.  The 
cold  is  moderated  by  the  seas  they  embrace,  and  the 
heat  by  the  mountains  which  cross  them. 

', .  The  countries  east  of  the  Belur  Tag  lie  chiefly 
on  one  lofty  plain,  and  are  subject  to  extreme  cold, 
even  as  far  south  as  Thibet  and  the  northern  parts  of 
Cabul ;  their  winters  being  much  more  severe  than  in 
the  L'nited  States.  The  air  of  these  regions  is  so  dry, 
that  meat  may  be  preserved  for  a  long  time  without 
salt. 

Questions. — /.  How  are  the  middle  countries  of  Asia  bound- 
ed *  In  what  latitudes  do  they  lie,  aud  how  is  their  climate 
determined  ':  What  parts  extend  into  Southern  Asia  ?  What  i? 
the  climate  W.  of  the  Belur  Tag,  and  why  ?  Describe  the  coun- 
tries E.  of  the  Belur  Tag.  What  is  remarkable  in  the  air  ? 
CIRCASSIA  AND  GEORGIA. 


Selling  a  Circassian  female. 

325.  Circassia  and  Georgia  lie  between  the  Caspian 
and  Black  Seas,  and  are  now  both  included  in  the  do- 
minions of  Russia  in  Asia. 


MIDDLE    REGIONS    OF    A.S1A. 

i  ircasoia  is  inhabited  by  numerous  hordes  of  wan- 
dering Tartars.  The  people  of  Georgia,  like  those  of 
Armenia,  profess  the  Christian  religion. 

These  countries  are  celebrated  for  beautiful  females, 
who  are  often  sold  as  slaves  to  the  Turks  and  Persians. 

Questions. — I.  Where    is   Circassia?    Where    is  Georgia? 
What  is  the  chief  city,  situated  on  the  River  Kur  ? 
TARTARY. 


Tartar  Tents  and  Cattle. 

326.  The  Tartars  live  in  tents  of  felt,  which  are  car- 
ried on  horses,  and  sometimes  on  wheels,  from  place 
to  place.     They  wander  in  vast  hordes  or  tribes,  to 
find  pasturage  for  their  horses,  camels  and  sheep,  and 
feed  chiefly  on  the  flesh  and  milk  of  these  animals. 

Tartary  occupies  almost  the  whole  of  the  middle  of 
from  the  Caspian  Sea  to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  It 
is  divided  into  Chinese  Tartary.  lying  east  of  the  Be- 
lur  Tag,  subject  to  China  ;  and  Independent  Tartary, 
west  of  these  mountains,  many  of  whose  hordes  pay 
tribute  to  the  emperor  of  Russia. 

INDEPENDENT    TARTARY. 

327.  This  country  has  &mne  climate,  and  generally, 
a  fertile  soil,  which  is  left  uncultivated. 

It  was  once  the  seat  of  a  powerful  empire,  and 
abounds  in  the  ruins  of  ancient  cities. 


••  DESCRIPTION    OF    COVNTRIE?. 

The  people  are  generally  barbarous  ;  bat  in  some 
parts  they  retain  a  small  portion  of  civilization  and 
knowledge. 

Samarcand,  the  former  capital,  is  said  to  be  very 
large  still.  It  contains  a  celebrated  Mahometan 
school,  or  university. 

Qutstiom  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Independent  Tartary 
UoundeJ  !  What  sea  does  it  contain  ?  What  rivers  has  it .' 
What  is  the  capital .'  What  other  city : 

CHI-VEaE    TARTARY. 

This  portion  of  Tartary  occupies  the  greater 
part  of  the  elevated  plain,  mentioned  in  the  account  of 
the  middle  regions  of  Asia. 

In  most  parts  it  is  very  barren,  and  scarcely  inhabit- 
ed ;  but  the  eastern  portion  contains  a  number  of  cities, 
little  known. 

'ion*  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Chinese  Tartary  bound- 
e  1 :  How  is  it  separated  from  China  ?  What  great  river  is  there 
uii  the  can  ':  \\  hat  place  on  it  ?  What  other  principal  places  in 
the  eastern  part  ':  What  peninsula  there,  and  what  islands '. 
What  deserts  in  the  interior  ?  What  place  in  the  western  part 
of  Chinese  Tartary  •>  (Clim.  324,  Dettrt  XLIII.  6.) 
TURKEY  IX  ASIA. 


Turks  silting. 
3£9.  Like  most  eastern  nations,  the  Turks  sit  on  the 
nod  take  their  food  with  their  fingers. 

was  the  original  seat  of  the  empire  of 


MIDDLE    REGIONS    OF    A.S  'i  37' 

ihe  Turks,  which  now  extends  to  Europe,  and  has  its 
capital  there. 

It  is  warmer  than  Turkey  in  Europe,  but  the  general 
character  of  the  country  and  people  is  the  same. 

Armenia  is  inhabited  by  Christians,  and  many  Greek 
Christians  are  scattered  over  other  parts  of  Turkey. 

The  southern  part,  now  called  Syria,  was  formerly 
the  residence  of  the  Jews,  with  Jerusalem  for  itstcapital. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Turkey  bounded  ?    What 
is  the  capital?  What  chain  of  mountains  in  Asia  Minor? 

//.  What  are  the  three  principal  divisions?  What  Christian 
province  is  there  in  Turkey, and  where?  What  rivers  run  from 
Turkey  into  the  Persian  Gulf?  What  port  on  the  Archipelago? 
What  port  on  the  Black  Sea?  What  places  near  the  Black 
Sea  ?  \V  hat  cities  on  the  Tigris,  beginning  at  its  soured  ?  Where 
is  Jerusalem  ?  What  three  seaports  in  Syria?  Where  are  Alep- 
po and  Damascus  ?  What  island  on  the  coast  of  Syria  ? 
PERSIA. 


Persian  ladies  riding  and  walking. 

330.  The  Persians  travel  chiefly  on  camels.  Their 
women  are  either  closely  shut  up,  or  cover  their  faces 
when  they  go  out. 

A  large  part  of  Persia  isKbvcred  with  barren  moun- 
tains and  desert  plains. 

The  air  is  cold  and  moist  at  the  north,  pure  and  se- 
rene in  the  middle,  but  extremely  hot  h:  il, 


MJ-1IOX    OF    LOI.MRIL5. 


The  people  are  active,  gay,  polished  and  hospitable, 
but  dishonest,  treacherous  and  vicious. 

Qutftioni  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Persia  bounded  ?  What  is 
the  capital  ?  Where  is  Ispahan  the  former  capital : 

//.  Where  is  Erivan  ?  What  other  cities  in  the  north  ?  What 
seaport  on  the  Gulf  of  Persia :  Where  is  Shiraz  ?  Are  there 
any  considerable  rivers  ? 

KAST  PERSIA. 

.  The  eastern  part  of  Persia,  which  was  separa- 
ted from  the  rest  some  years  since,  contains  a  number 
of  distinct  governments,  most  of  which  are  tributary 
to  the  king  of  Cabul.  It  is  therefore  often  called  Ca- 
bulistan,  and  sometimes  Afghanistan,  from  the  Afghans, 
a  part  of  its  inhabitants. 

This  country  is  mountainous,  and  therefore  cooler 
than  those  around  it. 

The  people,  especially  the  Afghans,  are  more  ac- 
tive and  warlike  than  their  neighbours,  and  have  en- 
croached on  their  dominions. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  East  Persia  bounded  ? 
What  are  the  two  principal  divisions  ?  What  is  the  capital  ? 
What  mountains  on  the  north  ?  What  separates  it  from  Hin- 
doostan :  What  city  has  it  east  of  the  Indus  ?  What  city  in 
the  west,  and  of  what  size  '".  What  river  and  what  city  in  the 
south  ?  What  place  near  the  mouth  of  the  Indus  •' 
THIBET. 


hip  of  the  Grand  Lama. 
In  Thibet  thev  worshio  the  Grand  Lama,  or 


MIDDLE    REGIONS    OF    ASIA. 


139 


head  of  their  religion  and  government,  as  a  divine  he- 
ing.  When  he  dies,  they  believe  his  soul  passes  into 
the  body  of  some  child,  who  is  sought  and  placed  on 
the  throne. 

Thibet  is  a  very  dry,  cold,  unfruitful  country,  in  the 
midst  of  mountains,  subject  to  the  emperor  of  China. 

The  people  are  mild,  but  indolent,  timid  and  super- 
stitious. They  have  much  more  knowledge  and  skill 
in  the  arts  than  the  Tartars. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Thibet  bounded  ?   What  is 
the  capital  ?  What  large  rivers  rise  in  the  mountains  of  Thibet* 
What  is  the  height  of  the  highest  ?  (See  XLVII.) 
NAPAUL  A\D  BOOTAIV. 

333.  These  two  kingdoms  lie  between  Thibet  and 
Hindoostan,  and  are  tributary  to  Thibet. 

They  properly  belong  to  Southern  Asia,  and  have  a 
warm,  but  fine  climate,  like  the  north  of  Italy. 

By  ascending  the  mountains  near  them,  the  inhabi- 
tants may  have  perpetual  spring,  or  unchanging 
winter. 

Questions. — /.  What  is  the  situation  of  these  kingdoms  ? 
What  can  you  say  of  the  climate  and  mountains :  Why  are  the  y 
not  very  hot,  like  Hindoostan  ?  (Ses  113.) 
JAPAN. 


Japanese  trampUji*  on  ;h>'  f 
334.  The  Japanese  were  fonnorlv  obliged  --•'., -r 


to  trample  on  the  cross,  as  a  token  of  their  hatred  (o 
Christianity,  which  was  once  introduced  among  them 
bj  Portuguese  Catholics.  This  custom  is  said  to  be 
abolished. 

Japan  is  subject  to  extremes  of  heat  and  cold,  but  is 
highly  cultivated,  and  is  said  to  be  the  richest  of  all 
countries  in  gold  and  silver. 

The  people  are  very  ingenious,  and  are  considered 
superior  in  arts,  sciences  and  good  laws,  to  most  if  not 
all  other  nations  of  Asia. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Where  are  the  islands  of  Japan, 
c.-:l  how  many  are  there:  Which  is  the  largest  ':  What  is  the 
capital  ?  What  is  the  second  city  ?  Where  is  the  chief  place  of 
trade,  Xanjasaki  ? 

SOUTHERN  ASIA. 

Arabia — Hindoostan — Birmah — Tonkin — Siam-*- 
Malaya — China. 

335.  The  southern  countries  of  Asia  lie  generally  on 
the  Indian  Ocean,  between  10°  and  30°  of  N.  latitude. 

This  division  of  Asia  contains  Arabia.  Hindoostan, 
Birmah,  Tonkin,  Siam.  Malaya  and  China.  China 
extends  north  to  40°  of  latitude,  and  Malaya  south  to 
the  equator. 

336.  All  these  countries,  except  the  northern  part? 
of  China,  have  the  climate  and  productions  of  the  Tor- 
rid Zone,  and  the  choicest  plants  of  A- 

337.  They  abound  in    rice,    which  is  the  principal 
food  of  the  inhabitants,  and  io  cotton  and  silk,  from 
which  most  of  their  clothing  is  made. 

CCCXXXVIII.     (For  the  /tat  etc.) 

a.  Except  Arabia,  they  are  highly  cultivated,  but  so  crowded 

with  inhabitants,  thai  the  common  people  are  miserably  poor, 

and  are  often  led  by  want,  to  destroy  or  expose  their  children. 

I  any  of  these  nations  are  from  necessity,  more  active  and 

industrious  than  others  found  in  the  Torrid  Zone. 

e.  The  chief  exports  of  Southern  Asia  and  its  islands  are  cof- 
fee, tea,  gums,  opium,  spice?,  precious  stones  and  metals  with 
numerous  manufactures  of  silk  and  cotton. 

Questions. — /.    Where  do  the  southern   countries-  c : 
'•"hat  countries  are    included  in  this  division  c: 


-SOUTHERN    ASIA.  i  11 

How  far  do  China  and  Malaya  extend  ?    What  cun  you  say  of 
the  climate  and  productions  ?  \ 

II.    What   articles  of  food,  and  materials  for   clothing  are 
found  here  ?  What  is  the  state  of  population,  and  of  the  com- 
mon people  ?     What  effect  does  necessity  produce  on  the  ehst 
racter  of  the  people  ?  What  are  the  chief  exports  5 
ARABIA. 


Tent  of  an  Arab. 

339.  The  interior  of  Arabia  is  inhabited  by  wander- 
ing Arabs,  who  live  in  tents,  and  subsist  by  pasturage- 
and  robbery. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  coast  live  in  towns  and  citie>. 
and  are  much  more  advanced  in    civilization. 
chart  of  the  World.} 

The  climate  of  Arabia  is  very  hot  and  dry,  and  tin- 
interior  is  a  sandy  desert,  where  water  is  seldom  found. 
This  was  the  '  wilderness'  which  the  Israelites  crossed 
in  going  from  Egypt  to  Canaan. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Arabia  bounded  ?  Wha.5. 
do  you  find  in  the  interior?  What  mountains  are  the  princi- 
pal? What  remarkable  mountain  near  the  Red  Sea  ?  An- 
there  any  considerable  rivers  ?  What  is  the  capital  ? 

//.  What  is  the  port  of  Mecca  on  the  Red  Sea  ?  Whirh 
way  from  Mecca  is  Medina  ?  Wrhat  is  the  principal  place  in 
the  east?  Where  is  Mocha?  What  place  is  near  it?  Wli;it 
place  in  the  S.  E.,  and  how  situated ?  What  Arabian  i-ilarv! 
near  Cape  Guardafui  ?  What  wind  blows  here  ?  (X(?  CXVF.  e -. ' 
13 


r 


INDIA. 

340.  This  name  comprehends  the  two  peninsulas  ol 
Southern  Asia  which  are  east  of  Arabia,  divided  into 
India  within  the  Ganges,  and  India  without,  or  east  of 
the  Ganges. 

The  name  India,  or  East  Indies,  is  often  vsed  to  iit- 
dvde  China  and  the  Asiatic  hlands  also. 

These  peninsulas  are  remarkabldti^rthe  number  and 
size  of  their  riven=,  which,  united  with  the  heat  of  the 
climate,  make  them  the  mo-=t  fertile  countries  on  earth. 

HP 
Or  Indi.i 


.1 

341.   It  is  one  of  the  religious  customs  of  the  Hin- 
thut  wiriotvs  should  be  burned  or  buried  alive, 
with  the  dead  bodies  of  their  hu>band?  ;  and  hundreds 
src  thus  de--::  '.r. 

Hindoosian  i?  divided  into  a  great  number  of  small 

kingdoms  ;  but  the  British  govern  almost  all  that  por- 

^hich  lies  on  the  Bay  of  Bengal  and  the  Ganges. 

It  is  a  very  hot.  but  moist  coontry,  producing  the 

fruits  and  plants  in  abundance.      (See  336,  337.; 

The  people  are  effeminate,  indolent,  and  extremely 

<p. —  /.  How   is  Hir, •"< 


145 


VVlxa.t  mountains  ^re  tliere  on  the  north  .'  What  is  the  chief 
river?  What  three  rivers  in  the  southern  part?  What  is  the 
capital  ?  Where  is  Delhi,  the  former  capital  ? 

II.  Where  is  Agra  ?  Mention  the  chief  cities  on  the  Ganges 
in  their  order.  What  are  tlie  eastern  and  western  coasts  called  :' 
What  places  on  the  eastern  coast?  What  on  the  western  coast  ? 
How  is  Bombay  situated?  What  cities  in  the  interior  of  the 
southern  part  of  Hindoostan  ?  What  in  the  western  part  : 
Where  is  Golconda,  celebrated  for  its  diamonds  ?  What  is  the 
southern  cape  of  Hindoostan  ?  What  small  islands  are  near  it  ? 
What  large  island  ?  What  missionary  stations  are  there  in 
Hindoostan  ? 

CEYLON. 

342.  Ceylon  is  a  large  fertile  island,  which  produce* 
iilmost  all  the  cinnamon  brought  from  India. 

It  abounds  in  precious  stones,  and  has  a  pearl  fishery 
on  its  coast. 

The  coasts  of  this  island  are  possessed  by  the  British. 
It  contains  a  large  number  of  Catholics. 

Questions  on  the  map. — 7.  Where  does  Ceylon  lie  ?  What  is 
the  chief  town  ?  Where  is  Trincomaly  ? 

INDIA,  WITHOUT  THE    CIANT.KS. 

343.  This  part  of  India  lies  south  of  Thibet,  between 
the  Ganges  and  the  Chinese  Sea,  including  the  empire* 
of  Birmah  and  Tonkin,  with  Si  am  and  Malaya. 

BIRMAH,  OR   BIRMAN  EMPIRE. 


'  Elephants  i  ',ur<le>is. 

344.  The  Birman  empire  produces  very  tin*  el<v 


ION     Ol- 


phants.  which  are  trained  for  riding  and  carrying  bur- 
den?, and  <  -I  in  unlading  ships. 

This  empire  includes  Ava,  Pegu,  and  several  smal 
ioms,  subdued  by  the  more  active  and  warlikt 
Rinnans. 

The  climate  is  cooler  than  that  of  Hindoostan,  fron 
the  greater  height  of  the  land,  but  is  still  very  hot. 

The  people  are  lively  and  intelligent,  and  acquainted 

with  many  of  the  arts  ;  but  they  are  extremely  crue 

»-ir  punishments,  and  barbarous  in  many  of  thei: 

Qut-ttians  on   the   map.  —  /.     How  is  the   Birman  Empir 

•  Vhal  is  the  chief  river?  What  is  the  capital 
II.  What  seaport  in  the  south  '.    What  places  on  the  Rive 
IrrawaJy?     Where  is    Arracan?    (Clim,  &    Prod.  336,  337. 
SIAM. 


Houses  j 

In  Siam,  as  in  many  of  the  neighbouring  COUE 

-   the  inhabitants  are  obliged  to  build  their  bouse 

on  posts,  to  avoid  the  annual   floods  of  their  rivers 

which  cover  the  country  with  water,  but  render  th 

soil  very  fertile. 

It  is  a  small  but  rich  and  flourishing  kingdom,  wit 
i  climate  awl  people  like  those  of  Birmah. 

•  ons  on  ike  map. — 7.  Where  does  Siam   lie?  Is  it 
kingdom  ?  What  is  the  capital  ?  (Prod.  336.  7 A 


saimjKR.\   ASIA. 
EMPIRE  OF  TONKIN. 


14. 


Jl  Tonkin  Priest  burning  a  prayer. 


346.  The  Empire  of  Tonkin  is  said  to  extend  orer 
;ill  the  countries  east  of  Birmah  and  Siam,  including 
Cochin  China,  Cambodia  and  Laos,  but  very  little  is 
known  certainly  concerning  these  countries. 

In  Tonkin  it  is  said  the  people  write  their  prayer;, 
and  the  priests  burn  them  before  their  idols. 

Although  they  are  very  superstitious,  they  are  gene- 
rally intelligent,  active  and  industrious,  and  distin- 
guished among  Asiatics  for  honesty. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  In  what  direction  from  Birmah  is 
Tonkin  ?  What  countries  does  it  embrace  ?  How  is  it  bound- 
ed ?  What  river  passes  through  it  ?  What  is  the  capital  * 
What  other  principal  place?  What  place  in  Cambodia?  What 
gull'  "n  the  east,  and  what  island  ?  (Clitn.  and  Prod.  336, 337.) 
MALAYA. 

347.  Malaya,  or  Malacca,  is  a  hot,  but  productive 
country,  containing  many  independent  kingdoms. 

The  people  of  this  peninsula  are  bold  and  enterpris- 
ing, but  remarkable  for  treachery  and  cruelty. 

Questions  on  the  map. — I.  How  is  Malacca  bounded  ?  Wha< 
is  the  chief  town  ?  (dim.  and  Prod.  336,  337.) 
13* 


Olr    cvJ 
CHINA. 


TheOiinese  Jf 

i48.  The  Chinese  former!)7  tried  to  defend  them- 
selves against  the  Tartars,  by  a  wall  with  gates  and  nu- 
merous towers,  most  of  which  still  remains.  It  h 
sufficiently  broad  for  several  persons  to  ride  abreast 
extending  1500  miles,  over  rivers  and  lofty  mountains 

China  is  also  remarkable  for  the  tea  plant,  and  foi 
eautiful  porcelain  ware,  called  china. 

The  soil  in  China  is  every  where  cultivated  wilt 
the  greatest  care,  and  an  immense  population  is  sup 
ported  ;  but  great  numbers  live  on  the  water  in  boats 
and  the  poor  suffer  for  want  of  food.  • 

The  people  are  ingenious  and  industrious,  but  tim 
id,  dishonest,  and  treacherous  in  their  intercourse  will 
strangers. 

Quettions  e«  the  map. — /.  How  is  China  bounded  ?  When 

is  the  Chinese  wall :  In  what  latitude  does  China  lie :   Wha 

must  we  su  ornate  of  the  various  parts '.    Wha 

are  the  two  chief  rivers ':  What  is  the  capital?  What  are  tht 

.pal  ports  re  is   the   most   remarkabl) 

of  China  :  What  large  island  lies  near  the  coast '  Wha 

small  cluster  bevond  it  -  What  countries  of  Asia  are  sv  < 


.ASIATIC    ISLKs.  147 

JBAST  INDIA  OR  ASIATIC  ISLANDS. 


Animals  of  the  Asiatic  Islands. 

349.  The  Asiatic  Islands  may  be  considered  as  ex- 
tending to  10°  S.  latitude,  and  130°  W.  longitude. 

350.  They  produce  the  finest  fruits,  gums,  spices  and 
minerals.  They  also  abound  with  wild  animals,  among 
which  are  the  ourang  outang,  crocodile,  tiger,  rhinoce- 
ros, &c.     The  tiger  and  rhinoceros  have  severe  con- 
tests, in  which  the  rhinoceros  often  throws  his  adver- 
sary into  the  air  with  his  horn. 

35L  These  islands  are  divided  into  three  principal 
groups,  the  Sunda  Isles,  the  Molucca  or  Spice  Isles, 
and  the  Philippine  Isles. 

THE    SUNDA    ISLES. 

352.  The  Sunda  Isles  include  Sumatra,  Java,  and 
<oti  :r  islands  south  of  Borneo  and  Celebez. 

They  furnish  gold,  diamonds  and  gums  ;  but  pep- 
per is  the  most  important  production. 

They  are  inhabited  by  a  mixture  of  Chinese,.  Malays 
and  natives,  and  have  much  commerce.  The  interior 
is  little  known. 

Sumatra  has  a  ridge  of  mountains  running  through  it. 
the  highest  being  loftier  than  the  Alps,  which  render 
the  climate  generally  agreeable,  and  in  some  part«  coir), 


148  DESCRIPTION    OF    COtXT 


is  a  beautiful  and  fertile  inland,  but  ver  . 
healthy.     It  is,  now  owned  by  the  Dutch. 

Questions  on  the  map.  —  /.  Which  way  from  Malacca 
matra  ?  What  "straits  separate  it  ?  In  what  zone  is  it  ?  Where 
is  the  British  settlement  of  Bencoolen  ?  What  other  place  d» 
you  find  ?  Which  way  from  Sumatra  is  Java  :  What  strait 
between  them  ?  What  is  the  capital  ?  What  ore  the  other 
principal  islands  among  the  Sunda  Isles  ? 

BORNEO    AXD    CEI-EBEZ. 

353.  BORNEO  is  a  very  large  island,  entirely  possess- 
ed by  the  nati 

It  is  rich  in  gold,  diamonds,  pearls,  and  valuable 
plants,  and  is  remarkable  as  the  residence  of  the  ourang- 
outang,  an  animal  very  much  like  man. 

354.  CELEBEZ  is  a  fruitful  island,  little  known,  with 
a  settlement  belonging  to  the  Dutch  at  Macassar.    The 
natives  are  said  to  be  ingenious  and  brare,  but  fero- 
cious and  cruel. 

Questions  on  the  map.  —  /.  Where  is  Borneo?  What  is  the 
capital?  Between  what  islands  does  Celebez  lie?  Where  i? 
Macassar  ? 

THE    MOLUCCAS,    OR    SPICE    ISLANDS. 

355.  The  Moluccas,  or  Spice  Island?,  are  remark- 
able for  producing  spices,  and  especially  the  nutmeg 
and  clove.     They  now  belong  to  the  Netherlands. 

Question*  on  the  map.  —  7.  What  islands  are  included  in  the 
Moluccas?  Which  is  the  largest  ?  Mention  the  relative  situa- 
tion of  the  others. 

PHILIPPIKE    ISLES. 

356.  The  Philippine  Isles  are  posseseedt>y  the  Span- 
iards. who  have  derived  great  revenues  from  them. 

They  produce  gold  and  other  metals,  with  cotton. 
rice,  and  sugar  in  great  abundance. 

Question*  on  the  map.  —  I.  Which  is  the  largest  of  the  Phil- 
ippine Isles  :  What  others  are  the  principal  -  What  is  the 
chief  city,  and  its 


143 
AUSTRALASIA. 


Houses  of  Australasia. 

357.  Most  of  the  people  of  Australasia  live  in  rude 
huts  of  bark,  often  built  on  floats,  and  some  even  sleep 
on  trees. 

358.  These  nations  are  in  a  ruder  state  of  society 
than  any  yet  known,  with  the  patriarchal  government, 
and  without  any  religion  or  knowledge  of  a  future  state, 
so  far  as  can  be  discovered. 

Many  tribes  among  them  are  without  huts,  clothes, 
boats,  or  implements  for  hunting  and  fishing,  and  feed 
on  fruits,  shell-fish,  or  even  on  caterpillars  and  worms. 

Very  little  is  known  of  this  portion  of  the  world,  ex- 
cept the  coasts. 

359.  The  people  of  New-Holland,  and  New-Guinea, 
and  the  islands  near  the  latter,  are  of  the  African  race. 
Those  of  the  New-Hebrides,  New-Zealand,  and  the 
more  Southern  isles,  resemble  the  Asiatics. 

Qwes/ioTW. — /.  What  can  you  say  of  the  houses  of  the  Aus- 
tralasians? What  is  their  state  of  civilization  generally  ?  What 
can  you  say  of  some  tribes  ?  What  is  known  of  these  coun- 
tries? Of  what  races  are  the  inhabitants?  Between  what 
oceans  does  Australasia  lie  ?  (See  map  of  the  World.)  What 
are  the  two  largest  islands  ?  What  are  some  of  the  smaller 


150  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUXTME*. 

ones  E.  of  New-Guinea?  What  west  of  this  island;  What 
straits  between  New-Holland  and  New  Guinea  ?  What  bland 
E.  of  New-Holland.  What  one  S.  of  it,  and  what  strait? 
separate  it  from  New-Holland?  What  considerable  island  S.  E. 
of  New-Holland  ?  What  are  some  of  the  capes  of  New-Holland : 

NEW-HOLLA-fD. 

360.  New-Holland  is  an  extensive  island,  only  one 
quarter  less  than  Europe. 

The  people  of  New-Holland  generally  resemble  Af- 
ricans in  every  thing  except  the  straightness  of  their 
hair;  but  some  are  found  among  them  of  the  Malay  race. 

The  British  have  established  a  settlement  on  Port 
Jackson  (formerly  on  Botany  Bay)  to  which  they  sentl 
criminals  from  England. 

VAN  DIEMAX'S  LAND,  the  island  south  of  Ne>v  Hol- 
land, is  also  settled  by  the  British. 

Quef/zoni  on  the  map. — /.  What  i=  the  comparative  size  of 
New-Holland?  What  Gulf  on  the  N.  of  New-Holland  ?  What 
names  are  <riven  to  the  northern,  eastern,  and  western  coasts  ': 
Where  is  Port  Jackson  ?  Where  is  Sidney  Cove  :  What  mis- 
sionary station  near  it?  What  other  in  Australasia?  Where 
does  Van  Dieinan's  Land  lie  '  What  settlement  is  there  on  it : 

NEW-ZEALAND. 

361.  New-Zealand    contains    two    large    fertile 
islands,  which  enjoy  a  mild  climate  like  that  of  France. 

The  people  are  tall  an»i  well  formed,  and  more  civ- 
ilized than  in  any  other  portion  of  Australasia.    The] 
are  brave  and  generous  in  many  respects  ;  but  thei 
eat  the  bodies  of  their  enemies  killed  in  war. 

One  of  the  kings  has  received  Christian  missionaries 
with  great  kindness,  who  are  beginning  to  introduce 
civilization  and  Christianity  among  the  people. 

Questiom — /.  What  is  the  climate  of  New-Zealand?  What 
can  you  say  of  the  people  ?  What  improvement  is  beginning 
among  them  ?  How  many  islands  are  there  belonging  to  New  • 
Zealand  :  What  straits  divide  them  ?  (See  map  of  1he  7T 


fOL  \XESn.  loJ 

XKW-GU1NEA    AND    OTHER    ISLANDS. 

.'.  NEW-GUINEA,  NEW-BRITAIN,  and  the  neigh- 
bouring islands,  lying  in  the  north-eastern  part  of  Aus- 
tralasia, have  been  little  examined. 

They  are  rich  in  vegetable  productions,  and  are  dis- 
tinguished as  the  chief  residence  of  the  bird  of  paradise. 

363.  NEW-CALEDONIA  and  the  NEW-HEBRIDES  are 
snid  to  be  barren  and  rocky  islands.  The  people  build 
neat  huts,  and  subsist  on  roots  and  fish. 

Questions.— I.  What  islands  lie  north  of  New-Holland? 
What  is  known  of  them  ?  What  are  east  of  New-Holland  ? 
What  can  you  say  of  them  ? 

POLYNESIA. 


Human  Sacrifice  in  Polynesia. 
3G4.  Polynesia  includes  the  islands  in  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  which  lie  east  of  the  Philippine  Islands  and 
Australasia.  (See  map  of  the  World.}  In  almost  all 
these  islands,  they  have  been  accustomed  to  sacrifice 
human  victims  to  their  gods. 

365.  The  climate  of  these  islands  is  generally  de- 
lightful, and  they  abound  in  fine  fruits,  especially  the 
bread-fruit,  which  is  used  instead  of  bread. 

366.  The  people  are  remarkably  mild,  polite  and 
ingenious,  for  barbarians  ;  but  dishonest,  vicious,  and 

1  in  rnnnv  of  their  customs. 


332  DESCRIPTION  OF  COUNTRIES. 

367.  Most  of  the  nations  of  Polynesia  are  Pagans  ; 
but  those  of  the  Society  and  Sandwich  Islands  have 
destroyed  their  idola  and  temples,  and  received  Chris- 
tian missionaries. 

Questions. — /.  What  is  Polynesia  ?  What  custom  has  been 
generally  prevalent :  In  what  zone  do  most  of  these  islands  lie  ? 
What  effect  must  their  situation  as  islands  have  upon  their  cli- 
mate :  (See  \  114.)  What  is  their  climate  in  fact?  What  are 
some  of  their  productions?  What  is  the  character  of  the  peo- 
ple '.  What  is  their  religion  ? 

ISLANDS  NORTH  OF  THE  EaVATOR. 

368.  The   inhabitants  of  the  PELEW   ISLANDS  are 
very  hospitable  to  strangers,  and  remarkable  for  hon- 
esty and  chastity. 

369.  The  CAROLINES  are  resorted  to  by  ships  after 
voyages  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  on  account  of  their  fine 
air  and  climate. 

370.  The  SAXDWJCH  ISLANDS  are  supposed  to  con- 
tain 400,000  inhabitants;  Owhyhee  is  180  miles  long 
and  72  bro«d.    Christian  missionaries  from  the  United 
States  are  now  instructing  the  people  of  these  islands. 

Questions  on  the  map. —  I.  What  3  groups  of  islands  are  N. 
of  the  Equator  ?  In  what  direction  from  the  Philippine  Isles 
are  the  Ladrones  and  Caroline  Isles  ?  In  what  longitude  are 
the  Sandwich  Islands  ?  Which  is  the  largest  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands  ?  What  others  are  the  principal,  and  in  what  direction 
from  Owhyhee  ?  What  are  some  of  the  small  islands  lying  be- 
tween the  Sandwich  and  Caroline  isles  ? 

ISLANDS  SOUTH  OT  THE  EftUATOR. 


TRAVELS    ON    THK    MAF.  15. 

almost  as  fair  as  Europeans,  with  regular  forms  and  fea- 
tures. 

Questions  on  the  map. — I.  What  are  the  principal  groups  of 
islands  S  of  the  Equator  ?  In  what  longitude  are  the  Friendly 
and  Navigator's  Isles?  What  is  the  principal  island  among 
the  Friendly  Islands  ?  What  among  the  Navigator's  Isles  ?  (n 
what  direction  are  the  Society  lies  from  the  Friendly  Isles? 
What  are  the  chief  of  thes»  islands.  Where  are  the  Marque- 
sas ?  In  what  longitude  are  these  islands?  What  single  islands 
N.  and  E. of  these  groups  ? 

CCCLXXV.     TRAVELS  ON  THE  MAP, 
In  Asia,  Australasia  and  Polynesia. 

If  you  wish  to  travel  in  Asia,  it  will  be  best  to  embark  for 
Smyrna,  where  many  American  vessels  go  to  obtain  opium, 
figs,  and  other  fruits,  and  .-ilks. 

Describe  your  course  from  the  United  States  to  Smyrna. 
(Ste  map  of  'he  World)  What  kind  of  people  do  you  expect 
to  see  there?  (307  329  )  Which  way  will  you  go  to  visit 
Ephesus  ?  (See  map  of  Europe.) 

Travellers  in  Asiatic  Turkey,  usually  suffer  their  beards  to 
grow,  and  dress  in  robes  and  turbans,  and  slippers,  because 
the  Turks  often  insult,  and  even  kill,  those  they  know  to  be 
Christians,  and  think  it  is  no  crime. 

Through  what  seas  and  straits  must  you  pass  to  visit  Con- 
stantinople? (See  map  of  Europe.)  How  mu=t  you  sit  and 
eat  here?  What  is  the  nearest  Russian  port  to  Constantino  le? 
What  sea  must  you  cross  to  visit  Circassia  :  Where  is  Astrachan? 

In  the  Eastern  part  of  Siberia-  you  would  be  amused  at  be- 
ing drawn  by  dogs,  but  you  will^  spend  your  time  more  profit- 
ably in  other  parts  of  the  world,  than  in  taking  the  long,  cold, 
and  difficult  journey  through  it. 

What  have  other  travellers  found  in  Siberia,  and  how  is  it 
used  as  a  place  of  punishment?  (318.)  Through  what  port  on 
the  Caspian  can  you  pass,  to  s^e  Tellis,  the  capital  of  Georgia  ? 
In  Wi.at  direction  will  you  go  to  visit  Jerusalem  5  What  places 
shall  you  pass,  and  what  can  you  ?ay  of  them  ? 

Do  not  fail  to  visit  Mount  Ararat,  in  Armenia,  on  which  the 
Ark  rested  after  the  deluge. 

What  can  you  say  of  Jerusalem  and  Syria?  Who  formerly 
lived  here,-  and.what  great  events  have  taken  place  ?  (329.) 

In  what  direction  is  Egypt  from  Jerusalem  '     Where  will 
you  find  the  splendid  ruins  of  Palmyra  ?    (See  map  of  Africa.'} 
14 


154  BEacaiPTioa  OF 

If  you  wish  to  see  the  Arabian  desert,  mnd  visit  Mount  Sinai, 
you  must  carry  water  with  you  in  bags  of  skins,  and  procure 
fmt»ft*  who  can  drink,  at  once,  enough  for  several  days. 

What  is  the  direction  of  Mecca  from  Mount  Sinai  ?  In  what 
direction  is  Mocha,  which  produces  the  finest  coffee. 

Which  are  most  civilized,  the  Arabs  on  the  coast  or  in  the 
interior  ?  (339.)  What  port  will  you  find  at  the  head  of  the 
Red  Sea?  (See  map  ^  Afiic*.)  What  course  will  you  take  by 
sea,  to  goto  Bushirein  Persia: 

Observe  in  the  Persian  Gulf,  the  poor  divers,  who  are  slaves, 
obliged  to  hazard  their  lives  in  procuring  the  pearl-oysters. 

How  do  the  ladies  travel  in  Persia  ?  (330.)  Shall  you  see 
their  frees  ?  In  what  direction  will  you  go  to  the  ancient  capi- 
tal ?  Where  is  the  modern  capital,  and  what  can  you  say  of 
these  cities?  How  has  Persia  been  divided  ?  (331.)  How  will 
you  go  to  the  eastern  portion  of  it  f  Are  the  people  of  this 
country  like  those  of  West  Persia  ? 

•What  interesting  objects  shall  you  see  in  Independent  Tar- 
tary  ?  (327.)  How  do  you  like  their  mode  of  living  here,  and 
their  food:  (326.)  What  mountains  must  yon  cross  to  go  into 
Chinese  Tartary  ?  What  country  will  then  be  near  you? 

Tou  may  now  go  to  see  the  Grand  Lama.  (See  332.)    Re- 
member, when  you  go  to  risk  a  great  man  in  Asia,  always  t 
carry  a  present  with  you  of  some  value. 

What  desert  must  you  cross  to  reach  Eastern  Tartary? 
yoa  find  any  cities  there  ? 

Perhaps  yoa  will  see,  as  yoa  pass,  some  helpless,  aged 
pie,  whom  their  children  have  left  to  perish  with  hunger. 

What  small   but   wealthy  kingdom  is  now  east   of  you 
Wh»t  wall  must  you  cross  to  go  into  China :  If  you  are 
milled  to  travel  in  China,  (which  will  not  be  unless  you  are 
company  with  an  ambassador;  which  way  will   you  go  to  t 
capital?    What  is  your  coarse  from  thence  to  Nankin,  and 
Canton?     What  is  the  general  state  of  the  people?  (348.) 

Ton  may  now  lay  aside  all  your  thick  clothing,  for  it  will 
of  no  use  to  you  in  these  countries. 

How  wiD  yoa  go  to  visit  all  the  capitals  of  India  without 
Ganges?  What  mode  of  conveyance  shall  you  find?  (344.) 
What  kind  of  houses  ?  (345.)  Will  you  venture  to  Malacca? 
(See  347.)  In  what  direction  will  you  go  to  Calcutta  ? 

What  do  you  think  of  the  Hindoos  ?  Do  they  need  any  in- 
struction and  reformation?  (34L)  To  what  neighbouring 


i  ;•.  \VELS   o.\   rut:  MAP.  Ida 

country  can  you  go  to  avoid  the  heat ?  (333.)  What  island  S. 
of  Hindoostan,  and  what  spice  can  you  obtain  there  ?    (342.) 

In  the  other  islands  of  Asia  you  will  only  be  able  to  visit  the 
European  settlements.  Beware  as  you  go,  of  the  treacherous 
Malays,  who  often  visit  vessels  in  a  friendly  manner,  and  then 
slaughter  every  man  on  board. 

What  course  will  you  take  to  visit  the  chief  European  settle- 
ments in  the  islands  of  Asia,  beginning  at  Sumatra?  Describe 
the  islands  you  will  see  on  your  voyage,  so  far  as  known,  ending 
your  course  at  the  Spice  Islands.  How  do  you  like  the  ap- 
pearance and  customs  of  the  people  of  Australasia  ?  What 
Europeans  shall  you  find  in  New-Holland  ?  What  missionary 
stations  shall  you  find  in  this  portion  of  the  world  ?  What  peo- 
ple iq  Australasia  do  you  like  best  ? 

What  Christian  nation  shall  you  find  in  Polynesia  ?  (373.) 
Describe  the  islands  you  pass  in  going  to  them.  (371,  372.) 

When  you  reach  Otaheite,  you  will  find  many  Christian 
churches,  and  the  people  beginning  to  be  industrious,  and 
anxious  to  be  acquainted  with  books. 

What  islands  are  north-east  of  these  ?  What  can  you  say  of 
them?  (374.)  In  what  direction  will  you  go  to  find  the  Sand- 
wich Islands,  where  missionaries  have  gone  from  America  ? 
What  courses  will  you  take  to  go  home  round  Cape  Horn,  and 
what  countries  shall  you  pass  ? 

CCCLXXVI.        CITIES  OF  ASIA. 

Asia  abounds  with  large  cities,  but  much  inferior  in  their 
appearance  to  those  of  Europe.  The  buildings  are  generally 
mean,  and  crowded  with  inhabitants.  The  streets  are  ex- 
tremely narrow,  irregular  and  filthy,  and  not  usually  paved. 

In  western  Asia  the  houses  of  the  rich  are  usually  of  stone, 
or  of  brick,  which  are  sometimes  only  sun-dried.  They  are 
generally  built  around  a  court  or  space  in  the  centre,  from 
which  they  receive  most  of  their  light  and  air,  and  which  is  fre- 
quently adorned  with  gardens  and  fountains.  The  houses  are 
often  magnificent  within :  but  they  have  few  or  no  windows 
to\\  rds  the  street,  and  present  to  the  traveller  only  a  dismal 
succession  of  high  walls,  with  here  and  there  a  lattice,  produc- 
ing the  appearance  of  a  range  of  prisons.  The  roofs  are  usually- 
flat,  so  that  the  inhabitants  can  pans  from  one  house  to  another 
without  descending  into  the  street.  They  frequently  sleep  on 
the  house  top,  in  the  hot  season.  The  houses  of  the  poor  are 
usually  low  and  mean,  built  of  mud,  or  a  mixture  of  small 
stones  and  mortar. 


J55(6)  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

Instead  of  churches,  the  Mahometan  cities  are  adorned  with 
mosques,  which  are  often  very  splendid.  At  the  side  of  each 
mosque  are  minarets,  or  lofty  circular  towers,  with  a  gallery 
near  the  top,  from  which  a  crier  calls  the  people  at  the  hours  of 
prayer. 

The  cities  of  Turkey,  as  well  as  those  of  Africa  on  the  Med- 
iterranean, are  frequently  visited  by  the  plague,  which  destroys 
vast  numbers  of  the  inhabitants. 

The  cities  of  Eastern  Asia,  (except  a  few  in  Hindoostan) 
are  poorly  built,  and  are  much  inferior  to  those  of  Western 
Asia.  They  are  generally  low  thatched  huts,  formed  of  mud 
or  of  bamboo.  Even  the  ralace  of  the  emperor  of  China  is 
only  a  collection  of  mean  cottages,  richly  gilded,  and  hung 
with  splendid  curtains  and  other  orn  ments.  These  cities  are 
built  of  such  slight  materials  that  they  are  frequently  destroyed 
by  fire,  but  are  easily  rebuilt.  The  temples  and  pagodas  are 
generally  the  only  building^  which  have  any  beauty,  and  these 
are  often  splendidly  adorned  with  gold  and  gilding,  and  espe- 
cially in  China  and  Birmah. 

Most  of  the  cities  of  Asia  are  surrounded  with  walls,  usually 
of  mud  or  sun-dried  bricks.  Many  of  them  are  partially  in 
ruins,  or  surrounded  with  the  ruins  of  ancient  cities. 

dstrachan  i»  a  place  of  great  trade,  situated  on  an  island  in 
the  Volga.  Its  population  is  a  mixed  assemblage  of  various 
nations.  Irkutsk,  the  principal  town  of  Eastern  Siberia,  is  a 
place  of  considerable  trade  and  population,  resembling  Euro- 
pean cities  in  it?  churches  and  public  buildings.  Tobolsk  and 
Tomsk  are  im[>ortant  on  account  of  the  trade  carried  on  through 
them,  between  Russia  and  China.  Teflis  is  noted  for  its  warm 
bath?. 

Samarcand  was  formerly  the  roost  renowned  city  ofthe  Eas 
Bucharia  i?  a  ulace  of  considerable  trade  and  important 
Both  are  noteJ  tor  their  Mahometan  col" 

Aleppo  is  the  principal  city  of  Asiatic  Turkey.  Da 
is  beautifully  situated  on  the  River  1'arphar.  Both  these  cities 
»re  adorned  with  many  fine  buildings,  and  are  important  for 
th'^ir  manufactures  and  commerce.  Smyrna  is  the  chief  seat  of 
foreign  trade  in  Turkey.  Bagdad  is  also  an  important  seat  of 
commerce,  but  meanly  built.  Jerusalem  is  built  on  the  ruins 
of  the  ancient  city.  It  is  much  resorted  to  by  Christian  pil- 
grims, and  still  preserves  a  degree  of  magnificence. 

Teheran  is  chiefly  important  as  the  residence  of  the  king 
and  court  of  Persia.  Ispahan,  the  former  capital,  is  still 
the  first  commercial  city  of  Persia.  It  was  formerly  a  city 


CITIKS  OF  ASIA.  165(c; 

oi  immense  size,  and  the  principal  mosques  and  palaces  are 
still  very  grand.  Its  ruins  are  several  mJles  in  extent.  Shiras 
is  celebrated  for  its  fine  climate,  and  for  the  beauty  of  its  en- 
virons, as  well  as  for  its  colleges.  Bushire  is  the  chief  seaport 
of  Persia. 

Mecca  is  celebrated  as  the  birth  place  of  Mahomet.  It  is 
well  built,  and  derives  great  wealth  from  the  immense  con- 
course of  Mahometan  pilgrims. 

Medina  is  a  meanly  built  town,  only  remarkable  for  the 
tomb  of  Mahomet.  The  mosque  which  contains  it  is  magni- 
ficent, supported  by  400  columns  of  black  marble,  with  300 
lamps  continually  burning.  Sana  is  considered  the  largest  and 
most  populous  city  of  Arabia.  Mocha  is  the  chief  seaport  of 
Arabia,  and  the  seat  of  its  trade  with  Europe. 

Cabul  is  an  ancient  city.  It  has  an  extensive  trade  with 
Tartary,  Persia  and  India.  Peshawer  is  one  of  the  residences 
of  the  king  of  Cabul,  and  the  resort  of  people  from  all  parts  of 
India  and  Western  Asia. 

Calcutta  is  the  metropolis  of  British  India.  Its  commerce  is 
very  extensive,  and  it  is  inhabited  by  merchants  from  every 
part  of  the  globe.  The  houses  of  the  English  resemble  Euro- 
pean palaces.  The  natives  inhabit  a  distinct  portion  of  the 
town,  built  in  the  Asiatic  manner. 

Madras  is  the  capital  of  the  British  possessions  in  the  south 
of  India,  and  Bombay  of  those  on  the  East.  Bombay  is  situ- 
ated on  a  small  barren  island  near  the  coast,  and  has  exten- 
*ive  commerce.  Columbo  is  the  British  capital  of  Ceylon.  It 
resembles  the  cities  of  Europe  in  its  appearance. 

Goa  is  a  populous  city  and  territory,  possessed  by  the  Por- 
tuguese. Pondicherry,  on  the  coast  of  Coromandel,  belongs  to 
the  French. 

Benares  is  the  most  populous  city  of  India,  and  celebrated  as 
a  holy  city  and  seat  of  learning.  Many  of  its  houses  are  large 
and  well  built,  and  it  is  crowded  with  persons  from  all  parts  of 
India,  who  come  here  to  die.  Delhi,  the  former  capital  of 
Iliii  'oostan,  is  now  much  reduced.  Poonah  is  the  modern 
capital  of  the  empire  of  the  Mahrattas. 

Ummerapoora  is  the  residence  of  the  emperor  of  Birmah. 
Siam  is  an  extensive  city,  intersected  by  canals.  Kesho,  the 
capital  of  Tonkin,  has  some  wide  streets  and  good  buildings. 
Faifo  is  a  seaport  of  Cochin  China,  sometimes  visited  by  Eu- 
ropeans. Malacca  contains  many  good  houses  of  stone,  and 
is  distinguished  for  a  college  founded  by  an  English  Missionary 
Society. 

14* 


3d  DESCRIPTION    Of    COL.VTRIEs. 

China  abound*  in  large  cities;  but  we  know  only  the  names 
of  most  of  them.  Pekin  is  probably  the  most  extensive  and 
populous  city  in  the  world.  It  is  the  residence  of  the  emperor 
of  China.  .Vanim,  the  former  residence  of  the  emperor,  is 
distinguished  tor  its  porcelain  tower,  and  for  the  cotton 
cloth  called  nankeen.  Canton  is  the  principal  port  of  China, 
and  the  only  one  at  which  Europeans  and  Americans  are  al- 
lowed to  trade.  All  the  cities  known  in  China  are  very 
uniform  in  their  appearance  and  mode  of  building,  and  remark- 
able lor  their  crowded  population,  and  for  the  exercise  oJ  vari- 
ous trades  in  their  streets.  Ctunyang,  the  capital  of  the  .Mand- 
shur  Tartars,  is  said  to  be  an  extensive  city.  Cashgar  is 
the  residence  of  the  Cb  nese  governor  of  Tartary.  Lassa  is 
the  residence  of  the  Grand  Lama  of  Thibet,  and  is  crowded 
with  worshippers  from  all  parts  of  Asia. 

Jeddo  is  one  of  the  most  populous  cities  on  the  globe.  It  is 
the  residence  of  the  emperor  of  Japan,  whose  palace  is  a  city 
of  itself.  Mtaco  is  the  centre  of  religion  and  knowledge  in  the 
empire,  .\~angasaki  is  the  only  place  in  Japan  at  which 
Europeans  are  allowed  to  trade. 

Macassar,  Manilla  and  .imboyna  are  the  chief  places  of 
European  trade,  in  the  islands  to  which  they  belong.  Ache/en* 
the  capital  of  the  most  celebrated  native  kingdom  of  Sumatra, 
is  formed  of  bouses  built  on  posts.  Batana  was  formerly  a 
place  of  very  extensive  trade.  Its  climate  is  almost  fatal  tc 
strangers,  and  its  population  is  now  much  diminished.  Borneo, 
the  capital  of  the  island  of  Borneo,  consists  of  about  3.C 
floating  houses.  Sydney,  the  chief  settlement  of  New-Holla 
is  a  large  town,  with  one  of  the  finest  harbours  in  the  world. 

A  F  R  I  C  A. 
I .  Africa  is  the  third  quarter  of  the  globe  in  point 
ef  size.     The  population  is  variously  estimated  from 
30  to  150  million*,  but  nothing  is  known  with  certain- 
ty concerning  any  parts  except  the  co«- 

378.  The  heat  of  the  climate,  in  Africa  generally.  i> 
aot  moderated  by  mountains,  lakes  or  rivers,  and  a 
large  part  of  it  is  occupied  by  vast  deserts  of  sand. 

•.   The  climate,  productions  and  character  of  the 

people,  are  such  as  are  generally  found  in  the  Torrid 

Zone,  those  part?  which  are  well  watered  being  very 

fuJ. 


AFRICA.  157 

CCCLXXX.    (For  the  Review) 

a.  The  northern  countries  of  Africa  were  anciently  among 
the  most  enlightened  ill  the  world,  and  still  have  written  lan- 
guages. 

6.  These  are  now  among  the  lowest  of  half  civilized  nations. 
The  rest  of  Africa  has  always  been  in  a  savage  or  barbarous 
state. 

c.  Most  of  the   Africans,  like  other  barbarous  nations,  make 
slaves  of  those  whom  they  take  in  war,  and  many  have  been 
sold  to   Europeans   and  Americans.     In  the  northern  Larts  of 
Africa,  there  is  also  a  considerable  trade  in  white  slaves,  usu- 
ally Georgians,  Circassians  or  Turks,  but  sometimes  Americans 
and  Europeans. 

d.  The  Abyssinians,  and  some  of  the  people  of  Egypt,  pro- 
fess a  corrupt  Christianity,  but  not  deserving  the  name. 

e.  All  the  other  nationsof  4fricaare  sunk  in  superstition  and 
vice  ;  and  some  nations  have  been  found  who  do  not  believe  in 
any  God. 

Questions. — /.  On  which  Continent,  and  what  part  of  it, 
does  Africa  lie  ?  (See  map  of  the  world.)  How  is  it  bounded 
on  the  N.,  E..  S..  and  W.f  What  isthmus  unites  it  to  Asia? 
What  does  Africa  resemble  in  shape  ?  What  is  its  compara- 
tive size.'  What  is  the  supposed  population  ?  In  what  zones 
does  it  lie?  What  can  you  say  of  the  climate  generally? 
What  is  the  state  of  a  h:rge  part  of  it?  What  can  you  say  of 
the  productions  and  people? 

//.  What  was  the  ancient  state  of  Northern  Afric.a  ?  What 
is  it  now,  and  what  is  that  of  other  parts  ?  What  l.arbarous 
practice  have  they?  What  nations  profess  to  be  Christians ? 
What  is  the  moral  state  of  the  rest? 

Questions  on  the.  Chart  of  the  World. 

Civilisation. — I.  Are  there  any  civilized  countries  in  Africa? 
What  countries  are  half-civilized  ?  What  are  barbarous  ? 
What  is  the  state  of  the  rest  ? 

Government. — 11.  What  is  the  government  of  Morocco  ? 
\\  I:at  of  the  other  northern  countries  ?  What  is  that  of  Soudan  ? 
What  of  the  other  countries  in  the  middle  of  Africa?  What 
of  the  southern  countries  ?  What  Christian  colony  on  the  south, 
and  to  whom  does  it  belong  ? 

Religion. — /.  What  is  the  religion  of  the  northern  countries 
of  Africa  and  Nubia  :  What  country  in  the  middle  has  a  cor- 
rupt Christianity  ?  What  is  the  religion  of  Soudan  and  Sene- 
gambia?  What  is  that  of  Guinea?  Of  the  southern oouo- 
tries  ?  What  of  the  eastern  coast  ? 


158  DESCRIPTION    OF    COUNTRIES. 

Population. — //.  What  country  is  that  whose  population  is 
the  largest  known  in  Africa  ? 

Th(  population  of  most  of  these  countries  is  unknown,  as  well 
as  thai  of  many  of  their  cities. 

What  countries  have  three  millions  of  inhabitants ?  What 
one  is  supposed  to  have  two  millions  of  inhabitants?  What  is 
the  population  of  Algiers  and  Tripoli  ?  Who  are  the  inhabi- 
tants of  Barbary  ?  What  people  do  you  find  in  Soudan  ?  What 
in  Guinea  and  Lower  Guinea,  and  Zanguebar  ?  What  in  S. 
Africa?  Who  inhabit  the  Colony  of  the  Cape  ? 
Question*  on  the  map  of  Africa. 

Capes. — 7.  What  is  the  most  northern  cape  of  Africa?  {See 
map  of  Europe.)  What  is  the  southern  cape  ?  Between  what 
latitudes  does  Africa  lie ?  What  are  the  eastern  and  western 
capes  ?  Between  what  longitudes  does  it  lie  ?  What  capes  on 
the  western  coast  above  Cape  Palmas  ?  What  capes  on  the 
coast  of  Guinea  ?  WThat  capes  between  this  and  the  Cape  o£ 
Good  Hope  ?  What  capes  on  the  eastern  coast  ? 

Seas,  Gulfs,  ire. — 7.  What  sea  lies  on  the  east  ?  What  on 
the  north :  What  straits  enter  the  Red  Sea  ?  What  channel 
on  the  east  ?  What  bays  on  the  W.  coast  of  Africa  ?  What  oix 
the  eastern  ?  Wrhat  gulf  near  the  Equator  ?  What  one  on 
the  north,  and  wjiere  ? 

Mountains  and  Deserts. — 7.  Where  are  the  Mountains-  of  the 
Moon  ?  What  mountains  in  the  western  part  of  Africa  .'  What 
in  the  northern  ?  What  two  chains  of  mountains  between  the 
Equator  and  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn  ?  What  chain  in  South 
Africa :  What  are  the  principal  deserts  known,  and  where  are 
they. 

Lakes  and  Rivers. — 7.  Where  is  Lake  Maravi?  Lake 
Dembeah  ?  Which  are  the  two  largest  rivers  of  Africa  ?  What 
three  branches  form  the  Nile :  Where  do  they  rise  ':  Where 
does  the  Niger  rise  ?  Through  what  country  does  it  pass,  as  it 
flows  east  ? 

The  Niger  is  believed  by  somt  to  empty  into  the  JVt/e ;  by 
others,  on  the  coast  of  Guinea ;  and  by  otlurs,  into  an  inland  sea 
or  lake  :  but  nothing  is  knotcn  certainly  on  this  subject. 

Where  is  the  Senegal  ?  Which  way  from  it  is  the  Gambia : 
"What  two  rivers  are  south  of  the  Kong  Mountains  ?  Where  is 
the  River  Zaire  ?  Where  is  the  Bembaroque  ?  What  princi- 
pal rivers  in  S.  Africa?  In  what  mountains  do  they  rise?  Which 
is  the  largest  ?  What  is  the  chief  river  known  on  the  east  : 
What  one  in  the  S.  part  of  Abyssinia  ? 

/.  Describe  each  of  the  rivers  mentioned. 


AFRICA.  159 

Boundaries  and  capitals. — /.  What  countries  lie  north  of  the 
Tropic  of  Cancer  ?  What  are  the  boundaries  and  capitals  of 
each,  beginning  'with  the  states  of  Barbary  on  the  west ?  What 
are  the  three  great  divisions  of  the  country  between  the  Tropic 
and  the  Mountains  of  the  Moon  ?  What  are  the  boundaries  and 
capitals  of  each  portion  ?  What  are  some  of  the  smaller  divi- 
sions of  Soudan  ?  What  are  the  great  divisions  of  Africa  be- 
tween the  Mountains  of  the  Moon,  or  Jibbel  Kumra,  and  the 
southern  tropic  ? 

Ho  little  is  knoirn  of  Africa  that  it  is  impossible  to  obtain  any 
accurate  accounts  of  boundaries,  in  most  parts  of  it.  Those 
which  are  chiefly  formed  by  Geographers,  art  marked  by  small 
dots  and  those  more  certain,  by  larger  dots,  with  intervening 
lines,  <w  in  Barbary. 

What  are  the  countries  and  chief  cities  in  Lower  Guinea  ? 
What  are  some  of  the  countries  and  chief  cities  on  the  coast  of 
Zanguebar  ?  What  countries  N.  of  the  Equator  on  this  coast? 
What  name  is  given  to  the  unknown  interior  of  this  part  of 
Africa?  What' are  the  boundaries  and  capital  of  the  Colony 
of  the  Cape. 

Islands. — /.  What  three  group*  of  Islands  do  you  find  N  of 
Cape  Blanco  (See  th>  Chart  of  the  World.)  What  cluster  off 
Cape  Verd  ?  What  small  islands  on  the  coast,  above  Cape 
Verd  What  below  What  two  Islands  S.  from  Cape  Palmas? 
What  in  the  Gulf  of  Guinea  ?  What  large  one  on  the  eastern 
coast?  What  two  small  one?  east  of  this  ?  What  north  of  it? 
What  in  the  Channel  of  Mozambique?  What  Arabian  island 
off  Cape  Guard  ifui? 

Latitudes  and  Longitudes* — //.  In  what  latitude  do  the  north- 
ern portions  of  Africa  lie  What  is  that  of  the  Mountains  of 
the  Moon  ?  Where  does  the  Equator  pass  ?  In  what  zone  does 
the  middle  portion  or  larger  part  of  Africa  lie  ?  What  is  the 
latitude  of  South  Africa  ?  With  what  countries  of  Europe  does 
it  compare  in  lat.tude  ?  What  parts  of  the  United  States  are 
in  the  latitude  of  Barbary:  What  places  in  Africa  and  t lie 
neighbouring  portions  of  Asia  are  in  the  latitude  of  Raleigh? 
Ot  Charleston.-'  New-Orleans?  Mexico?  What  parts  of  Africa 
in  the  latitude  of  the  West  Indies  ?  Of  New-Grenada  ?  Peru  ? 
Chili?  Of  Lima?  Rio  Janeiro  ?  Atacama  ?  Valparaiso?  What 
is  the  longitude,  from  London,  of  St.  Helena  What  is  the  dif- 
ference of  time?  What  is  that  of  Egypt  (See  Chart  of  the 
World.)  What  is  the  difference  of  time  between  Philadelphia 
and  St.  Helena — between  Philadelphia  and  the  Cape  of  Good 
-Hope,  ?  Between  Philadelphia  and  Egypt  ? 


IKtf 


DESCRIPTION    OF    I • 


NORTHERN  AFRICA. 

331.  Northern  Africa  raa}r  be  considered  as  embra- 
cing the  regions  north  of  the  Tropic  of  Cancer. 

The  natural  heat  of  a  tropical  climate  is  here  made 
more  oppressive  b}r  the  neighbouring  deserts. 

The  principal  countries  of  Northern  Africa  are  the 
Barbary  States  and  Egypt. 

BARBARY  STATES. 


Hunting  a  Lion. 

382.  Lions  of  great  ferocity  abound  in  the  northern 
parts  of  Africa,  and  are  often  hunted  by  the  natives. 

Barbary  is  a  hot,  fruitful  country,  but  miserably  cul- 
tivated, extending  from  Cape  Nun  almost  to  Egypt. 
It  includes  a  number  of  independent  states. 

The  people  are  proud,  indolent,  cruel  and  vicious, 
gaining  most  of  their  wealth  by  piracy. 

The  empire  of  Morocco,  includes  the  former  king- 
doms of  Tafilet  and  Fez.  Barca  and  Augela  are 
subject  to  Tripoli. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Barbary  bounded  ?  Name 
the  states  of  Barbary,  and  their  capitals.  Which  is  the  most 
eastern  ?  and  which  the  most  western  ?  What  country  in  Eu- 
rope is  north  of  Morocco  ?  What  one  north  of  Tripoli  ?  What 
chain  of  mountains  in  Barbary  • 


NOF.TIlliRX    AFRICA. 


Itii 


//.  What  place  in  Morocco  on  the  Straits  of  Gibraltar? 
What  seaports  on  the  Atlantic  ?  Which  is  the  largest?  \Vha- 
two  cities  in  the  interior:  Where  is  the  Spanish  fortress  ot' 
Ceuta?  (See  map  of  Europe.)  What  European  settlement  of 
the  Spanish  in  Algiers  ?  What  other'  city  besides  the  capital  ? 
In  what  direction  from  Algiers  is  Tunis?  In  what  direction  is 
Tripoli?  Where  is  Derna?  Where  is  the  great  Desert? 
What  mines  are  found  in  it  ?  What  name  is  given  to  the  coast 
west  of  the  Desert  ? 

FEZZAN. 

383.  Fezzan  is  a  large  fertile  spot  or  island,  in  the 
midst  of  sanely  deserts,  intensely  hot  in  the  summer, 
and  often  severely  cold  in  winter. 

The  people  are  ignorant,  rude,  and  vicious. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  country  is  east  of  the  De- 
'sert  ?     What  is  its   chief  town?     What   country  lies   between 
Fezzan  and  Egypt?      What  places  between  Barca  and  Egypt? 
EGYPT. 


Pompey's  Pillar.  The  Great  Pyramid. 

384.  Egypt  is  celebrated  for  the  wonderful  pyramids 
near  Cairo,  the  lofty  pillar  of  Pompey,  at  Alexandria, 
and  other  works  of  the  ancient  inhabitants. 

It  is  a  hot,  but  very  fruitful  country,  which  is  watered 
by  the  overflowing  of  the  Nile,  instead  of  rain. 

There  are  some  professed  Christians  in  Egypt,  but  the 


162  DESCRIPTION    OF     COUNTRIES. 

people  are  generally  in  the  lowest  state  of  ignorance 
-and  oppression. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  E^yrt  bounded?  What 
is  the  cap:lal.  and  on  what  river?  What  is  the  principal 
seaport?  What  two  other  seaports,  and  where  ? 

//.  What  considerable  place  above  Cairo  on  the  Nile? 
What  three  places  above  Sio'it?  Wu at  seaport  west  of  the 
river?  What  place  is  at  the  head  of  the  Red  Sea :  What 
countr'.  -  aorth  of  Egypt? 

MIDDLE  REGIONS  OF  AFRICA. 

Senegambia — Guinea — Loner   Guinea — Zatiguebar — 

.VuA?';.1 — Abyssinia — Sou  tin. 

385.  Most  of  the  countries  of  Africa  he  between 
the  two    Tropics,   and   the   olim.ite,  productions    and 
character  of  the  people,  in  these  countries,  are   such 
as  is  usual  in  the  Torrid    Zone.      (See  §  87  to  92.) 

The  climate  of  some  countries  is  varied,  hy  their 
situation  as  to  mountains  and  the  sea.  (See  §  113-114.) 

386.  Gold  dust,  ivory,  gum-  and  slaves  are  the  prin- 
cipal articles  of  commerce  in  these  regions,  and  are 
transported  by  caravans  of  merchants,  which  are  con- 
tinually passing  from  the  interior  to  the  sea-ports,  and 
places  of  trade  on  the  coast. 

387.  Rice  and  cotton  are  produced  in  preat  abun- 
dance, and   furnish    most  of  the  food  and  clothing  of 
the  people. 

388.  Some  nations  of  Africa  are  distinguished   for 
native  imldn^ss  ;.nd    liospii.-ility,  but  many  are  treach- 
erous and  cruel;  and  indolence  is  a  universal  charac- 
teristic. 

It  is  said  that  in  some  parts,  thousands  of  square 
miles  of  fertile  and  well  peopled  countries  have  been 
desolated  by  wars,  made  to  supply  Europeans  and 
Americans  with  si.. 

389.  The  middle  regions  of  Africa,  may  be  divided 
into  Eastern   and  Western  Africa,  on  the  coasts,  and 
Central  Africa,  in  the  interior. 


WESTERN   AFRICA.  ~"~ 


'        . 


Questions. — /.  Where  do  most  of  the  countries  of  Africa  lie : 
What  can  you  say  generally  of  their  climate,  productions  and 
people  ?  Describe  them  more  particularly.  (6'ee  87-92.) 
What  chain  of  mountains  probably  passes  through  the  middle 
regions  of  Africa,  from  east  to  west  ?  (See  map.')  What  great 
divisions  of  middle  Africa  lie  north  of  these  mountains,  and 
•what  south  ?  How  is  the  state  of  particular  countries  varied  ? 
What  are  the  chief  articles  of  commerce?  What  the  most  im- 
portant productions  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  nations  of 
this  region?  What  eifect  has  the  slave  trade?  How  may 
these  regions  of  Africa  be  divided  ?  What  countries  belong  to 
Eastern  Africa?  What  to  Western  Africa?  What  to  Central 

WESTERN  AFRICA. 


Jin  Elephant  pursuing  a  hunter. 

390.  Elephants  abound  on  the  western  coast  of  Afri- 
ca, of  such  size  that  they  will  sometimes  tear  down 
trees  to  destroy  those  who  hunt  them.  Their  immense 
tusks  furnish  large  quantities  of  ivory  for  commerce. 

UPPER  GUINEA. 

391.  Upper  Guinea  is  a  hot,  but  fertile  country. 
It  is  divided  into  a  number  of  barbarous  kingdoms,  of 
which  Ashantee  is  the  most  powerful. 

Many   of  these  nations   are  distinguished  for  bold- 
ness and  ferocity,  and  some  for  their  skill  in  arts. 
Coomassie.  the  capital  of  Ashantee.  and  some  othej: 
15 


-  .RIPTION    OF  COU.N  . 


places  are  said  to  be  large  cities,  but  their  situation  is 
not  accurately  known. 

Qu«*lto*tt  on  the  map. — /.  What  are  the  principal  kingdoms 
i;i  Upper  Guinea,  and  what  are  their  capitals  ?  What  is  that 
of  Asbantee  ?  What  two  European  settlements  on  the  coast, 
and  where  ?  What  names  are  given  to  different  parts  of  this 
coast  ?  Where  is  the  English  colony  of  Sierra  Leone  :  What 
missionary  station  near  it :  What  island  S.  of  it  ?  Where  is 
Teemboo  ? 

SENEGAMBI.A, 

Or  Country  of  the  Foulahs  and  Jalfffs. 

392.  This  country  is  inhabited  by  tribes  of  negroes 
called  Foulabs  and  Jaloffs,  and'is  sometimes  considered 
as  a  part  of  Guinea,  or  of  Soudan. 

It  is  fertile,  but  immensely  hot.  Many  European* 
trade  here,  to  obtain  gold,  ivory,  gums,  and  sl;r. 

The  coast  between  Senegambia  and  Morocco  is  the 
resort  of  tribes,  who  live  a  wandering  life,  plundering 
aud  treating  cruelly  all  who  land,  or  are  shipwrecked 
on  it. 

Qufiltonf  on  the  map. — /.  What  rivers  pass  through  Sene- 
gambia ?    What  seaport  and  place  of  trade  at  the  north  ?  What 
towns  '.    What  European    settlement  ?  What  name  is  given  to 
the  coast  between  Senegambia  and  Morocco: 
LOWER  GUINEA. 

393.  Lower  Guinea  is  a  hot  and  fertile  country,  but 
yery  unhealthy  for  Europeans.    It  is  divided  into  sev- 
eral kingdoms,  of  which  Congo  is  the  principal. 

The  Portuguese  have  settlements  on  this  coast,  and 
have  been  most  active  in  carrying  on  the  slave  trade, 
of  which  it  is  now  the  principal  seat. 

The  king  of  Congo  and  many  of  his  people  profess 
to  be  Catholics,  but  Paganism  is  the  common  religion. 

Qucjtiojis  tn  tlu  map. — /.  What  is  the  principal  kingdom  ol 
Lower  Guinea  ?  What  is  the  capital  ?  What  kingdom  north  ol 
it  ?  What  is  its  capital  ?  What  name  is  given  to  this  coast  ? 
Where  is  Angola.'  What  place  in  it.'  Where  is  Bengupla, 
and  what  is  its  capital .'  Where  is  Angoy  ?  What  mountains  in 
Lower  Guinea  r  Where  is  the  River  Zaire,  and  what  is  its 
size  '.  'VN  hat  islands  are  there  on  the  coast  ?  Where  is  the  Bem- 
barouque  ?  What  country  between  this  and  South  Africa  ' 


KASTETRX    AFRICA.  li!o 

EASTERN  AFRICA. 

COAST  OF  ZANGUEBAR. 


Conveyances  of  the  rich  on  the  Eastern  Coast. 

394.  The  rich  negroes  in  Zanguebar  are  carried 
about  by  slaves,  in  a  kind  of  hammock,  or  in  chairs. 

The  coast  of  Zanguebar  includes  a  number  of  king- 
doms, between  the  Equator  and  the  Tropic  of  Capri- 
corn. The}r  are  little  known  to  any  but  the  Portu- 
guese traders,  who  formerly  governed  several  coun- 
tries. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  mountains  are  west  of 
Zanguebar  ?  What  lake  ?  What  is  the  chief  river  known  ? 
What  European  fort  is  on  it:  Mention  some  of  the  principal 
kingdoms  and  cities  on  this  coast.  What  islands  are  there  on 
this  coast  ? 

ADEL,  AJAN,  BERBERA,    AND    MAGADOXA. 

395.  These  are  countries  on  the  eastern  extremity 
of  Africa,    very   little   known  to   civilized    nations. 
They  abound  in  myrrh,  incense  and  gums,  of  which 
large  quantities  are  exported. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Where  do  these  countries  lie,  and 
in  what  latitude?  What  are  some   of  the  principal   places? 
What  river  is  on  the  north,  and  what  straits  near  ? 
NUBIA. 

396.  Nubia  is  a  parched,  barren  country,  except 
on  the  banks  of  the  Nile. 


iBtf  UKSCRIPTIO.V   OV    UOUN'TRIK*. 

It  is  divided  into  a  number  of  small  kingdoms.  The. 
people  are  barbarous,  ferocious  and  ignorant,  some 
wandering,  and  others  settled  in  towns. 

Travellers  in  the  deserts  of  Nubia  and  other  parts 
of  Africa,  are  in  danger  of  being  overwhelmed  by 
clouds  or  pillars  of  sand,  moving  with  the  wind. 


Moving  clouds  of  sand. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Nubia  bounded  ?  What  is 
the  capital,  and  where?  What  is  the  chief  place  of  Dongola? 
What  port  on  the  Red  Sea  ?  What  celebrated  resort  of  pihj 
is  opposite  to  it  in  Asia  :  (See  CXXXVI.  e.) 

ABYSSINIA. 

397.  Abyssinia   is  a  rough,  mountainous  country, 
but  generally  fertile. 

It  is  cooler  than  Nubia,  but  still  hot  and  unhealthy, 
in  many  parts. 

The  religion  is  a  corrupt  mixture  of  Judaism    and 
Christianity. 

The  people  are  ignorant  and  brutal,  always  engaged 
in  civil  wars,  and  accustomed  to  eat  raw  flesh. 

Questions  on  I  fie  map — /.  How  is  Abyssinia  bounded  ?  What. 
is  the   capital?  What   branches  of  the   Nile  rise  in  it ?  What 
river  on  the  south  ?  What  lake  ?  Where  is  Axum,  the   ancient, 
rapital?  What  place  near  it?  What  is  the  principal  so- 


CENTRAL    AFRICA.  161 

CENTRAL  AFRICA. 
SOUDAN,  OR  NIGRITIA. 

398.  The  king  of  Darfur,  in  Soudan,  obliges  all 
who  come  before  him  to  fall  on  their  face?,  while  a  her- 
ald stands  by  him,  constantly  proclaiming  that  he  is 
the  greatest  of  monarchs. 


The  King  of  Darfur  receiving  homage. 

Soudan,  or  Nigritia,  is  considered  as  extending  from 
Nubia  and  Abyssinia  to  Senegal,  or  the  western  coast, 
between  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  and  the  Mountains  of 
the  Moon. 

It  is  a  hot,  but  productive  region,  except  the  Desert 
of  Sahara. 

It  contains  many  powerful  kingdoms,  but  little 
known.  They  are  chiefly  inhabited  by  Moors,  in  the 
north,  and  Negroes,  in  the  other  parts. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  How  is  Nigritia  bounded  ?  What 
desert  does  it  contain,  and  what  mines  in  it?  What  rivers? 
What  mountains  on  the  south  ?  What  kingdoms  in  the  west  ? 
What  are  their  capitals  ? 

//.  What  powerful  nation  borders  on  the  desert  N.  of  Kassi- 
an  and  Housa  ?  What  kingdoms  E.  of  Housa,  and  what  pla- 
ces? What  N.  of  these?  Where  is  the  Niger  supposed  to  flow? 
ETHIOPIA. 

399.  This  name  has  been  given  to  the  interior  of 
15* 


DESCRIPTION    OF     COl/.VlRIb.- 


Africa,  south  of  the  Jibbel  Kumra  ;  but  its  geograj 
is  unknown. 

SOUTH    AFRICA. 


-.  an-d  their  Ti 
South  Africa  lies  south  of  the  Tropic  ofCnpricorn, 
embracing  the  colony  of  the  Cape,  and  several  indepen- 
dent nations,  of  whom  the  Hottentots  are  best  known. 
The  other  tribes  of  South  Africa,  north  of  the  colony, 
are  otten  classed  under  the  general  name  of  Caffres. 

The  Hottentots  build  their  villages  in  a  circular 
jorm  ;  and  oxen  are  used  generally  among  them  instead 
of  horses. 

401.  The  climate  of  South  Africa  is,  warm,  butsel- 
tiom  oppressive  ;  the  nights  are  cool,  and  great  and 
sudden  changes  of  temperature  are.  frequent. 

•102.  Fine  wines  are  produced  here,  and  coffee,  tea 

;:nd  other  plants  of  warm  climates  may  be  cultivated. 

403.  The  Caffres  and  Hottentots  appear  to  have  had 

•iy  ideas  of  religion,  and  are  grossly  ignorant, 

but  they  are  mild,  hospitable  and  docile.     Other  tribes 

'.tie  above  the  brutes  in  character  and  manner. - 

By  the  efforts  of  Christian  missionaries,  a  m^bber 

of  settlements  of  these  tribe?  have  been  formed,  anclthey 

have  begun  to  receive  some  knowledge  and  civilization. 

•fia>>.f. — /  .  ;Hh  Africa  1-ouc  >ffj>.) 


VVnat  is  the  southern  cape?  What  colony  and  principal  tribe 
does  it  embrace  ?  What  customs  of  the  Hottentots  can  you 
mention  ?  What  is  the  climate  of  S.  Africa  ?  What  reasons  can 
you  find  from  the  map,  that  S.  Africa  should  have  so  temperate 
a  climate,  near  the  Torrid  Zone?  (i'ee  113,  114.)  What  moun- 
tains are  the  principal?  What  rivers  empty  into  the  Atlantic 
Ocean,  and  of  what  size?  What  one  into  the  Indian  Ocean;' 
What  can  you  say  of  the  Caftres  and  Hottentots?  What  is 
the  state  of  other  tribes?  What  has  been  done  to  improve 
them  ?  What  missionary  station  is  there  on  the  Orange  River': 
What  is  the  principal  place  N.  of  this  riv«r. 
COI,ONY  OV  THE  CAPE. 

405.  This  colony  was  settled  200  years  ago,  by  tin 
Dutch,  who  are  still  the  most  numerous  white  inhabit- 
ants ;  but  it  now  belongs  to  the  British. 

The  white  farmers,  or  boors,  are  generally  indolent 
and  ignorant,  and  many  of  them  are  almost  as  filthy 
and  brutal  as  the  natives. 

Questions  on  (he  map. — /.  How   is   the  Colony  of  the  Cape 
bounded  ?     What  is  the  capital,  and  what  missionary  station  do 
you  find?     What  river,  mountains  and  bays  around  it. 
AFRICAN  ISLANDS. 


in  the  sea. 

406.  The  Azores,  or  Western  Islands  of  Africa,  are 
exposed  to  violent  earthquakes.     A  few  years  since,  a 
volcano  burst  out  in  the  sea,  and  formed  a  new  island, 

407.  The  African  Islands,  except  the  Cape  Verd 
Isles,  enjoy  a  healthy  and  delightful  climate,  and  pro- 
duce the  finest  fruits  of  »'ann  countries, 


BESC&IM1OH    OF     tGl.\'TRU>. 

Many  others,  besides  the  Azores,  contain  vol- 
canic mountains,  most  of  which,  like  the  Peak  of 
Teneriffe,  have  now  ceased  to  burn. 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  What  are  the  most  northerly  of 
the  African  Islands  ?  What  is  remarkable  concerning  them  ? 
What  three  other  groups  of  islands  on  the  Western  coast  of 
Africa?  Wrhat  are  the  chief  islands  on  the  Eastern  coast? 
What  is  the  climate  of  these  islands  generally  ?  What  moun- 
tains have  they  ? 

ISLANDS    WEST    OF     AFRICA. 

409.  The  islands  on  the  western  coast  of  Africa  are 
all  claimed  by  the  Portuguese,  except  the  Canaries, 
belonging  to  Spain,  and  St.  Helena,  the  late  prison  of 
the  Emperor  Napoleon,  possessed  by  the  British. 

410.  St.  Matthews  and  Ascension  are  uninhabited, 
but  the  rest  are  well  peopled, chiefly  with  Spaniards  and 
Portuguese,  who  have  intermarried  with  the  natives. 

411.  These  islands  are  celebrated  for  producing  fine 
wines,  of  which  the  best  are  found  in  Madeira  aud 
Teneriffe. 

Questions  on  the  map. — 7.  What  are  the  principal  islands 
among  the  Azores  ?  What  countries  of  Europe  lie  in  the  same 
latitude  ?  What  are  the  next  islands,  and  what  countries  are 
opposite  them?  What  are  the  chief  islands  next  S.  of  Ma- 
deira? What  are  the  principal  of  the  Cape  Verd  Isles? 

//.  What  small  islands  do  you  find  on  this  part  of  the  coast '. 
What  islands  do  you  find  between  C.  Palmas  and  the  Cape  of 
Good  Hope  ?  Who  claim  most  of  the  islands  W.  of  Africa  ? 
for  what  has  St.  Helena  beeu  lately  remarkable?  How  are 
'tliese  islands  inhabited  ?  For  what  are  they  celebrated  ? 
ISLANDS  EAST  OF  AFRICA. 

412.  MADAGASCAR  is  the  largest  island  in  the  world, 
except  New  Holland,  and  Borneo. 

The  climate  is  healthy  and  agreeable,  and  the  soil 
fertile  in  the  productions  of  the  Torrid  Zone. 

The  people  are  intelligent,  mild  and  hospitable. 
They  are  superior  in  knowledge,  arts  and  civilizatio 
to  the  Africans  on  the  continent. 

413.  BOURBON  and  MAURITIUS  are  much  resorted^ 
by  shipsjrona  India. 


IKAVELS    ON    THE    MAP.  17.J, 

Questions  on  the  map. — /.  Near  what  coast  of  Africa,  is 
Madagascar  ?  Where  are  Bourbon  and  Mauritius  ?  To  whom 
do  they  belong  ?  •  (See  the  Chart.} 

CCCCXIV.  TRAVELS  ON  THE  MAP  OF  AFRICA. 

You  see  from  the  accounts  of  Africa,  that  it  will  not  be  very 
safe  for  you  to  travel  in  the  interior.  It  will  be  best  to  confine 
yourself  chiefly  to  its  coasts. 

How  will  you  go  to  find  those  countries  of  Africa  which  were 
once  celebrated  for  science  and  learning  ?  (<S'ee  CCCLXXX.) 
What  islands  shall  you  pass  before  you  reach  the  Straits  ot 
Gibraltar  ?  What  states  do  you  pass  after  entering  the  Medi- 
terranean, on  your  way  to  Egypt  ?  What  danger  will  there  be 
in  sailing  near  them  ?  (382.)  How  can  you  go  to  Alexandria  by 
land,  if  you  stop  at  Barbary  ?  What  danger  shall  you  encoun- 
ter in  the  interior?  (382.)  What  river  do  you  go  up  to  reach 
the  capital  ?  Shall  you  often  meet  with  rain  ?  (384.)  Wha'. 
objects  of  curiosity  shall  you  find  ? 

You  must  endeavour  to  guard  against  a  disease  of  the  eyes 
prevalent  in  Egypt. 

What  danger  should  you  meet  with  in  going  by  land  to. 
Abyssinia  ?  (396.)  As  the  cataracts  of  the  Nile  will  prevent 
your  going  up  this  river  to  Abyssinia,  what  course  will  you 
take  to  go  by  sea  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  Abyssinians  ? 

How  would  you  go  to  discover  whether  the  Niger  flows  into, 
the  Nile  ?  What  kingdoms  would  you  pass  through  ?  What 
course  will  you  take  from  Abyssinia  to  reach  the  Cape  of  Good, 
Hope,  by  water  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  coast  you  pass  ? 
(394.)  How  do  you  like  their  mode  of  travelling  ?  (412.) 
What  islands  do  you  pass,  and  what  do  you  know  of  them  ? 

When  you  draw  near  the  cape  you  must  be  prepared  for 
storms,  which  are  dreadful  here.  But  if  you  are  distressed, 
3/ou  will  find  the  Caffres,  near  the  Colony,  very  kind. 

What  bays  and  river!1  must  you  pass  in  going  round  to  Cape- 
town? What  do  you  think  of  the  inhabitants?  (400,403,405.) 
How  do  you  like  the  climate  here ?  Where  shall  you  find  the 
mobL  distant  missionary  station  of  S.  Africa?  Look  on  the  map 
and  see  what  reason  there  is  why  you  should  not  cross  tbo 
country  to  Lower  Guinea  ? 

Lower  Guinea  will  scarcely  repay  you  for  a  visit,  and  it  will 
be  very  dangerous  to  health  and  life. 

What  islands  can  you  stop  at  to  refresh,  on  this  coast?  What 
course  do  you  take  for  Upper  Guinea?  What  articles  of  com- 
merce can  you  obtain  here  ?  (3U7.)  What  countries  are  now 
north  of  you  ?  TTo-w  will  you  ^o  toSierrn  I.- 


If  you  visit   the  Cape  Verd  Islands,  avoid  that  par; 
ocean  not  far  from  them,  called  '  The  Rains,'  for  you  will  find 
almost  perpetual  calm?,  with  much  rain  and  thunder. 

How  will  you  go  to  visit  the  principal  African  Islands  which 
you  have  not  seen?     In  what  latitude  must  you  cross  the  ocean 
1o  find  favourable  and  steady  winds  ?  (bee  CXVI.  c.)    What 
courses  will  you  take  then  to  reach  the  United  States? 
CCCCXV.     CITIES  OF  AFRICA. 

A  large  part  of  Africa  is  in  a  state  of  barbarism,  and  there- 
fore contains  few  large  cities,  or  even  considerable  towns,  iu 
comparison  with  Europe  and  Asia.  These  aVe  chiefly  in 
.Northern  Africa,  and  moat  of  them  are  greatly  inferior  to  the 
chief  cities  of  Europe  and  Asia  in  commerce,  manufactures  and 
wealth,  as  well  as  in  population.  They  are  inferior  to  the 
poorest  in  Europe  in  their  appearance,  on  account  of  the  nar- 
rowness, irregularity  and  filthiness  of  their  streets.  Even  in 
C  airo  and  Fez  the  streets  are  often  so  narrow,  that  two  camels 
cannot  go  abreast. 

The  houses,  like  those  of  the  Asiatic  cities  on  the  Mediter- 
ranean, are  generally  built  with  flat  roofs.     They  have  a  court 
in  the  centre,  and  are  destitute  of  windows  towards  the  street. 
Like  other  Mahometan  cities,  they  have  numerous  mosque 
and  these,  with  the  palaces  of  the  sovereigns  or  governors,  ar 
usually  the  only  handsome  buildings.  The  houses  are  generall 
1-nftt  of  half  burnt  brick,  or  of  a  mixture  of  stones,  earth  and 
mortar,  whitened  with  lime.     In  Cairo,  many  are  of  stone,  an 
some  of  the  mosques  and  ether  public  buildings  in  this  city, 
in  the  cities  of  Barbary  are  built  of  stone  or  marble. 

The  cities  of  Egypt  are  usually  distinguished  for  the  grand 
uid  interesting  remains  of  ancient  cities  and  buildings  which 
surround  them. 

Cairo  exceeds   any  other  city  of  Africa  in  magnitude  and 
lour.     Its  mosques  and  tombs  are  neat  and  often  elegant, 
but  its  general  appearance  is  miserable.     It  is  resorted  to  for 
trade,  by  merchants  from  the  whole  of  western  Asia  and  th< 
interior  of  Africa. 

Alexandria  is  the  chief  place  of  trade  between  Europe  an- 
Egypt.     It  is  a  city  of  considerable  extent,  but  chiefly  covered 
with  the  splendid  remains  of  the  ancient  city.     The  most  re- 
markable of  these  is  Pompey's  pillar. 

Rotseita  is  a  modern  town  of  some  importance  for  trade,  on 
the  western  mouth  of  the  Nile.  Damictta,  on  the  eastern  mouth, 
lias  an  extensive  commerce  with  Syria  and  Cyprus. 

'tie  const  of  Barbarv   are  built,  like  uianv 


UTIF.S    OF    AT-'Rlr  \.  17  1  ['  j 

others  on  the  Mediterranean,  on  ground  which  rises  from  the 
water.  Most  of  them  are  fortified,  and  are  places  of  some 
trade.  They  haVe  more  resemblance  to  those  of  Europe  than 
any  others  in  Africa.  Tripoli  has  broad,  straight  streets,  ami 
is  superior  to  most  cities  of  Barbary  in  beauty.  Tunis  is  sit- 
uated on  a  salt  lake  connected  with  the  sea,  a  few  miles  from 
the  ruins  of  the  ano.ient  Carthage. 

Algiers  is  well  known  as  a  nest  of  pirates,  and  has  been  the 
place  of  slavery  of  many  Americans. 

Morocco  has  lost  much  of  its  former  importance.  It  is  about 
12  miles  from  the  foot  of  Mt.  Atlas,  on  a  fertile  plain,  inter- 
spersed with  palm  trees. 

Fez  is  the  chief  resort  of  the  Arabs  of  the  desert  for  trade. 

Mtquinez  is  the  largest  city  of  Morocco,  and  superior  to 
others  in  the  politeness  and  hospitality  of  its  inhabitants.  Tan- 
gier and  JWugadore  are  places 'Of  some  trade. 

In  the  MIDDLK  RKGIONS  OF  AFRICA,  the  towns  and  cities 
usually  consist  of  low  mud-walled  huts,  with  conical  roof?, 
thatched  with  leaves  or  straw.  They  are  spread  over  a  great 
pxtent  of  ground,  and  rather  resemble  a  camp  than  a  city, 
i'he y  are  often  surrounded  with  a  low  wall,  which  is  also  built 
of  eartli  or  mud.  The  palace  of  the  king  is  usually  only  a 
collection  of  huts  surrounded  by  a  wall. 

6Vtf«,  the  capital  of  the  kingdom  of  Bambara,  is  a  city  of 
considerable  size.  Its  mosques  are  numerous.  Sansanding  is 
the  seat  of  an  extensive  and  important  commerce,  in  the  same 
kingdom.  Te.emboo  is  a  considerable  town. 

Tomlnutoot  Houssa  and  Kassina,  appear  to  be  the  most  im- 
portant cities  of  the  interior  of  Africa.  They  are  said  to  be 

rgf  cities,  and  places  of  great  trade. 

Cobbe  is  the  principal  town  of  Darfur,  and  a  place  of  exten- 
sive commerce,  chiefly  inhabited  by  merchants. 

Sennaar  is  populous,  and  an  important  place  of  trade. 

Gondar,  the  capital  of  Abyssinia,  is  situated  on  a  hill  sur-i 
rounded  by  a  deep  valley.  Like  other  towns  of  Abyssinia,  it 
has  several  Christian  churches. 

J\Iclinda  is  a  large  handsome  town.  Its  houses  are  built  of 
stone,  and  many  of  them  are  magnificent.  St.  Salvador,  the 
capital  of  Congo,  has  a  number  of  Christian  churches,  and 
contains  40,000  inhabitants,  of  whom  4000  are  whites. 

The  towns  of  Upper  Guinea  are  not  well  known.  Coom- 
matiie  is  said  to  be  regularly  built,  with  neat  cane  huts. 

In  SOUTH  AFRICA,  the  kraals  or  villages  of  the  natives 
are  usually  composed  of  huts,  formed  of  twigs,  or  branch- 
es of  trees,  plastered  with  clay,  and  plat'Fd  iu  a  circlr;,' 


17o  GENERAL  VII 

VF.GFT\BI  F.5. 

430.  It  is  estimated  by  Humitoldt,  a  celebrated  travel- 
ler, that  the  number  of  plants  actually  known,  amounts 
to  i  which  nearly  one  half  are  found  in  the 

Torrid  Zone,  and  K.'-H-  are  American  plants 

43!.  The  most  important  vegetables  of  the  earth,  are 
those  used  for  the  food  of  men  and  animals,  including 
the  vr.rkvis  k  ,'  and  root*. 

4:*-     /  .-/»/>  and  roifi.n   are   very    important  for 

clothing.     Other  plant:-  are  valuable,  as  cordials,  medi- 
cines and  dyes  ;  and  a  lew  are  entirely  u-f  less. 

M-iM  vegetables  flourish  in  the  same  regions  iii 

:y  part  oi  the  world.     A  few  of  the  more   delicate 

are  almost  confined  to  their   native  soil  ;  as  the  tea  tdj 

China,  ciniiiiriion  to  Ceylon,  and  the  nutmeg,  mace  and 

clo>  ^','ice  Is-iands. 

1  i  The  i>i'(!.-*rs  are  universally  diffused  over  thes 
earth,  as  far  as  the  limits  oi  the  1-  .  ns  ;  hut  theto 

pastures  are  richest,  and  the  verdure  is   most  constaol' 
eautiful  in  ihe  cold  and  temperate  re<;r 

The  hot   countries   betwe.'n    ti  c  tf  ntj>erate  re-- 
gions  and  t  B,  are   not  rc-treshed  by  the  grea 

rains  of  the  T  ne.  and  the   pastures  are  ofte 

scorched  and  hro\\  n  lor  wai:t  of  moi?ture.     Even  in  tl 
southern  parts  of  France  and  Russia,  it   is  often  nee 
saryto  water  the  fields  by  artificial  means. 

6.  In  the  Torrid  Zone,  rice,  maize  and   millet  si 
the  chief  grains  used  for  food,  and   are   very  abundant 
But  the  bread  fruit  of  Polynesia,  the  cassava  and  arrov 
root  of  South  America,  the  sago  tree  of  India,  and  th< 
plantain,  are  usrd  as  substitutes  for  grain  in  the  com 
tries  wlu  e  found. 

4-">T.     In  the  warm    and  temperate  regions,  \v\\e; 
maize  and  barley  are  tlie  most  common  grains.     In  tl 
•teat  will  scarcely  ripen,  and  rye  and  oat 
are  cultivated  m  its  stead. 


VEGETABLES.  177 

438.  In  the  frozen  regions   the  grasses  and  grains 
cease  almost  entirely,  and  their  place  is  supplied  by  va- 
rious species  of  lichen  and  moss,  which  form  a  nourish- 
ing food,  for  men  and  animals. 

439.  The  most  delicious  fruits,  such  as  the  pine-ap- 
ple, banana,  date,  orange,  lemon,  citron,  and  cocoa-nut, 
are  only  found  in  the  equatorial  and  tropical  regions. 

440.  The  fig,  olive,  and  almond,    are   every    where 
produced  in  the  warm  regions  ;  aud  the   orange  and 
lemon  extend  into  the  southern  parts. 

441.  The   wine  grape  is  found  almost  exclusively  in 
the  warm  and  temperate  regions. 

442.  The  peach,  the  apple,  the  pear,  and  many  kinds 
of  nuts,  are  most  perfect  in  the  temperate  regions.   But 
we  find  the  plurn,  the  cherry,  the   currant,   the  goose- 
berry, and  various  kinds  of  berries,   in  all   parts  of  the 
temperate  and  cold  regions  ;  and  even  the   frozen   re>- 
gions  are  provided  with  several  species  of  berries. 

443.  All  the  regions  of  the  earth  except   the  frozen 
and  icy  region's,  are  provided  with  an  abundance  of  the 
iommon  vegetables  and  roots,  so  much  used  for  food. 

444.  The   potatoe,   cabbage,  turnip,  beet,   &-c.  are 
sommon  throughout  the  temperate  and   cold  regions. 
The  yam,  the  cassava,    and   the  arrow  root,  which  re- 
semble the  potatoe,  are  confined  to  the  torrid  zone. 

445.  The  forests  of  the  frozen  regions  are  chiefly 
:omposed  of  the  fir,  the  pine,  and   other  evergreens, 
ningled  with  the  birch,  the  willow,  and  the  beach. 

446.  On  the  borders  of  the  cold  region,  we  first  meet 
ivith  the  oak,  the  elm,  the  chesnut,  and  other  trees  of 
jur  own  country,  and  these  form  a  principal  part  of  the 
brests  of  the  temperate  and  warm  regions. 

447.  In  the  Torrid  Zone,  the  forests  are  as  valuable 
is  the  cultivated  fields  of  other  regions,  from  the  variety 
>f  nourishing  fruits  they  produce  ;  and  the  trees  assume 

size  and  beauty  unknown  in  other  regions. 
16* 


178 


,:AL  \ir.\\> 


44?.  The  most  remarkable  trees  of  this  zone,  are 
the  j.  shing 

x  tree,  trie  mahogany,  an-i  the  iron- 
,1  t:;e  ni.>>t  durable  ti.iuer  :  and  the  log-wood 
.iOr  trees,  which  furnish  some  ot  the  most  valua- 
ble <i 

•he  veg«MaMe«  •>(  ihe  e*rth  distributed  * 
ii.unoer  k  :!n-  most  i 

s"l  •    '*  -re   urr.    z.  :  •  Are 

tr.c    Wrt  in  i^;i-ju-    n!-.v->?   verdani  .»    W  hrtt  are  tbf  jr  : 

grains  ••(  inct.,ni,i    z  -:1)>  teni[>er 

c.ildreaiixi?  •  H  . 
\Vbat  are  the  trails  of  the   t 

the  rtario  '  Where  is    •  ;  ui  > 

the  tenijhTrttft  region??  Wuere  HP  ,n]  bcr 

e  are  the  c> 

Mention  those  of  <b«-ditfer^ 
the  frozen  cr g;ons.     Oi  tlie  coin 
Ton ; 

the  Torrid  Zone  ,  J  uiei 

tija  (feeragioiu  and  counir:.  - 

449;  The  animals  of  the  earth  are  various  in  differ 
ent  zones,  as  has  already  been  stated.  -  — 1 
106.)  They  may  be  divided  into  tame  or  domestic 
and  wild  animals. 

450.  Domestic  animals  are  chiefly  used  for  food,  or 
beasts  of  burden    and   draft.     Some  wild  animals  ar 
important  to  man  for  food  ;  and   man} .  on  account 
their  fur.  skin.  do\vn.  or  oil.     '  r-ms 

man.  as  beasts  of  prey,  serpents,  &c. ;  and  otii 
very  troublesome,  as  many  small  animals  and  insects. 

4-31.     Tn^  nni?t  useful  domestic  animals,  the  hor 
the  o\,  the  sheep,  the  hog,  tho  r.ii,  and  the  dog,  are 
companions  of  man  in  ail  latilii'.'  .e  coi 

try  will  \  ield  them  food. 

The  goat,  t!ie  deer,  the  rabbit,  the  fox,  the 
and  the  mouse,  are   also  round  i:i  ahiiust  i  > 


ANIMALS.  179 

of  the  globe  where  man  can  exist.  But  all  these  ani- 
mals are  most  perfect  in  the  Temperate  Zone,  and  are 
much  altered  by  the  extremes  of  heat  or  cold. 

15:>.  In  temperate  and  cold  countries  the  horse  and 
the  ox  are  the  most  valuable  beasts  of  burden.  In  hot 
and  mountainous  countries  the  ass  and  the  mule  are 
more  useful.  But  in  the  frozen  regions  all  these  be- 
come diminutive,  their  food  fails,  and  the  reindeer  and 
the  dog  are  used  in  their  stead. 

454  j  he  llama  and  vicuna  of  South  America  are  pc- 
culiaily  fittc-d  for  carrying  heavy  burdens,  over  the 
rugged  mountain  roads  of  thai  country.  The  catnil  is 
the  only  animal  which  c;ui  carry  bim'.ens  over  the  de- 
sert regions  of  Asia  and  Africa,  arid  has  been  properly 
called  "  the  ship  of  the  desert."  The  elephant  is  also 
valued  as  a  beast  of  burden,  for  his  docility  and  strength. 

455.  The  various  uses  of  the  sheen,  the  deer,  the  ox, 
ami  many  other  animals  among  us,  are  \vell   known. 
The  flesh  and  milk  even  of  the  camel,  the  ass,  and  the 
horse,  are  used  as  food  in  Asia  and  Africa ;  and  barba- 
rous and  half-civil^  ?<l  nations  feed  on  the  flesh  of  the 
elephant,  rhinoceros,  and  indeed  all  species  of  animals. 

456.  The  skins  of  all  the  animals  which  have  been 
mentioned  are   useful,  and  the  tusks  of  the   elephant, 
hippopotamus,  and  walrus,  furnish  us  with  r>ory. 

457.  The  animals  of  the  frozen  regions  are  covered 
with  a  thick,  soft  fur.     The  finest  furs  are  those  of  the 
sable,  ermine,  martin,  beaver,  otter  and  seal,  which  arc 
procured  only  in  these  regions. 

•!.>•*•>.  In  the  icy  or  polar  regions,  the  fierce  white  bear 
and  the  fox  are  the  only  land  animals  known  ;  but  the 
whale,  the  seal,  and  the  walrus  or  sea  horse,  are  found 
in  the  ocean  ;  and  the  nothern  seas  swarm  with  the 
herring,  the  cod  and  other  fish,  which  aftbrd  support 
to  the  frozen  countries  around  them.  Codfish  are 
chiefly  obtained  on  the  coast  of  Newfoundland,  and 
herring  on  the  coast  of  Northern  Europe, 


ISO  GENERAL    VIEWS- 

459.  In  some  Islands  of  these  seas  the  wild  fowl  anc 
their  eggs  are  ttie  ctiiei  support  ot  tne  mnaoitauts  ;  anc 
the  downy  feathers  of  some  are  very  valuable 

460.  The  walrus,  the  seal,  and  the  whale,  also  pro 
duce  a  large  quantity  of  oil,  which    serves  the  inhabi 
tants  of  the  frozen  regions  for  fuel,  light  and  food. 

461.  It  is  only  in  the  torrid  and   hot  regions  that  w< 
find  the  most  ferocious  of  the  beasts  of  prey,    the  lion 
the  tiger,    the  hyena,  and  juguar  or  American  tiger 
The   wild    boar,    the  wolf,   arid  the  bear  are  the  onl 
beasts  of  prey   which  are  formidable,    beyond    the   ho 
region,   except  the  cougar  and  catamount  of  America 
which  resemble  the  panther  in  form  and  fierceness. 

462.  These  regions  are    also  distinguished  for   the 
huge  size  of  some  of  their  animals,    and  the  beauty  o 
others.      The    elephant,  the    hippopotamus    and   the 
cameleopard  are  from  ten  to  fifteen  feet  in  height.  The 
great  boa  or  anaconda  is  sometimes  thirty  feet  in  length 
The  ostrich,' the  cassowary  and  the  condor,   resemble 
quadrupeds,  rather  than  birds,  in  their  size  and  strength 

40:}.  The  antelope,  the  leopard,  the  zebra,  and  othe 
animals  of  this  zone  are  remarkably    beautiful.       T 
numerous  birds  are  adorned   with  the  richest  plumag 
and  the  feathers  of  the  ostrich  and  the  bird  ot  paradi 
are  the  ornaments  of  kings. 

464.  In  the  Torrid  Zone,  serpents  are  most  nume 
ous  and  poisonous.      The  air   is  clouded   with  insect. 
al-o,    whose  sting  is  extremely  painful,   and  some  lik 
the  locusts,  move  in  such  immense  bodies,  that  they  d 
Btroy  the  vegetation  of  whole  countries. 

Questions — ti^vv  are  HMMIHI?  distributed  on  the  eartb 
Wh.it  "re  the.  ino.M  useful  dome-lie  animals  ?  Where  a 
thi-xi  and  some  other  animals  found  ?  Where  are  they  foun 
in  the  greatest  perfection?  In  what  regions  and  countri 
are  the  horse  and  the  ox  used  as  beasts  of  burd  TI.  (S 
the  view  on  the  ,-iilas )  Describe  the  same  particulars 
with  regard  lo  the  ass  aud  mule,  the  lama,  the  camel  and 


MINERALS.  131 

he  elephant.  What  nnimnls  are  used  for  food  ?  What  other 
articles  of  value  are  obtained  fp.m  these  animals?  In  what  re- 
gions, &.c.  do  you  find  furred  animals  chiefly,  *i:d  \\hat  are  the 
principal?  What  other  useful  animal"  Hre  mentioned,  what  'ire 
their  u;-es,  anil  where  a>e  th.  y  found  ?  Where  aie  the  I'mri,  th* 
tiger,  and  the  most  terrible  beastsof  prey,  fo-ird  ?  \\  I)  t 
remarkable  among  the  animals  of  the  torrid  and  hot  regions  ? 
What  ;».re  some  of  the  most  I'enutil'il  ?  What  can  you  say  of 
the  serpents  and  insects?  Examine  the  view  of  animals  in  the 
Ail*-,  and  mention  the  regions  and  countries  in  which  each  is 
Usually  found. 

MINERALS. 

405.  Minerals  are  not  distributed  on  the  earth  ac- 
cording to  climates,  like  animals  and  vegetables.  But 
by  the  care  and  kindness  of  Providence,  those  which 
are  most  necessary  to  man,  are  found  in  almost  all  coun- 
tries ;  and  others  are  more  or  less  abundant,  according 
to  their  importance. 

466.  It  is  remarkable  also,  that  the  most  barren  por- 
tions of  the  earth  abound  most  in  mineral  treasures. 

467.  The  most  valuable  minerals  are  the  metals,  and 
the  ores  from  which  they  are  extracted. 

4G8.  The  most  common  and  useful  of  the  metals  are 
iron,  copper,  lead  and  tin  :  the  mote  scarce  and  precious 
metals,  gold  and  silver,  arc  chiefly  used  for  money. 

4(59.  The  diamond,  topaz,  agate  and  other  precious 
stones,  which  are  rare,  are  valued  principally  for  their 
jeauty.     The  more   common  minerals,   as  coal,  salt, 
fcc.  are  important  to  our  comfort  and  life. 
470.  In  our  own  country,  and  in  most  others,  mineral 
s,  are  often  found,  some  warm  and  some  contain- 
i,  salt,  or  other  minerals,  which  are*  very  useful 
n  the  cure  of  diseases. 

The  following  tables  show  the  situation  of  the  most' 
mportant  minerals  and  mineral  springs. 

•'out. —  How    are  minerals     distributed    on    thn    earth    ? 

hat    is    renihi-kaiile    concerning   Ihei.:?     What    are  the   most 

eful  minerals  ?   Which  are  the  most  imporfa  What 

Jan  you  say  of  other  mi.ierals  ?  What  mineral  springs  are  found  ? 


182 


GENERAL  VIEWS. 


*°  i1 

-  «  "° 

e  ^ 

c|c''3 

~  j^ 

£• 

"  rH   * 

c 

3  u 

E  •  s  •"-' 

5:  ^ 

_; 

5 

. 

»  e    - 

—  < 

^p3    •  L^  2  "S 

c 

y 

so 

— 

c    -=    |    a 

Jj 

«  i  .S  =  F  ^ 

CT 

! 

H  j^ 

Z 

3     ^_  ~^  > 

z 

*    —    CJ5    C 

'r  > 

•<;  "? 

i 

•  e 

- 

'•*-    _5  x  .2 

B 

"^  u  !>  P" 

S  'C 

is  ^ 

ss 

^ 

*    —  "•  Q 

if 

C      -    |      u 

1    a 

'C  C 

> 

Z  5 

.   -5     = 

•2  i£  a 

c 

r-    &>    in    I-; 

-s   E 

V     U 

i 

*J  c. 
C  E 
s  ~ 
c  ^ 

llf 

^  «  £  <• 
*  ^  « 

2       g-!|ifl-| 

cu        —   ;  5  i  5  - 

e  caves 

|!1| 

—  2^  £*-  c 

^  o  _^ 

_;£   3 

=  O      i 

•     •»     — 

s      s 

I'-S 

;:    -y 

'•  ,w 

5        en 

0    O 

S  s 

• 

•*'  — 
§€ 

\ 

^11 

* 

z 

-•-v 

u     <U 

1 

PS 

W           V 

5     = 

fc-5 

"JC 

§  c"  W 

5. 

gj 

'~ 

s    ~— 

I  ""    o 

C)  a|e 

£      — 

.  I 

— 

J^ 

-  ^-  •- 

J4 

c 

H           3 

^      -0 

c  '£ 
Z  S 

c 
o 

-    5    S.: 
"*•    ^  ,°? 

I    ^ 

B 

;3 

-3 

s 
o 

<    .  c 

i    .'"    E 

S     • 

K 

-i 

=' 

X 

it 

s 

c'-*  r' 

•E  —  _« 

'-  .-    * 

5   «    « 

C    ^J      t_ 

u 

£ 

c 

r 

-j 

S 

id 

I 

E:  ='l 

|  «  !=> 

Ji    =    = 

"a 

e 

i 

^ 

a 

c 

1 

—  ^  = 

3  J 

—    -.    >. 
f  3   5 

<>  'i  § 

0 

u 

3 

s 

Q 

3 
O 

3 

•a 

1 

H       S 

>.s 

Jl 

E  =  S 

if  >. 

e 

~ 

"^ 

_. 

•^ 

~ 

el 

o    5 

S,j 

11 

-F---^ 

=  «?  =  j 

33  ^  ^     S 

c 
S 

1 

X 

_0 

i 

£ 

* 
1 

H 

1 

0) 

• 

- 

u 

"*           -j 

"E. 

V 

B 

^ 

•*• 

o 

s 

H1"1"1        1 

'£ 

CO 

*•  F  .^ 

>.  u 

£ 

•r 

^ 

-  S 

3 

1 

1 

J3 

n  'ii  ^ 

a  g-i* 

B 

^ 

_>^r9 

,/ 

CO 

O'~    , 

£ 

J_ 

S      1      £ 

=    '    § 
*  ,=  .^ 

• 
i 

0 

^ 

a  tf) 
—  -o 

c 

i 

si 

£ 

-~    ^ 

-  r 

s 
"MJ 

>,•!  1 

C         .     -i 

^5    x    a 

i 

•c 

O 

— 

ZI 

s 

a 

-  c 
.=  « 

1  5" 

•X 

| 

i 

II1 

fl 

J;     CC       '*       X 

c  —  •£ 

'p 

- 
"3 

1 

1 

'"  sn 

3« 

" 

c 

« 

ll 

-3     1 

"2    =.     -     0  ^ 

~  r    e    :£    ^ 

'i  <  = 

en 

J 

1 

•r 

I 

•5 

A 

u 

a 
s 

J;  J; 

~ 

K  S  ?; 

ca  en  «(• 

ti 

^  £  ^l"  S  5 

£ 

- 

3  - 

'= 

D      0- 

J3      t.  ^ 

.  oc  < 

5   c  ."*"  ' 

• 

-     !    "^ 

— 

M 

g'  «o 

"""*                         H 

M 

z     1      .: 

63 

J 

•    "  •- 

•S  ?  | 

Q 
^ 
H 

x    i    | 

ON* 
5S;5 

3 

a. 
^ 

^     ^ 

-     ^ 

3) 

X 

-   u 

r-     —     i/j  —  * 

<  »i  •.  a 

j  as  •  >•  J2 

l^  —  u 

H   ^  B 

(5  H  iX  fc5 

TJ  a.  ^; 

s 

en  ;*.  .O  s- 

MINERAL  SPRINGS. 


1&4  GEXERAfc    VIEW-. 

ARTS  AND  MANUFACTURES. 
471 .  Among  savage  nations  there  are  no  distinct  trades 
but  each  man  builds  his  own  hut,  and  makes  for  him- 
self the  few  instruments,  clothes,  &,c.  which  he  uses. 

472.  Among  civilized  nations,    each  person  usual!} 
attends  only  to  one  art  or  trade,  except  in  Norway  anc 
Ku-.sia,  where  every  family  generally    makes  its  owi 
furniture,  tools  and  clothes. 

473.  By  the  division  of  trades  every  thing  can    b< 
made  more   easily  and  perfectly  than  among  savages^ 
Thus  a  man  who  makes  clothes  only,  makes  them  bet 
ter  and  more  easily  than  if  he  attempted  to  make  boat . 
and  tool*  also. 

474.  It   is  very  difficult  to  till   the  ground,  prepar* 
our  food,  or  make  houses,  clothing,  and  other  things  wr 
need,   without  tools  and    instruments    made   of  metaJ1 
such  as  ploughs,  kiiives,  &-c. 

475.  The  art  of  working  metals  is  therefore  the  mos< 
important  of  fill   the  mechanic  arts,  and  is  said  to  forn; 
half  the  employ  merit  of  civilized  men. 

476.  It  is  unknown  to  savages,  and  not   well  unde 
stood  among  barbarous  nation*,  and  they  are  thereto 
imperfect  in  all  the  arts  of  civilized  life. 

177.  Anvmg  the  half  civilized  nations,  particular 
the  I  urks  andkChinese,  some  branches  of  this  art  a 
well  understood.  It  has  been  brought  to  the  greate 
perfection  in  Germany,  England,  France,  and  oth 
countries  of  Europe. 

47^.  Barbarous  nations  are  not  well  acquainted  wit 
the  art  of  tilling  the  ground.  It  is  said  that  in  Chin 
and  Japan,  it  is  better  understood  than  among  us. 

4?  •).  The  various  arts  practised  among1  us  and  othe 
civilized  nations,  for  cooking  and  preservintrgrain.  mea 
and  other  articles  used  for  food,  are  scarcely  know 
among  savage  nations.  But  it  is  remarkable  that  almos 
al!  nit'i  MIS,  civilized  and  barbarous,  have  learned  to  makl 
intoxicating  liquors,  usually  from  the  juice  of  vegetable* 


ARTS  AND  MANUFACTURES.  185 

480.  Most  savage  and  barbarous  nations  form  their 
clothing  from  the  skins  of  animals.     Some  ol'these  na- 
tions understand  the  art  of  making  them  soft  and  plia- 
ble like  leather. 

481.  Some  barbarous  nations  make  a  kind  of  felt  for 
their  covering  ;  others,  as  in  Polynesia,   clothe  them- 
selves in  mats,  or  in  a  kind  of  cloth  resembling  paper, 
made  of  the  bark  of  trees.     Some  on  the  Eastern  Con- 
tinent are  acquainted  with  the  art  of  weaving  cloth. 

482.  Among  civilized   and    half-civilized    nations, 
hemp,  flax,  cotton,  wool  and  silk,  are  woven   into  vari- 
ous kinds  of  cloth,  which  are  used  for  clothing  and  other 
important  purposes. 

483.  We  obtain  the  finest  carpets  and  shawls  from 
Turkey  and  Persia,  and  the  manufacture  of  cloths  from 
cotton  and  silk  is  best  understood  among  the  half-civil- 
ized nations  of  Asia. 

4~4.  The  manufacture  of  cloths  is  also  carried  to  a 
high  degree  of  perfection  in  Great  Britain,  France,  Ita- 
ly and  Germany. 

485.  These  nations,  with   Holland,  Switzerland  and 
italy,  have  supplied  the  greater   part  of  the  civilized 
world  with  cloths.     Great  Britain  is  most  distinguished 
or  the  quantity  and  excellence  of  its  cloth  manufactures, 

486.  !  he  people  of  the  United  Statqg  have  beenrap- 
dly  improving  in  the  manufacture  of  cloths  within  a 
'ew  years,  especially    in   the    northern    states.     Many 
cinds  are  now  made  as  well  as  in  Europe. 

487.  Most  barbarous  nations  practice  iheartofpotte- 
•ii  11.   '»me  rude  way.     The  Chinese  porcelain,  or  china 

re,  was  formerly  superior  to  any  found  in  Europe. 
:t  is  now  equalled  only  in  France,  Germany  and  Eng- 
and.  which  furnish  most'of  the  fine  crockery  we  use. 

H--.  The  instruments  used  by  us  in  the  art  of  building 
ire  unknown  among  savages  ;  and  they  generally  live 
n  rude  huts,  little  better  than  those  made  by  the  beaver, 
ind  other  animals.  17 


186  CEXERAL    VIEWS. 


The  buildings  of  barbarous  nations  are  not  rnucl 
better  than  those  of  savages  ;  and  it  is  only  among  civ 
ilized  nations  that  this  art  is  perfectly  understood. 

490.  The  arts  of  navigation  and  printing  are  unknowi 
to  savage  and  barbarous  nations,  and  only    imperfect 
known  to  the  Chinese  and  other  half-civilized  nation* 

491.  The  Chinese.    Japanese  and   Birmans  cut  01 
blocks  of  wood  for  printing  each  page  in  a  book,  whicl 
cannot  be  used  for  any  other.      Civilized  nations  print 
from    moveable  types,   which  may    be   used  for  many 
ttooks  in  succession,  and  require  much  less  labour. 

.  Painting  and  sculpture,  of  a  rude  kind,  are 
among  the  first  art*  learned  by  savages.  They  were 
used  to  convey  information  and  preserve  the  history  of 
events  among  the  American  Indians,  especially  the 
Mexicans. 

.  They  are  carried  to  perfection   only  in  Italy, 
and  the  most  refined  nations  of  Europe. 

Quatiant.  —  Are  there  any  distinct  trades  among  ;av?.ge  na- 
tions ?  What  change  is  made  when  men  become  civilized? 
What  is  the  effect  of  this  change  ?  What  is  the  most  important 
art,  and  why  ':  Is  this  art  known  to  savage  and  barbarous  na- 
tions ?  Is  it  known  to  half-civilized  nations  •  What  can  you  say 
of  agriculture,  or  the  art  of  tilling  (he  ground  •  \\  hat  : 

'.and  the  art  of  cooking  and  preserving  food  lie-t  ?  What 
nations  make  intoxicating  liquors  r  What  is  the  clothing  ofl 
savage  and  batba«uus  nations,  generally  ?  What  exceptions  arm 
there  to  this  •  Wbalis  the  clothing  ot  civilized  nations  ? 

Where  is  the  manufacture  of  the  various  kinds  of  cloth  un- 
derstood ?  Which  are  the  principal  manufacturing  nations  *J 
What  has  bcm  d  >ne  in  the  United  Stales,  as  to  .-aamifactures  ?1 
What  nations  understand  pottery  :  \N  Ln'  ran  you  say  of  ihw 
buildings  of  ^avas^s  '.  What  of  those  in  barbarou*  nations  ?* 
What  important  arts  are  mentioned  next,  and  to  whom  are  theyj 
known  '  How  do  the  Chinese  print  ?  What  nations  understand 
painting  and  sculpture  .'  What  nations  excel  in  them  ? 

LNALa 

494.  Canals  are  artificial  passages  for  water,  usually 
made  to  unite  two  rivers  or  portions  of  the  sea,  for  in-' 
laud  navigation. 


187 

495.  They  often  pass  under  mountains,  and  often 
flow  in  acqueducts  over  rivers,  being  supplied  with  wa- 

er  from  some  higher  s'ream  or  lake. 

496.  On  the  Nile,  the  Euphrates  and  the  Rhine,  for 
some  distance  above  their  mouths,  canals  are  formed  to 
drain  the  land,  which  anewer  the  purposes  of  navigation. 

497.  In   the  Netherlands,    they    serve   as  roads,  on 
which  the  people  travel  in  boats  through  all  parts  of 
the  country. 

498.  China  is  most  distinguished  for  the  length  and 
size  of  its  canals,  some  of  which   are  large  enough  to 
receive  ships.     The  Imperial   Canal  of  China  is  500 
miles  long,  and  at  its  termination  in  the  Hoang-IIo,  one 
fifth  of  a  mile  wide. 

499.  The  principal  canals  in   Russia  are  from  the 
Volga  to  the  Neva  and  the  Don.     Connected  with  the 
great  rivers  of  Siberia,   they  form  an  inland  navigation, 
ilmost  complete,  from  the  Amour  of  Tartary  and  the 
Pacific  Ocean,  to  the  Baltic  and  Mediterranean  Seas. 

500.  In  Prussia  there  are  canals  which  connect  the 
Vistula  with  the  Oder  and  the  Elbe. 

501.  From  the  Baltic  Sea,  a  canal  is  cut  across  the 
southern  part  of  Denmark  to   the   North  Sea.     The 
Rhone  is  also  connected    by  several  canals    in  France, 
with  the  Seine  and  the  Loire.     In  this  way,  there  is  an 
inland  navigation  from  the  Baltic  to  the  Mediterranean. 

>02.  The  largest  canal  in  France,  and  indeed  in  Eu- 
rope, is  the  Canal  Royal  of  Languedoc,  180  miles  in 
len<jth,  from  the  Mediterranean  to  the  river  Garonne. 

•V"5.  There  are  numerous  canals  in  England  and 
Scotland  Twenty-two  of  these  connect  the  North  Sea 
with  the  Irish  Sea. 

504.  The  Grand  Trunk,   uniting  Liverpool    by  the 
rivers  Mersey  and   Trent,  to  Hull,  is  99  miles  long. 
It  has  a  branch  of  90  miles  to  the  Thames,  and  anoth- 
er of  40,  to  the  River  Severn. 

505.  In  the  United  States,  a  number  of  canals,  some 


133  GENERAL    VIEWS. 

of  them  6  or  7  miles  long,  have  been  cut  around  the 
fall:«  of  our  principal  rivers.  IVorth  Carolina  contains 
two  of  this  kind  ;  Virginia  twelve  ;  New- York  two  ;  and 
Massachusetts  and  N.  Hampshire,  several  more. 

o(K>.  The  greatest  work  of  this  kind,  yet  undertaken 

in   our  country,  is  the  Grand  Canal  of  SY\\   York,  de- 

ied  to  extend  :}•>«»  miles,  most  of  which  is  finished. 

U    1'iiitrfl   Stuffs  ) 

•'>'>' .  The  longest  canals  now  completed,  are  1st,  from 
the  Merrimack  river,  30  miles,  to  Boston  ;  2d,  from  Lake 
Champlain,  6U  miles,  to  the  Hudson  River;  3d,  one< 
1<>  miles,  connecting  the  waters  of  Chesapeake  Bay  \\  it 
those  of  Albeniarle  Sound  ;  and  4th,  one  of  ~2  miles,  ii 
South  Carolina,  between  Cooper  River  at  Charlcjtor 
and  the  Santee. 

'ions. — Wnnt  are  canals  ?  How  are  they  often  construe 
ed  ?  What  is  the  chief  object  of  canal*,  at    the  mouths  of  som« 
great  risers  ?  What  counliy  is  most  dittiamUwd  for  i'.s  cat.als 
What  is  the  length  and  size  of   the  Imperial    Canal    of  China  : 
What    places    are    connected    by    means  of  it  :  (See  the  map.) 
Wuat  are  the  chief  canals  of  Russia,  and  what  sreat  inland  n   v- 

i  i?  nearly  completed  by    them  r  Describe    the  < 
inland  waters,    with   two  portages  by  land,  from  the  Amour  tc 
the  Baltic  and  the  Mediterranean  ? 

Wlint    ranals    in   Prussia,  and    what  sras    are    connected  h} 
them  ?  What    i?   the    nearest    water  comminiiralicii    from  th< 

n  part   of  the    Bilfic   to  the   Rlinne  and    other  rivers 
France?   Which  is  (lie  longest  canal  in  France  ?  \V.:;*l  car  y< 

..lltnid   :   \\  i>-rf    is  "ihc 
Grand    Trunk,    what    branch*"   has   it   ?     Wi;;it    p  *t|   ;ire   ilins 
connected  ?   W>i*{  are  the  most    common    canals  in    i! 
ted  Stale*'  \\hirh    will    ho    iln-  !;en    finished,  anc 

bow  mui:li  is  now  complete  ;  \V"hat  are  the  longest  cana!<  com- 
pleted ? 

MMERCE. 

In  almost  every  country  th<-  pei»|.le  are  in  want  Ol 
:'nmd    in  othe    coni,!ric-,  while  tht-y  hive  more  of  other 
things  than  they  ne^d  :  ar^-  (his  gives  ;ise  to  ro»«M' 

5O9.  Thus  in    Ihn    1'nileu  S  have  more    wheat    anc 

cotton    than  we  need,  and    therefore  \ve  s«'ud  it  to  otii-  . 
tries,  in  exchange  for  coffee,  sugar  and  cloths,  of  which  we  ar 
in  want. 


COMMERCE. 


189 


510.  The  commerce   of  savage  nations  is  generally  the  ex- 
change of  one  kind  of  goods  for  another.     As  this  is  not  alwavs 
convenient,  civilized  nations  use  money  to  exchange  for  every 
thing. 

511.  Thus,  if  our  cotton  is  worth  more  than  the  cloth,  £tc. 
ive  obtain  from  Europeans,  they  give  us  money  to  pay  ;he  dif- 
ference ;  and  as  the  Chinese  do  not   want  our  productions,  wo 
send  the  money  to  buy  tea  from  them. 

512.  Gold,  silver,  and  copper  coins  are  the  money  of  civilized 
and  half-civilized  nations  ;  but    among  savage   and    barbarous 
nations,  beads,  shells,  or  even  grains  of  salt  are  used  as  money. 

513.  The  arts  of  .ship-building  and    navigation   are   well  un- 
derstood among  civilized  nations  only,  who  are  thus  enabled  to 
carry  on  commerce  by  sea,  with  all  pnris  of  the  world. 

514.  The  inhabitant*  of -Turkey  and  Barbary,  many  of  whom 
are  Greeks,  are  the  only  half-civilized   nations  who  understand 
these  arts  in  any  considerable  degree  ;  and   their  commerce  is 
chiefly  on  the  [Mediterranean  Sea. 

515.  The  Chinese,    and   other    half-civilized   nations,  are  so 
imperfectly  acquainted  with  navigation  and  ship-building,  that 
their  commerce   is  chiefly  in  their   own   country,  by  means  of 
rivers  and  canals. 

510.  In  the  dry  and  desert  countries  of  As>a  and  Africa,  com- 
merce is  chiefly  carried  on  over  land.  The  merchants  travel 
with  camels,  in  large  bodies,  called  caravans,  which  go  and  re- 
turn at  certain  periods.  A  similar  trade  is  carried  on  over  the 
Andes  of  South  America,  with  mules  and  lamas. 

517.  The  trade  of  savage  and  barbarous  nations  is  very  lim- 
ited, because  they  have  little  to  give  in  exchange,  and  their  ig- 
norance of  navigation  prevents  their  going  to  any  great  distance 
from  the  land. 

518  The  most  commercial  nations  of  the  world  are  Great 
Britain,  the  United  States,  France,  Spain,  Russia,  Portugal,  and 
the  Netherlands. 

519.  The  commerce  of  Spain,  Portugal   and   Holland,  which 
i  was  chiefly  with  her  colonies,  has  very  much  declined      That 

of  R:"=sia  is  rapidly  increasing. 

520.  The  ships  of  the  United  States,  as  well  as  those  of  Great 
Britain,  go,  in  great  numbers,  to  every  part  of  the  world,  and 
obtain  its  productions  and   manufactures,   usually  in  exchange 

[tor  those  of  their  own  country. 

521.  The  amount  of  shipping  from    the  ports  of  the  United 
[Stat'-s  is  nearly  equal  to  that  of  Great  Britain,  and  exceeds  that 

of  any  other  nation  whose  commerce  in  known. 
17* 


190  GENERAL  Yir.\\>. 

Questions. — Do  men  usually  find  all  they  want  in  their  own 
country?  What  arises  from  (hi?,  arnl  what  example  can  you 
give  ?  How  is  commerce  carried  on  in  savage  and  in  civilize 
nations  ?  Give  an  example .  \\  hat  kind  of  money  is  iu  UTf; 
What  arts  are  important  to  commerce,  and  what  nations  un 
derstand  them  r  What  halt-civilized  nations  understand  these 
arts  ?  What  can  you  say  of  other  half-civilized  nations,  and 
which  are  they  ?  What  means  of  internal  commerce  are  there 
in  China,  India,  and  the  Nands  of  Asia  P  (See  the  map,  and 
chapter  on  canals.)  Describe  the  commerce  of  Africa  and  other 
dry  countries.  Of  South  America. 

What  can  you  say  of  the  trade  of  savage  and  barbarous  na- 
tions ?  Whut  are  the  most  distinguished  commercial  nations 
of  the  world  .'  What  can  you  say  of  Spain  and  some  others 
of  these.'  Is  the  commerce  of  the  United  States  and  Great 
Britain  extei  -i'.  >•  :  I  I'm  i-  the  commerce  of  the  United  States 
compared  wi  h  that  of  other  nations  't  Mention  some  of  the 
principal  articles  we  use.  -md  where  wp  must  send  to  obtain 
them,  and  where  the  best  c»-.n  be  procured  .'  as  coffee,  cloths, 
••-.  porcelain,  precious  stones,  metals,  kc.  (Set.  Hie  account 
of  productions,  mamtfaclitits.  ^-c  ) 

LITERATURE. 

The  savage  and  barbarous  nations  of  the  world  cannot 
write  their  !;  and  have  no  books  to  teach  or  preserve 

what  they  know . 

523    They  can  keep  an  account  of  events,  only  by   drawin 
pictures  of  them,  or  by  songs    and    stories,  which  they  rerae 
brrand  teach  to  their  children. 

Among  the  Timers,  Arab?.  Laplanders,  and  other  ba 
barous  nations,  these  songs  ai.d  stories  are  repeated  iu  publi 
tu  amuse  large  assent' 

52->    Savage  and  barbarous  nations  are  ignorant    of  A»tron 
my,  Philosophy,  Geography,  and  even  of  Arithmetic  :  and  man 
MS  cannot  count  more  limn  ten. 

The  half-civilized  nations  o;  Asia  and  Africa  trri/e  their 
langiihies,  and  have  books  for  teaching  and  preserving  their 
knou  !•• 

527.  They  understand    Arithmetic,    and   something  of  other 
parts    of   the    Mathematics  and  Astronomy  ;    but    they   know 
scarcely  any  thing  of   Philosophy,  Chemistry,   Geography  and  I 
other  sciences. 

Most  languages  are  wri'.ten  from  the  left    hand   of  the 

ii   to  the    right,  like  ours;  but  the  Arabic,,  Persian, 

and    some    other    languages   of  Asia,    are    written  from  the 


EDUCATION.  191 

right  to  the  left,  and  the  Chinese,  in  columns  from  the  top  to  the 
boMoni  * 

529.  Among  thb  dviliz--d  'lalions  of  (he  world,  the  sciences 
are  well  Understood,  a;>d  therr  aie  nuruerou.s  books. 

530  Great  Britian,    France  f<nd    German--. ,    including  part  of 
Austria  and  i'nis-.ia,  are  mn«t  distinguished  for  Iparnrd  nmn  and 
discoveries  in  science  ;  and  from  them  must  of  our  learning  has 
been  d   rived. 

531  Sweden,    Denrrark,    Holland     Switzerland,    Italy    and 
Sprfi/i    are   respertable    f  r  science    and  learning,    but    Sweden 
holds  the  highest  rank  among  these  nations. 

532  Portugal,  Turkey,  Poland,  arid  .\orway  are  now  less  dis- 
tinguished for  learned  men  than  any  other  parts  of  Europe. 

533.  Russia  has  been  advancing  for  100  yt-ars   from  a  state  of 
barbarism  ;  the  sciences  are    now  understood  and  cultivated  in 
the  principal  towns  and  universities,  and  the  emperor  docs  much 
to  promote  them. 

534.  Almost  all  the  valuable  knowledge  of  European  nations 
is  found  in  the  United    States;  but  the    number  ot  our  learned 
men  is  far  less  than  in  many  of  them. 

Questions. —  What  is  a  distinguishing  characteristic  of  sav- 
age end  barbarous  nations  ?  How  do  they  keep  an  account  of 
events?  'V  hat  is  common  among  the  Tartars  and  some  other 
nation^  ?  What  in  the  state  of  knowledge  among  savage  and  bar- 
barous nations  ?  What  can  you  say  of  the  language?  and  state 
of  knowledge  in  half-civilized  nations  ?  How  are  most  langua- 
ges written  ? 

In  what  nations  are  the  sciences  understood  ?  What  nations 
are  now  most  distinguished  for  science  ?  What  is  the  state  of 
Italy.  Spain,  Holland,  &c.  ?  In  what  countries  of  Europe  is 
learning  neglected  ?  What  can  yon  say  of  Ru»sia?  How  do  the 
United  States  compare  with  European  countries  in  learning  ? 
EDUCATION. 

533.  In  civilized  countries,  numerous  universities  and  colleges 
are  established,  to  give  instruction  in  all  branches  of  learning 
and  science. 

5S(t.  The  number  of  instructors  and  students  in  the  celebrat- 
ed universities  of  Europe  is  greater  than  in  ours,  the  course  of 
instruction  more  extensive,  and  the  libraries  much  larger  ;  but 
far  less  attention  is  paid  to  the  conduct  and  improvement  of  the 
pupils. 

*The  whole  number  of  languages  known,  is  stated  by  Ade- 
lung,  to  be  3,000,  of  which  1,200  are  in  America. 


192  UENTRAL    VIEWS. 

There  are  also  universities  among  half-civilizrd  nations  ; 
but  they  are  devoted  to  the  instruction  of  their  priests  and  public 
officers,  in  their  rdigiou  and  laws. 

538.  In  many  countries  distinguished  fortbeir  learned  men, 
the    common  people   are  very  ignorant,   for  want  of  schools  ; 
while  in  others,  like  the  United  States,  which  have  not  so  many 
learned    men,   the  common   people  are  generally  well  educa- 
ted. 

539.  The   Chinese,  Japanese  and    Birmans  print  hooks  from 
blocks  of  wood,  but  in  half-civilized  nations  generally,  they  are 
written  on  leaves  or  rolls  of  parchment,   and  arc  so  expi-nrive, 
that  the  rich  only  can  buy  them. 

540.  In  r.ivilieed  countries,  books  are  printed  from  types,   at 
a  very  cheap  rate,  and  it  is  much  more  easy  for  the  poor  to  ob- 
tain knowledge. 

541.  It  is  the  remark  of  an  European  writer,   concerning  the 
United  States,  that   "  the  great  body  of  the  American  people  is 
belter  tducalf.d  than  the  bulk  of  any  European  community." 

542.  Our  schools  are  so  numerous,  and  instruction  is  so  easily 
obtained,   that  few  are  found,    at  least  in  the  northern  parts  of 
the  United  States,  who  cannot  read  and  write,  and  information 
is  constantly  spread  by  books  and  news-papers. 

543.  Schools  for  the  poor  have  been  long  established  in  Scot- 
land, Iceland,  Norway,  Sweden,  Denmark,   Holland  and  Swit- 
zerland, and  the  common  people  of  these  countries  are  general- 
Jit  to  read  and  write. 

544.  In  England,  the  education  of  the  common  people  is  not  so 
good  ;  but  numerous  schools  have  been  established  within  a  few 
years,  for  the  education  of  the  poor. 

545.  The  common  people  of  France  are  very  ignorant. 
Those  of  Ireland  in  a  much  lower  state.  In  Russia.  Poland  aad 
Austria,  the  lower  classes  are  generally  slaves  to  the  nobles, 
and  almost  barbarous.  But  all  these  countries  have  begun  to 
establish  schools  for  their  instruction. 

54'1  In  most  parts  of  Germany  and  the  south  of  Europe  the 
poor  are  extremely  ignoran  ,  and  are  left  without  instructor . 

547.  In    South  America  and  the   European    colonies  of  .he 
East  and  West  Indies,  there  are  some   men  of  education  ;.    jut 

l.ools  are  established,   and  the  common  people  are  very 
ignorant. 

548.  In  the  half-civilized  nations  of  Asia  and  Africa,  children 
of  the  higher   classes   learu    to  read  and   write.      The  poor  >i  e 
usually  taught  only  some  mechanic  art. 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS.  1 

Questions. — What   institutions  of  learning  are   there    among 
civilized  nations?  Compare  those  of  Europe  &  of  the  U.  States. 
Are  there  similar-  institutions   in  h  di-"'iv  lized    countries?  Are 
the  common  people  always  well  educated  where  there  are  ma- 
ny learned  men  ?   How    do  the  books  of  hall-civilized  nations 
differ  f  ru  m  ours  ?  What  effect  lias  this  on  the  state  of  learning  ? 
What  is  the    state  ot  education  in   the    United    States  ?  What 
are    the   effects  ot    schools  among  us   ?      ^  here   have  public 
schools  riecn  long  known  ?  What  is  the  slate    of  education   in 
Sitglaiicl  ?  What  i.«  the  stale  of  the  common  people  in  Frauce — 
r<:lan(i — R  r--ia — Ps  land  and  Austria  ?  In  the  south  of  Europe  ? 
n  South   Aii.<»'-i(M    ai:d  other  colonies?  What  can    you  say  of 
le  schools  of  ih  •  liaif -civilized  nations  ? 

MANNERS  AM)  CUSTOMS  OF  NATIONS. 

FOOD. 

549  The  food  of  savage  nations  consists  chiefly  of  fish  and 
vile  animtls,  with  such  fruits  and  nourishing  vegetables  as  they 
can  find. 

550.  Some  tribes  of  South  America  and  Africa,  who  are  cal- 
;d  cannibals,  are  accu<*tiiiiied  to  eat    human  flesh  :  and  several 
n  the  islands  of  the    Pacific   ocean  feast  on    the  bodies  of  their 

emips  killed  or  taken  Li  war. 

551.  Barbarous   nations   who    lead  a  wandering  life,  like  the 
["("tars,  live   principally  on  the  milk  and   flesh  of  their   cattle, 
lieep,  camels  and  horses;  but  (host-   who  are  more  settled,  like 
. lie  inliahita'ils  of  Polynesia  and   Africa,  depend  chiefly   on  the 
ruits  of  the  earth. 

552.  The   half  civilized   nations  in   the    hot  countries  of  Asia 
anil  Africa,  live  fliieflyon   rice  arid  other  vegetables;  and    the 
crowded    population    of  Southern    Asia  renders  food  so  scarce, 

hat  the  poor  are  glad  to  eat  mice,  lizards,  and  even  worms  and 
limpets. 

o.?  In  warm  climates,  wines  made  from  the  juice  of  grapes 
and  the  palm  tree,  with  beer  and  other  exhilarating  liquors 
made  of  rice  and  other  vegetables,  are  the  principal  drinks. 

551.  In  temperate  and  cold  countries,  more  animal  food  is 
used  with  spiritous  H'juors  distilled  from  grain  and  fruits,  and 
among  the  Tartars,  even  from  milk. 

555.  luthe  countries  neart'te  polar  circles,  flesh  or  fish  is  the 
principal  food  .n  the  inhabitants  ;  and  among  the  Greenlanders, 
•squimaux,  and  other   -lations  living  near  the  sea,  the   oil  ex- 
t'roni  A  hales,  seals,  and   other  marine  animals,  is  much 
,.  >'•  •    -  f.   >d. 
5.3(5.  In  these  countries,  grain  and   vegetables  ars  so   scarce, 


^    ^4  <;EXERAL  vii 

that  they  often    grind  the  bark  of  tree?  to  make    bread,  and  ii 
some  parts  even  their  cattle  are  fed  on  fish,  for  want  of  grass 
vegetables. 

5o7.  In  America,  fiVsh  is  the  principal  food  of  all  classes  ;  bi 
in  Europe,  the  poor  subsist  chiefly  on  vegetables  HIM!  ti>h. 

558.  Tea  is  the  most  common  drink  in  China  and  Japan,  am 
coffee,  in  Arabia,  Turkey  and  Peisia. 

559.  Botii  tea  and  coffee  are  much  used  in  Europe  and  Nortl 
America  ;  but  matte,  or  the  tea  of  South    America,  is  general)] 
used  in  the  southern  parts  of  that  country. 

Questions. — What  is  the  principal  food  of  savage  nations  ? 
Mention  some  of  these  nations.  Are  there  any  nations  who 
eat  human  flesh  ?  What  is  the  food  ot  barbarous  nations  gener- 
ally .'  What  of  halt  civilized  nations  ?  Mention  some  of  them. 
What  drinks  are  common  in  warm  climates  :  What  kind  of 
food  and  drink  are  most  common  in  cold  countries  •  What  is 
the  principal  food  in  the  countries  near  the  polar  cinU:  ?  Are 
vegetables  abundant  in  these  countries  ?  What  are  the  kinds  of 
food  most  used  in  America  and  Europe  ?  In  wnat  countries  are 
tea  and  coffee  the  most  common  drinks  :  What  are  common  in 
America  ? 

DRESS  AKD  ORNAMKJtTS.  ^ 

660.  In  warm  climates,  savage  and  barbarous  nations  are  usu- 
ally almost  naked  ;  and  the  poor,  even  in  half  civilized  coun- 
tries, wear  very  little  clothing. 

561.  The  skins   of  animals  are    generally  used  for  clothing 
among  savage  and  barbarous  nations. 

562.  The  Tartars  dress  in  horse  hides,  and  many  of  the 
icsand  Africans,  and  even  of  the  Russians,  in  sheep  skins,  will 
the  wool  turned  inward*  in  winter  and  outwards,  in  summer. 

563.  The  people  of  Polynesia,  and  some  other  barbarous  coin 

•  ess  in  mats  of  reeds  or  «traw,  or  in  cloth  nvide  of  bark. 
564    Civilized  and  half-civilised  nations,  and  some  of  the  bar- 
barous nations  of  Africa,  dress  in  cloths  of  linen,  cotton,  silk 
and  «  oolen. 

565.  Cotton  and  silk   are  most  used  in  warm  countries  ;  lin- 
en nnd  woolen  in  colder  climates  ;  aijd  in  very  cold  countries, 
fur-  ;<re  u«ed  in  addition. 

566.  The    dress  of  the    half-civilized  nations  of  Asia  and  Af- 
rica,  is  generally  a  robe,    with  a  close   vest,  large  drawer.-,  and 
a  tin-tun  or  cap  on    the  head;  and   females  HI-"  covered    from 
head  to  foot  with  a  thick  veil,  which  conceals  the   whole  face 
except  the  eyes. 

orlT.  Civilized  nations  generally  have  a  tight  dress  for  males, 
and  a  loose  flowing  dress  for  females.  They  are  made  in 


HABITATIONS.  195 

different  forms  which  are  often  changed  ;   while'  the  fashions  of 
Asiatic  nations  continue  always  the  same. 

568.  The  Russians,  Poles  and    Hungarians   dress   more  like 
Asiatics  than  Europeans. 

569.  The    Asiatic  nations   generally  wear   long  beards  ;  bat 
Europeans,  except  in  Russia  and  Norway,  cut  them  oft',  and  the 
Indians  of  America  pluck  them  out. 

57C.  The  Chinese,  some  of  the  Tartars  and  the  Poles  shave 
their  heads,  except  a  single  lock  of  h-iir  on  the  crown. 

571.  Among  civilized  nation?,  gold  and   jewels  are  worn  in 
the  ears,  and  on  the  neck,  wrists   and  head,  often  with  the  ad- 
dition of  feathers. 

572.  Besides  these  ornaments,  savage  and  barbarous  nations 
frequently  wear  rings  in    the  nose  and  lips,  and  they  are  very 
fond  of  adorning  themselves  with  feathers  and   pieces  of  glass 
and  metal. 

573.  In  some  nations  of  Europe  it  is  common  for  females  to 
paint  their  faces.     The  same  custom  prevails  among  savage  and 
barbarous  nations,  but  they  use  a  greater  number  of  colours,  and 
frequently  blacken  their  teeth  and  eyebrows. 

574.  Savages  are   also  accustomed  to  paint  their  bodies,  and 
"verthem  with  marks  or  scars  to  render  themselves  beautiful 

,-r  terrible,  especially  when  they  are  going  to  war. 

Questions. — What  can  you  say  of  the  dress  of  nations  in 
warm  climates  ?  Wiiat  is  used  for  clothing  among  savages  ? 
What  skins  are  used  among  the  Tartars  and  other  barbarous 
nations  ?  What  is  used  for  dress  in  Polynesia  ?  What  among 
civilized  and  half-civilized  nations?  What  are  most  used  in 
warm  climates,  and  what  in  others  ?  What  is  the  dress  of  half- 
civilized  nations  ?  What  of  civilized  nations  ?  What  European, 
na'tions  dress  in  the  Asiatic  manner  ?  What  nation?  wear  long 
beards,  and  what  is  the  custom  of  other  nations  ?  What  nations 
shave  the  head  ?  What  ornaments  are  used  by  civilized  nations  ? 
What  are  those  used  by  savages  .'  Where  is  it  customary  to 
paint  the  face  ?  How  do  savages  attempt  to  improve  their  ap- 
pearance ? 

HABITATIONS. 

575.  The    American   Indians   and  other  savages   live  in  huts 
bnilt  of  stakes,  twigs  or  bark,  often  plastered  with  earth,  with  a 

_ho!e  in  the  roof  to  let  out  the  smoke. 

576.  In  the  frozen  regions  of  Lapland,  Siberia,  fcc.  they  usu- 
ally build  their  huts  half  underground,  that  they  may  be  warm- 
er, and  no   opening  is  left  lor  the    smoke,  except  the  door. 

577.  The  Tartars,  Arabs  and  other  wandering  nations  live  in 


196  CF.XERAL    REVIEW. 

tents   of  felt  or  cloth,  which  they  remove   from  place  to  place. 
(S«  p.  135  and  141.) 

•?ome  barbarous  nations  in  warm  climate s,  especially  in 
Polynesia,  build  very  neat  huts  of  cane,  lined  aud  covered  with, 
mats. 

579  The  houses  of  the  higher  classes  in  Europe  ii  Asia,  are 
usually  of  inick  or  stone,  and  in  the  warm  countries,  are  buiK 
with  an  open  court  or  square  io  the  centre,  and  with  flat  roofs. 

580.  In  Asia,  4t  in  Poland.  Ireland,  Portugal  &.  v  n.p  other 
parts  of  Europe  the  habitations  of  the  poor  are  miserable  cot- 
tages formed  or  plastered  \vitb  clay,  and  thatched  wilh  leaves 
»r  straw  ;  and  far  inferior  to  tbe poortst  u?ua:l;.  ;r  own 

•onntry.     These  nave  usually  but  one  room  for  all  the  family 
and  oft*  •  or  bed,  but  tbe  ground  covered  with  straw 

.  -ge  and  barbarous  i.atioiiE.  and  even  in  Irt 
land,  Poland,  ard  Russia,  the  cattle  and  other  ht-n?ts  often  live 
in  the  iarae  room  with  the  family  to  which  (bey  belong.     In  the 
countdrs  on  the  Mediterranean,  the  lower  stoiy  of  the  house  is 
eommoi.iy  used  as  a  stable. 

\-iatics  have  liltle  farcitnre  in  their  hoi:?*>=.  as  they 
are  accustomed  to  sit,  eat  and  sleep  on  a  part  of  the  floor,  is  Inch. 
is  road*-  higher  than  the  re*t.  and  covered  wilh  carpets. 

Qu(tli-j<is — \\  bat  account  is  given  ol  tbe  habitations  of 
nations.'  How  p.re  they  built  in  tbe   f.-'.zf:i   r^inus 

•iering   barbarian-. *  Ol    (he   Australasians  a- 
•f  ?  (Seep.  '.  -.-')  What  in  warrjclr 

barrarous  nations  •:  Uhai  ••«: 

in  Eunipe  and  Asia  :  \\  hat   arf  !lio-e   of  the    poor  coi. 
wilhliM«eot  our  <:"i». ,tr>   •  \'«  •-  e  are  cattle  kept   am 
bare, is  natio  f  iur,trie»  on  Itie  Medilerraueau  :   How 

do  ihe  Asiatics  sit  aisd  .- 

rr. 

583.  Amo  ihe  sick,  the  a?ed,  «rd  the 

feeble  are  taken  tare  of,  and  there  are  niiiKfi  ,i!s  and 

as\ lums  for  the  <iistres«fcd. 

In  Pngan  u,.d    Mahometan    c'>upfrif-s,   such    institutions 
are  scarc--ly  koowo, and  the  poor  and  unfortunate  are  P. 
ally  '.re'-ited  wilh  kiud' 

Among  Pajran?,  it  is  common  to  leave  i 
h.    iritbont    trv  i:  g    I. 
^vagt  nations,  are  »> « 

wn   paren'.  - 


STATE    OF   SOCIETY.  1^7 

586.  The  Christian  religion  requires  men  to  be  kind  and  be- 
nevolent to  all,  of  every  nation  ;  and  among  Christian  nations', 
even  enemies,  taken  in  war,  are  usually  treated  with  kindness. 

587.  Mahometans  think  it    right  to   injure  or  kill  any  person 
of  another  religion  ;  and   among   Mahometan    and  Pagan  na- 
tions, those  taken  in  war  are  made  slaves,  or  cruelly  treated. 

588.  Among  civilized  nations  the  laws  do   not  allow  private 
evenge  ;  but  in  savage  and  barbarous  nations,  each  man  reven- 
,es  himself,  by  killing  or  injuring  those  who  offend  him. 

589.  In  all  savage  and  barbarous  countries,  females  are  obli- 
<*ed  to  carry  burdens  and  perform  the  most  severe  labours,  while 

men  are  sleeping  or  amusing  themselves. 
40.   In  China   they  are  often  obliged  to  drag  the  plough:  in 
•enland  they    fish  with   their    husbands  at    sea  ;  and  even  in 
vjermany,  Sweden  and  other  parts  of  Europe,  they  are  accus- 
tomed to  labour  in  the  field. 

591.  Among   balf-civiliz^d    nations   females  are  regarded  as 
slaves,  of  no  use  but  to  serve  and  amuse  their   husbands,  espe- 
cially in  Mahometan   countries.     In  China,  Java,  Circa.ssia  and 
almost  all  barbarous  and  savage   nations,  they  are   bought   and 
sold  as  wives,  without  their  own  consent. 

592.  In  most  half-civilized  countries,  females  receive    no  in- 
struction, f-xrept  in    music,  dancing  and  embroidery  ;  they  are 
not  permitted  ID  converse  with  men,  even  of  their  own  families  : 
and  (hey  are  often  treated  with  thegreatest  cruelty  by  their  hus- 
bands. 

593  The  inhabitants  of  Thibet  nnd  some  of  the  Asiatic  Isl- 
ands, are  the  only  half-civilized  people  who  treat  females  with 
respect  and  kindness. 

694.  In  Hindoostan  and  China,  great  numbers  of  infants,  par- 
ticularly females,  are  destroyed  every  year,  from  the  poverty  of 
the  people,  or  as  an  act  of  religious  worship. 

Questions. — Where  do  we  find  hospitals  and  asylums  for  the 
distressed  ?  What  parts  of  the  world  are  Christian  ?  (See  Chart.) 
Are  there  such  institutions  in  Pagan  and  Mahometan  court rio  ? 
Mention  these  countries  ?  How  are  the  sick  and  aged  trented 
among  the  Tartars?  How  are  prisoners  taken  in  war  I. 
among  Christian  nations?  How  among  Mahometans  and  Pa- 
gans ?  In  what  nations  is  revenge  forbidden  ?  How  are  females 
treated  in  savage  and  barbarous  nations  ?  How  are  they  em- 
ployed in  China,  and  other  countries  mentioned  ?  How  are 
they  regarded  among  half-civilized  nations  ?  What  instruction 
and  treatment  do  they  receive?  In  what  half-civilized  coun- 
tries are  females  treated  kindly  ?  In  what  countries  are  infants 
destroyed.  18 


COMPARATIVE  TABLES 

OF  RIVERS,  MOUNTAINS.  CITIES  AND  C  OUNTRIE?, 

S1TIC*,  LIBRARIES  AND  MISSIONARY  STATIONS, 

ACCENTED    FOR    PRONUNCIATION. 

NOTI:.—  The  names  marked  with,  an  asterisk  (*)  are  not  found  on 
the  map.— Those  in  Italic  belong  to  the  Western  Continent,  and 
those  in  Roman  letters  to  the  Eastern. 

RULES  FOR  PRONUNCIATION. 

On  a  anally  proaoaoccd  a«  oa  Touleux,  Rou»».  Moarzouk, 

*c  .  ti  and  iea»e<.  aiin  Kiel.  Kir».  Dniei-ei.  Doiesur.  Niemen.  Liege 
.-.  and  Drontheirn,  &e.  ;  i  as  t.  in  Trieste,  Mobile.  Gnayaqail.  St.  Ao- 
pUHuie.  Porto  Rico,  tc  ;  auair  a«  ui  Ralei;b.  llaaiaha,  Ottawa,  Wa- 
ka.h  ;oe  aia.in  Haarlem  ;  «a  as  w.  in  Gtmyaquil.  Guatimala,  fcc.  ;  eaurf 
a>  «,  in  BoardtkOi.  4-c  ;  c*  at  *.  in  Munich  Zurich.  Bncbarett  Cbermon, 
JCoeh*.  Cbiapa.  C  himbaraxo ;  g  it  «ilent  in  Bolofna,  roloyoe.  CajbmriJ 
SchyyiSill  is  uronoanced  Scboolkill ;  Leipsic.  Lipe*ic  ;  M»r»eille».  Marsatls. 


S                     5 

o                      ao 

§c            £ 
0           .- 
J>    »             « 

•j 

a 

3 

•*~L     »— 

U 

k|.s 

^° 

•^ 

,_  <; 

.,  a 

^>~s 

-^  S           5 

_  -^   =        o 

5.H 

5-H^      t: 

•  J 

RIVERS. 


199 


201) 


CITIES   OF  THE   FIRST   RANK. 


CITIES  OF  THE  SECOND  RANK. 

S    5  5  •;: 


201 


s  «-  jrt  *~  O          C  -i          ^i    «D  O£-Q          C 

» "»  S>    ST?  s  -  s  -o  S  N  =  .s  •-  I .«  K~  S     4  g  1  ovl 


i-^JS.S"      "^.Hs^ca-5—  '•5"b^0£ 


"V»  C*  .*  *  5  'c 


=   £  1.    C9  -  '  —    u    .,   "-1   ?s         2 
S  a  =  .-  ^  a  3  «  ^3        §  « 
~oeoaQSF-*C8»B<*        '^i"Z 


?2     « 

i 

•*?  -  =  a 

"si  "*  **_3 

Si.  *  ' 


isg- 


Is 


.-  & 


ceo 

__     i  -in  j;  =     ^     -r.  •- 

o~r      ._-*    I    i,      -r 


^—  -O        —  DC_I  —  ,*  ^   s  co  i   r       '~   s    I    u 

02   ^  ji  "5  s  a  .~  Jf1  ^   C^.JJ   *>  X  J..5   x  ?  ^   •=        aj—   i~5 

oC^sgiajS'CwB—  »  ~~  *•-""»'?-       •*•'•£.% 

m  ia» a 


—  x} 

=  u  > 


'202 


CITIES  OP  THE  THIRD  HANK. 


J  e 


-2  s 

JJ  c     •  s  « 

- 


~  r  5?  H  H  Q 


S  -  ~     5 
r^  »t-"    «0~ 

r*i  w  »   «> 


CITIES, 


203 


«;-.£  c^S 
ll'jlll 

:||1|t 

?-<  -r~  ^  oC  '"  a,  !T  ^  a.  cr  Q~ 

,H.§ 

8 

m 

*         *- 

1 
<$ 

5 
-.           ^- 

a 

?x 

z 

<3> 

e 
^ 

^          cUD 


c."J      5 


-    c   £    >f 


8 

5  J  t 


ST=   « 


g  cd  •*-*  d)  • 


204     S.  TOVVNS-UNIVERSITIES-LIBRAKIES-M.  STATIONS. 


00  lO        «O        >O        CO    *  —  OJ 

ei          co      <N      T  '-s  >o  — < 


z   -  s  x  ~"  *  .£ 

»•     -     ;?     s  •-  LT 

u.    "^    •• 


CB  -5  J  K  -  S  /;  =  =  M  ^  -S      jr.*  -a 

|  .2  3      5  n      g  _.*. "!«  3  1 1     .1  5. | 

?  ^  J  r  J  s  "^  1  s  6-3 


MOUNTAINS. 


- 

3T 

2 

o 

:=• 

3C 

5> 

8 

i. 

8 

S 

5 

•n-' 

»~ 

ef 

•* 

2      « 

4    » 

oT 

af 

^  gl& 

Iz;  h^-?  •-  s  « 

M  S-s-iJS 

OT  ft.q^ 

§  ^?S 


lill^lji'il! 

x^a-sS^-*"^* 


.-  T3    *  *=>C  -      •   W    C    _; 

«    ££.«2sj<«i. 


*:j3*« 

t.  •~^"  ••»'»• 

^.•<  c  *  ~s  ° 

^-a^a 

?  S  -  «  ^  S 

w>  :Z"  rr»  r  i  -.      ,T* 


U  Q  »  OQ  O 


206 


POPCLATIOX  OF  COUNTRIES. 

~  c     C       c       ~ 


=    |1« 

&   ' 


-  •£  "I  -    -       °  ^  x  =  =  i  -          ~~  x"^       K  •§ 

rH-M"  \  ~-  ^i^l^^ 

r.  —  ?.<£•'•£>  —  '—  7.  '-^  z,  —      ^.  • s  >.  ^.'-•i.  ~^y^ 

°?  .     *?  e< 


H 

— 

!M 

CJ 

C 

r 

•5 

c 

1 

s 

-•  x      c 

|    0    V 

^    ^ 

^-^^^'^  1    I  ^  ^  -^  =  z 

=  -T   E   •    2  --       •*•  -    - 

-  -  -  jc  5^4 Z  ^  zl  s:  ^  HI.  ^ 


EXTENT  OP  COUNTRIES 


207 


5  s.0. 

O  I-^S-J 

0~:OCO 


_O  •*  Oi  O 


sgggggggL 

Cioeooo^elt^— ico 


tf 


OOJ-CBlS^S----55154"^^ 
04O4--i:r,  X5JCRCM-S  ^  "™ 

;  04 1-1      <x 


Ol  CD  TJ"  —    w    CB  C  (Q 


|  ^l  i  ;g .« "?  u 


•••'sSg  «'££   •sla'i5aS-M' 


REVENUE — ARMY — NAVY. 
^  —  !~  h,  c   7  t^  IS  X  •£  X  'C 

s.  r. '—  r>  x  f~  -c  ui  «:  «  ^  — 


i--  c  r>  -!•      «c  «  x 

X  X  X  X         X  35  CD 


c   \   1| 
—  oo^ 

^:. 

S  — 


!  *  I  s  ••=  s 

I'gjig.s 

:  <--  r  -  £  S 

:,£~  5 
1*0  §  g 
'       o  o 
•  j= 


Ii"lii|fil!lii!liri'i 


E  ?  ? 


§  as  ~  h  .*  _  -B  &  >-Z  ®  «  S  5  g  «  S 


CUHMi^aietfHao 


3    V 

o  r 

U    3 


II    ll    1 

o  'c  >•  ^  ** 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    DIVERSITY   OF    CAIIFOR 


LIBRARY    OF    THF 


nr 


IV.ERSITY   OF   CALIFORNIA          LIBRARY    OF 


